ML20246P732: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(StriderTol Bot change)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 1: Line 1:
#REDIRECT [[IR 05000413/1989009]]
{{Adams
| number = ML20246P732
| issue date = 07/10/1989
| title = Insp Repts 50-413/89-09 & 50-414/89-09 on 890410-0505. Violations Noted.Major Areas Inspected:Various Plant Groups Including Operations,Maint,Qa,Engineering & Training in Support of Safe Plant Operations
| author name = Gibbs R, Lawyer L
| author affiliation = NRC OFFICE OF INSPECTION & ENFORCEMENT (IE REGION II)
| addressee name =
| addressee affiliation =
| docket = 05000413, 05000414
| license number =
| contact person =
| document report number = 50-413-89-09, 50-413-89-9, 50-414-89-09, 50-414-89-9, NUDOCS 8907200297
| package number = ML20246P695
| document type = INSPECTION REPORT, NRC-GENERATED, INSPECTION REPORT, UTILITY, TEXT-INSPECTION & AUDIT & I&E CIRCULARS
| page count = 86
}}
See also: [[see also::IR 05000413/1989009]]
 
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:--    -          ... - - - - _.- . _ _ . -                      _    _          --    --
          *
      4J yg Miho                                                                UNITED STATES
  *      J.    J-                    'o -                          NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION
        _ g* J ' ' ' .-          '* W :                                            ggagou gg
                                                                          101 MARtETTA STREET,N.W,'
        h
        :*                                    e'                            ATLANTA, oEORGI A 30323
          %y
              - *** +
                                  [
L                . Report Nos.: 50-413/89-09:and 50-414/89-09
              ' Licensee: Duke Power Company
                                                  422 South Church Street-
i.                                                Charlotte, NC.28242
                Docket No.: 50-413 and 50-414                                                  License Nos.: NPF-35 and NPF-52
                  Facility Name: Catawb'a 1 and 2
                  Inspection Conducted: April 10-May 5,1989,                                      Exit Conducted: May 16, 1989.
                                                                                                                        4
              ; Inspectors-                                    [
                                                  p . Mbbs;. Team Leader
                                                      R
                                                                                                                Yl, 7 i ti rd)
                                                                                                                  Datp'Sitned
                                                    ,            ifh        -'
                                                  M . Lawyer, Team Leader (EOPs)
                                                                                                                W)v        tn Yi
                                                                                                                  Datp S t'gned
                                                      Team Members-      R. Bernhard
                                                                          G. Bryan, Jr.
                                                                          M. Ernstes
                                                                          G. Maxwel'
                                                                          R. Musser
                                                                          S. Ninh
                                                                          C. Pau',k'
                                                                          G. Cn yers.
                                                                          R. Schin
                                                                          A. Sutthoff
                                                      Accompanying Personnel: Arie de Joode, Ministry of Social Affairs
                                                                _                        d7Em      ment, Nuclear Department, The
                                                                                          eth      nds.
                                                              /
                Approved by:                                  '
                                                                      -                                      dm/ /0,/9 W
                                                W P."Kellogg, Chief            .-
                                                                                    / .                          /Date 'Signec
                                                      Operational Programs 4 tion
                                                      Operations Branch
                                                      Division of Reactor Safety
                . SUMMARY
                Scope:                          This was a special announced Operational Safety Team Inspection
                                                  (OSTI). The OSTI evaluated the licensee's current level of perform-
                                                  ance in the area of plant operations. The inspection included an
                                                  evaluation .of the effectiveness of various plant groups including
                                                Operations, Maintenance, Quality Assurance, Engineering, and Training
                                                  in support of safe plant operations. Plant management's awareness
                                                  of, involvement in, and support of safe plant operation were also
                                                  evaluated.
                                                                                    *
                                                8907200297 890710
                                                PDR .ADOCK 05000413      PDC
                                                g                                    y
 
                                            _- .              .      __  _    _        - __- _ _ _ - - _ _ _            .___  __
                                                                                                                                    _-__
        f
  II*'
  g      #
            s
                                                                                    2'
            .
      i
                                                  The inspection.was divided into three major areas including Opera-
                                                  tions, Support of Operations, ' and Emergency Operating Procedures.
                                                  The. team placed emphasis on interviews -of ' personnel at all levels,
                                                  observations of plant' activities and meetings, extensive . control room
                                                  observations, and system walkdowns. The team also reviewed plant
                                                  deviation' reports, LERs for the. current SAlp evaluation period, and'
                                                  evaluated the effectiveness of the licensee's root cause identifica-
                                                  tion; short term and programmatic corrective actions, and repttitive ~
                                                  failure. trending and related corrective actions.
              Results: The 'overall assessment concluded that the site is well-managed. The
                                                  Emergency 0perating Procedures were determined to adequately cover the
                                                  broad range of- accidents and equipment failures necessary. for safe
                                                  shutdown of the plant. Only minor problems were found by the team. A
                                                  . summary of the weak areas and strong areas observed by the. team are as
                                                  follows:
                  Weaknesses:
                  -
                                                  Management used verbal instructions to modify safety related proce-
                                                  dures for cold leg accumulators instead of . issuing a comprehensive
                                                  written procedure. (paragraph 2.a.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-02)
                  -
                                                  Controis on-the thermal power computer and its inputs are weak. This
                                                  computer' is used for normal determination of plant power level and
                                                  for. adjusting the gain on the nuclear instruments. (paragraph 2.b.)
                                                  (IFI 413,414/89-09-03)
i-
                  -
                                                  0ne '10 CFR 50.59 evaluation was weak concerning a modification to
                                                  the nuclear service water pit strainer instrumentation. Annuncia-
                                                  tors' described in the FSAR were disabled for about 30 days with no
                                                  written . consideration of compensatory action.              (paragraph 2.c.)
                                                  (IFI 413,414/89-09-04)
                  --
                                                  .Many of the site's safety related pump rooms are contaminated, which'
l                                                  inhibits operator and management surveillance. (paragraph 2.e.)'
                                                  (IFI 413,414/89-09-05)
                  -
                                                  Auxiliary operators on rounds failed to frisk immediately after
                                                  exiting contaminated areas. (paragraph 2.e.) (VIO 413,414/89-09-01)
                  -
                                                  Control of doors was weak, as indicated by the three open fire or
                                                    security doors found by the team. (paragraph 2.g.)
                                                  (IFI 413,414/89-09-06)
                  -
                                                    In the Independent Verification and Safety Tag procedures, three                    I
                                                    items for potential improvement are identified.            (paragraph 2.1.)
                                                    (IFI 413,414/89-09-07)
                  -
                                                  Valve 1-KC-9 (component cooling water pump 1A2 dischars e valve) which
                                                    is required to be locked by site procedures was found not locked
                                                  during system walkdown.    (paragraph 2.k.) (VIO 413,414/89-09-01)
l    .                _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _
 
      _ - _ _        _ _ _ _ _ -      _ __                          _            _ _ . _.
                                                                                              . _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . - _ - _ -
          .
    I          1S
..-          ,
                                                            3
                                                                                                                                                      l
                  -
                      Several deficiencies were noted during observation of a performance
                      test on one of the containment spray pumps. (paragraph 2.m.)-
                      (IFI 413,414/89-09-08)
                  -
                      Scaffolding procedures do not address seismic considerations and
                      resultant inoperability of safety equipment. (paragraph 2.r.)
                      (IFI 413,414/89-09-09)
                  -
                      I&E maintenance does not use portable equipment to facilitate timely
                      locating of de ground faults. (paragraph 2.s.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-10)
                  -
                      There are many significant deviations between the E0Ps and the PSTGs
                      (Plant Specific Technical Guidelines) where there should be none.
                      This is primarily due to changes being made in the E0Ps before being
                      made in the guidance document (PSTG). (paragraph 3 and Appendix B)
                      (IFI 413,414,/89-09-11)
                  -
                      There are many technical and human factors discrepancies that were
                      identif:ed in the E0Ps.        Each one is listed. (paragraph 3.b. and
                      Appendix B) (IFI 413,414/89-09-12)
                  -
                      Many labeling discrepancies between E0Ps and panel indication were
                      identified.        Each one is listed. (paragraph 3.c. and Appendix D)
                      (IFI 413,414/89-09-13)
                  -
                      There is a discrepancy between the E0Ps and the S/G pressure meter
                      in the control room. (paragraph 3.c.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-14)
                  -
                      Many writer's guide discrepancies were identified in the E0Ps. Each
                      one is listed. (paragraph 3.c. and Appendix C) (IFI 413,414/89-09-15)
                  -
                      Noise level in the control room during auto-start of both          ventila-
                      tion trains during S/I response is excessive. (paragraph 3.c)
                      (IFI 413,414/89-09-16)
                  -
                      Deficiencies were identified in simulator effectiveness in training
                      on E0Ps (paragraph 3.d) (IFI 413,414/89-09-17)
                  -
                      There were weaknesses noted in the site's ETQS program. (paragraph
                      4.a.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-18)
                  -
                      There are approximately 131 temporary modifications in effect on
                      site.    Some date back as far as 3 or 4 years. (paragraph 4.c.)
                      (IFI 413,414/89-09-19)
                  -
                      The separate reporting authority and duplication of support functions                                                          I
                      for the Transmission Group is considered a weakness. (paragraph 4.j.)                                                          l
                      (IFI 413,414/89-09-20)                                                                                                          l
                                                                                                                                                        !
                                                                                                                                                        l
                                                                                                                                                        l
                                                                                                                                _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
 
                                                                                      _. ._.
                                                                                      __      _
                                                                                                    . _ _ _    __ ___ __ _ _ _ . _ _ -
                                            .
.
i
      g
                                %:                      '
        ~..,                                c ..
      *h                                >.
        '
                                                                                                  4
  .
                                                , Strengths:
                                                  --
                                                            Shift turnovers were efficient and effective.- (paragraph 2.d.)-
                                                  -
                                                            Centrol' room decorum was good, with orderly appearance and proper
                                                          ' beha vi o r.'  (paragraph 2.d.)
                                                  -
                                                          .0perators displayed a professional attitude toward their responsibi-
                                                            11 ties.      (paragraph 2.d.)
                                                  -
                                                            Operator control of access to the control room was good. (paragraph
                                                            2.d.)
                                                  -
                                                            . Housekeeping in general was very good, but there were. some excep-
                                                            tions.    (paragraphs 2.e. and 2.h.)
                                                  -
                                                            Inside ' and outside auxiliary operator rounds were very thorough.
                                                            (paragraphs 2.e. and 2.h.)
                                                  -
                                                            Labeling overall ' was very good, with the exceptions of ' auxiliary
                                                            building doors and instrument root valves.        (paragraphs 2.e., 2.j.,
                                                            and 2,k.)
i:
                                                  -
                                                            On theiriown intitiative, the licensee is upgrading the seismic-
l                                                            safety margin of. the diesel generator batteries.                        (paragraph 2.f.)'
                                                      -
                                                            There was good feedback from site personnel on management involvement
f  <
                                                            in solving. problems. (paragraph 4.a 4.e and 4.k)
                                                  -
                                                            Operations has a daily input into the MWR backlog for prioritizing
                                                            work items.      (paragraph 4.g)-
                                                  -
                                                            -The planners inspection of the worksite prior to initiation of the
                                                            MWR package is considered a strength. (paragraph 4 h).                    .
                                                    .
                                                            Rotation of .,ork shifts together provides for a smoother flow of
                                                            work. (paragraph 4.h)
"
                                                  -
                                                            The practice of. working items by train or division in a weekly
                                                            rotation helps limit problems of having 2 trains inoperable at the
                                                            same time. (paragraph 4.h)
                                                  -
                                                            Plant meetings were brief, to the point, and provided adequate plant
                                                            status to involved management personnel.      (paragraph 4.1)
                                                  -
                                                            The new 10 CFR 50.59 training for site personnel is thorough and
                                                            meaningful. (paragraph 4.1)
l
e
          . . - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _                                  _                _                                                          -- -
 
_ _ - _ _ _ -            .                  _        _          - --              _ _ - _ _ . _ _ - . _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _                      - -
              '
                  .
                .-    .
        Sk          a
                                                              5
                          - '
                              Changes to the Catawba Critical Safety Function integrity tree are
                              considered to be significant enhancements which are supported by
                              valid deviations from the ERG. Catawba treatment of the coolant
                              integrity tree ' was excellent, particularly with ' respect to cold
                              overpressure protection. (Appendix B)
                                                                                                                                _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
 
                            - _ _ _ _ _ _ -_ _ _ _ _                                                        _ _
                                                                                                                _ - - . .-      _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ __- --_-_-
V          ..                              .
        a                  s                                                                                                                                                              2
    ?A'    .s
                                                                                                                REPORT DETAILS ~
  ,
                                                                                                                                                                                          l
                          1.                    Persons. Contacted
                                                                                                                                                                                          ;
                                                Licensee employees
                                                K. Alcorn, Reactor Operator
                                                J. Barbour, QA Director Operations
                                          *
                                                H. Barron, Superintendent Operations
                                                W. Barron, Director of Operations Training
                                                T. Beadle, Procedures Engineer-
',
                                                W. Bradly, QA Verification Manager
                                          *
                                              . R. Casler, Shift Operations Manager
                                          * - J. Cox, Production Support
                                          *
                                                T. Crawford, Superintendent Intergrated Scheduling
                                                M. Criminger, QA Verification Specialist II
                                                R. Edmund, Reactor Operator
p                                              J. Effinger, QA' Verification Specialist II- Audit
                                                J. Frye, QA Verification Manager -Audit
                                          *
                                                R. Gill, Corporate Compliance Manager-
                                                J. Glen, Production Engineer
                                          *
                                                M. Glover, Compliance Manager
                                                C. Graves, Operations,~ General Office
                                          *
                                                T. Harrall, Sr. Project Engineer, Design Engineering
                                                D. Jenkins,' Design Engineer
                                                R. Kimray, Senior Instructor
                                          *
                                                V. King, Production Engineer
                                          *
                                                J. Knuti, Operations Support Manager
                                                M. Lee, Nuclear Control Operator
                                                P.. LeRoy, Compliance, General Office
                                          *
                                                W. McCollum, Superintendent Maintenance
                                                K. Munk, Reactor Operator
                                                C. ' O' Dell, Shift Supervisor
                                          *
                                                T. 0 wen, Station Manager                                                                                                                ;
                                                G. Rhyne, Nuclear Equipment Operator
                                                M. Sanders, Nuclear Equipment Operator
                                                L. Saunders, Reactor Operator
                                                K. Seasely, Procedures Engineer
                                                G. Swindlehurst, Engineering Supervisor
                                              -D.  Thompson, Senior Reactor Operator
                                                G.'Winkel, Simulator Instructor
                                                Other Licensee employees contacted included instructors, engineers,
                                                mechanics, technicians, operators, and office personnel.
                                                NRC Representatives
                                          *
                                                E. Merschoff, Deputy Director, DRS, Region II
                                          *
                                                W. Orders, Senior Resident Inspector
                                          *
                                                M. Lesser, Resident Inspector
                                          *
                                                B. Bonser, Project Engineer, Region II
                                                                                                                                                                                        -
              _---_u_oxa-_-----___a--____                _ - _ _ , _ __ _ _ . _ _ - - . _ _ - _ - - - - - -
 
  _ - _ _ _ - _ - -
                      4
                    ,                .
      <                ,
                                                                                2
l
                                            NRR Representative
                                        * K. Jabbour, Project Manager
                                        * Attended exit interview
                                            Acronyms used throughout this report are listed in Appendix E.
                                    ' 2.    Operations (41400, 41707, 61700, 71707, 93802)
                                            Many of the positive attributes of operational safety can be directly
                                            observed in the control room. These attributes include such things as
                                            adequate shift manning, delegation of Shift Supervisor (SS) non safety
                                            related duties, Reactor Operator (RO) and Senior Reactor Operator (SRO)
                                            system knowledge, relief turnover procedures, etc. Adequate shift
                                            manning assures: qualified plant personnel to man the operational
                                            shifts are readily available and that excessive overtime need not be
                                            utilized; delegation of nonsafety-related duties assures the SS attention
                                            to the command function will not be diverted to nonsafety-related duties;
                                            and accurate diagnosis and response to plant transients, minor and major,
                                            require detailed operator systems knowledge, etc.
                                            Other operational safety attributes can be better assessed through plant
                                            tours and system walkdowns. These include material condition; conformance
                                            to approved procedures; attentiveness to duties; and return to service of
                                          . equipment important to safety, including correct system alignments.
                                            Finally, interviews with personnel holding a variety of positions on the
                                            plant staff together with some review of records is necessary to provide
                                            indirect indicators of operational safety and to corroborate preliminary
                                            assessments.
                                            To assess the operational safety of the facility, the team performed
                                            extended observations of control room activities, including back shifts,
                                            with the units in modes 1, 5, and 6. Also, the team conducted system
                                            walkdowns and plant tours. In addition, they interviewed operators during
                                            these observations, walkdowns, and tours, observed shift turnovers, and
                                            reviewed operator logs. The team also reviewed records used for indica-
                                            tion or control of plant status for adequacy and verified operator aware-
                                            ness of their contents. These included the LCO Log, configuration contisi
                                            records, Danger Tag Log, and Increased Surveillance Log.
                                            Tha team monitored operator performance, control room decorum, awareness
                                            of plant status, response to alarms, and use of procedures.      The team
                                            conducted interviews or plant tours with the Operations Superintendent,
                                            System Engineers, and operators. The team also reviewed engineering
                                            evaluations, training, and maintenance as related to questions that arose
                                            from observations in the plant.
.
-                        _ _ _ - -            _ _ _ _ -
 
                              ,                              _ __
                                                                      _ . _ - _ _ . _ - -  _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -_ _ _-_-
      -
                      -.            .
                  '.      . . ,
          s:            .
i-
                                                                                          3
                                                                                                                                .i
  '
                                      ' a..        Cold Leg Accumulators
                                                    When the team first entered the control room at about- 9:00 a.m. ,
  '
                                                    on April 11, Unit I was at 100%, power and .was in two TS LCO action
                                                    statements for cold leg accumulator A:
                                                    (1) Boron concentration was below the required range, a 24 hour
                                                                  action statement, and
                                              - (2) Level was below the required range, a one hour action statement.
                                                    The operators were in the process of partially draining the "A"
                                                    cold leg accumulator and then refilling it from the FWST to restore-
                                                    boron concentration to the required range. They were performing the
                                                    evolution for the second time that day. The first drain' and fill
                                                    evolution had been initiated in response to boron concentration
                                                    decreasing to 1918 ppm, just above the minimum TS requirement 'of
                                                    1900 ppm. After the first drain and. fill, sampling had. indicated
                                                    that boron concentration in the "A" accumulator had decreased to 1848
                                                    ppm. This reduction in boron had occurred in spite of the fact that
                                                    refilling was done from the FWST, which contained a boron concentra-
                                                    tion of 2026 ppm. The team asked the operators to explain why the.
                                              . boron ' concentration went down after the first drain and fill. They
                                              - had a theory based.on stratification in the accumulator, coupled with
                                                    inleakage from the RCS through or bypassing the check valves and
                                                    entering the bottom of the accumulator, then the draining from the
                                                    bottom followed by filling near the top, and finally sampling from
                                                    the bottom. The operators were able to use system piping diagrams
                                                - to show this theory to the team and .to demonstrate a good level of
                                                    knowledge of the . systems. They were also able to explain why they
                                                    believed the 1918,1848, and 2026 ppm' ample results were reliable
                                                    numbers.
                                                    The licensee had entered the accumulator "A" level TS action state-
                                                    ment at 7:08 AM. This action statement required that level be
                                                    restored to the specified range within one hour or be in hot standby
                                                    within the next six hours and in hot shutdown within the following
                                                    six hours. The team asked the operators about their plans for
                                                    restoring level to within the TS specified range, and how they were
                                                    complying with the requirement to be in hot standby withii, the next
                                                    six hours. The operators stated that they planned to have level
                                                    restored by about 10:00 AM, which would leave them about four hours
                                                    in which to shut down the unit to hot standby in the unlikely event
                                                    that unforeseen problems prevented the restoration of level. They
                                                    stated that a normal shutdown to hot standby would take about three
                                                    to four hours. The operators understood that the intention of the
                                                    action statement was not to allow seven hours to restore level, but
                                                    instead to require a shutdown to be started in time to allow a
                                                    normal shutdown to hot standby to be conducted and completed prior
                                                    to the one hour plus six hour time limit.
                                                                                                                              .
    _____._____m_          _ _ _ _ . ____m  .___.m_    _ . _ _ _
 
          __-_____                                _ __ - -                                        - .
                ..
  .
        .                            ..
    _
.
      r            a
                                                                                                                                  4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          i
7
                                            The team reviewed procedures that were in use for the drain and                                                                                                              j
                                              fill evolution to increase boron concentration.                                                                                              Operators -were
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            '
                                              using OP/1/A/6200/09, Cold leg- Accumulator Operation, Change 26.                                                                                                          .
                                            Draining was done per Enclosure .4.5, Decreasing Accumulator. Level,                                                                                                        l
                                            and filling was done per Enclosure 4.4, Increasing Accumulator
                                              level. The operators stated that there was no overall procedure for
                                              increasing boron concentration. The operators had given themselves
                                            about three hours to restore level, and based or, that had decided
                                            they could drain for about two and one- half hours. With the FWST
                                            boron concentration at 2026 ppm and not greatly more than the boron
                                            concentration in the accumulator, they would need to maximize the
                                            amount of liquid exchanged to effectively increase boron concentra-
                                            tion in the accumulator. A major consideration'was that a substan-
                                              tial portion of the piping used for draining was also used for
                                              filling. Thus some of the same liquid that was drained would be
                                            added back during filling. After draining for about one hour and 20
                                            minutes, the accumulator level dropped below the indicating range.
                                            The operators then drained for an equal amount of-time, with no level
                                              indication. By using a chart showing accumulator levels, gallons in
                                            the accumulator, and level indicating range, the operators were able
                                            to estimate the total quantity that they would be draining and the
                                            quantity of liquid remaining in the accumulator. The accumulator
                                            was on line during this evolution, with its isolation valve open and
                                              power removed. The team noted that the written procedure in use did
                                              not address being out of the level indicating range.                                                                                            It also did
                                              not address time constraints of being in a TS action statement. The
                                            procedure' simply stated: "Open the corresponding valve to decrease
                                              level in the desired accumulator", then "When the accumulator is at
                                              the desired level, close the corresponding valve."
                                            The team questioned whether the evolution being conducted had
                                              received appropriate management review and approval. The Operations
                                              Superintendent stated that verbal review and approval had been done,
                                            by the same management people who were authorized to give written-
                                              approval for procedure changes or new procedures. Still, the team
                                              considered that a written procedure covering the entire evolution of
                                              increasing boron concentration in an accumulator would have been
                                            more appropriate. The team considered management's use of verbal
                                              instructions to modify written safety related procedures, including
                                            draining below the level indicating range and related cautions, as
                                              an area of weakness.
                                            The team noted tha". the first step of the " Decreasing Accumulator
                                              Level" enclosure states: " Review the Limits and Precautions." Under
                                              limits and precautions, located in front of the procedure for cold
                                              leg accumulator operation, step 2.7 states: "Do not use Enclosure
                                            4.5 (Decreasing Accumulator Level) for draining an accumulator beyond
                                              the limits of provided level instrumentation." However, this step
                                              had been lined out by hand and deleted by Change 26 to the procedure,
                                            which was dated April 10, 1989. The team reviewed Change 26 and its
                                              10 CFR 50.59 safety evaluation.                                                      The forms were complete and the
-.                    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _      _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ._ __________ _ _ _ _______- - -__                ____- _______-
 
  .  . .. .. .. .. - . . ,. ----              -
              1
        ...            . .
    -
                  4 .
                                                                      5
                                      required preparation, review, and approval signatures were :all
                                      present, and all were' dated April 10, 1989. The safety evaluation
                                    . stated that the purpose of the precaution that was being deleted was
                                      to prevent over pressurization of the FWST with nitrogen. It stated
                                      that further evaluation has determined _this precaution to be unneces-
                                      sary,' based on the small size of the drain line to'the FWST and the
                                      much larger size of the vents on the FWST. The team then reviewed
                                      the Justification Document for this procedure, which lists reasons,
                                      restrictions, and commitments associated with each step of the
                                      procedure. .The Justification Document stated that the reason for
                                      step 2.7 was to prevent over pressurization of the FWST with nitrogen
                                      if draining below the fill connection.      It further stated that the level
                                      instrument only covers the top 13 inches of the tank, and 'the fill
                                      connection is midway up on the tank. Overall, the team identified
                                      no deficiencies with the records for Change 26.
                                      The operators restored the accumulator level to the TS required range
                                      by about 10:30 AM, and by about 11:30 sampling results showed the
                                      new boron concentration to be 1925 ppm. Overall on this day, the
                                      licensee had operated the unit in a.one hour TS action statement
                                      for a total of over six hours to gain a net increase-in boron con-
                                    . centration of 7 ppm (from 1918 to 1925). The team judged that the
                                      licensee would need to increase boron concentration again in the              i
                                      near -future,: and asked the licensee if there might not be a better          l
                                      way'to do it. The team suggested checking with a " sister plant",              !
                                      McGuire. lThe licensee found that McGuire had a written procedure
                                      for increasing boron concentration in a cold leg accumulator that
                                      did not require entering any TS action statements or going below the
                                      level indicating range. The licensee then wrote their own similar
                                      procedure, and used it successfully during the second week of this            i
                                      inspection.
                                      The team subsequently reviewed the results of the licensee's previous
                                      leak rate testing of the Unit I cold leg accumulator check valves,
                                      and identified no deficiencies with them. The team also looked at
                                      the current quantity of " unidentified leakage" from the reactor
                                      coolant system, and identified no problems with it.
                                      All concerns relating to accumulator boron concentration discussed
                                      in the preceeding paragraphs were followed up under IFI 50-413,
                                      414/89-09-02 during this inspection. This IFI is closed.
                                  b.  Thermal Power Computer
                                      After the "A" co'd leg accumulator was restored to operable, the
                                      team noted that the unit one computer screen indicated that total
                                      power from each of the four nuclear instrument channels was about
                                      100.5 percent. At the same time, each upper detector indicated
                                      about 104 percent and each lower detector indicated about 103
!                                      percent. Thermal power of the unit was indicated to be about 99.8
                                      percent.  The team asked the operators to explain what was the
                                                                                                                  .
 
E          .
            ...
                          .
        .3          ..
  e            i
    n [-
                                                                                          6
I                                                        maximum allowed power _ for.the unit and how'it was controlled. The
                                                          operators stated that maximum allowed power was 3411 megawatts .
                                                          thermal, as ' stated in the operating license.    They were instructed
                                                          by management .to -implement this by maintaining eight hour average
                                                          power at 100 percent or less, as indicated by .the thermal power
                                                          computer.
                                                          The operators showed the team a station technical specification
                                                          interpretation, which stated the eight hour average thermal power
                                                          limit.  It also gave short term limits on being above= 100 percent
                                                          thermal power, up to.a maximum of 102 percent for 15 minutes. The
                                                          operators stated . that the thermal power computer continuously
                                                          calculated average' power for the previous eight hours. .They used.
                                                          the thermal' power computer for normal steady state operation of the
                                                          unit, but they were also to keep each power range NI total power
                                                          reading within two percent of the current thermal power number. The
                                                          computer was programmed to give an alarm whenever there was a two
                                                          percent difference between the computed thermal power and a power
                                                          range NI. A daily check of power range NIs versus the_ thermal power.
                                                          was done, and~if this check or an alarm indicated more that a two
                                                        . percent difference, then the gain of the. NI would be adjusted in
                                                          accordance with' station procedures.      One thermal power computer
                                                          generates one thermal power number, using inputs from many secondary
                                                          plant instruments. ,The . team asked the operators about the possi-
                                                          bility of all NIs being adjusted in a nonconservative. direction
                                                          based on a thermal power number 'that was erroneous because one of ;
                                                          its inputs had gone bad without being detected. -The operators
                                                          stated that this was possible and in fact had' happened just last
                                                          year.  They saia the situation had been detected when an operator
                                                          realized that the unit was generating substantially more megawatts
                                                          than ever before. An LER had been written on this event.
                                                          The team reviewed the licensee's controls on the thermal power
                                                          computer and its inputs with a system' engineer independent of the
                                                          previous LER. As a result of this review, the licensee stated that
                                                          two changes would be made to improve the controls on the thermal
                                                          power computer:
                                                          (1) Periodic calibration testing of the unit 1 thermal power
                                                                computer inputs will be added to the Computerized Periodic
                                                                Test Program, to provide formal scheduling control.      This had
                                                                previously been done manually on an informal basis for Unit 1.
                                                                The Unit 2 thermal power computer inputs had been in the
                                                                Computerized Periodic Test Program.
                                                          (2) Out of calibration notification forms will be sent fr.om the
                                                                instrumentation technicians to the performance system expert,    j
                                                                This is important, because the performance system expert trends  l
                                                                historical readings on the inputs to the thermal power computer.
                                                                These trends are used for one of the most important controls on
                                                                the thermal power computer: prior to adjusting the gain on a
                  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ --                      -                                                  )
 
                        --_        _ - _ _ _ .      . _ _ _    _            _ -  _    -                        _ - _ . _ - _ - -
                              .
                            ,    ,
                    w            ,
                                                                                        7
                                                              nuclear instrument, the performance system engineer checks the
                                                              values in the computer for reasonableness.    This is done by
                                                              comparisons with other values in the plant, and by reviewing
                                                              historic'al trends.
                                                    Overall, the licensee's control of tF        Nrmal power computer was
                                                    considered to be an area of weakness. In.      ' tem will be followed up
                                                    ur. der IFI 50-413,414/89-09-03.
                                                c.  Nuclear Service Water Annunciators.
                                                    .The team reviewed all lit or disabled annunciators in the control
                                                    room. of unit I with the operators, while the unit was operating at
                                                    100% power. Only eight of the annunciators were lit or disabled,
                                                    out of a total of about 450. The team hdged that this was a
                                                    relatively small number of lit or disabled annunciators, and that
                                                    the operators were adequately knowledgeable about the conditions
                                                    indicated by each.
                                                    Two of the lit annunciators were actually lit continuously (disabled)
                                                    due to plant modification work in progress.        These two, RN Pit "A"
                                                    Screen Hi D/P and RN Pit "B" Screen Hi D/P, were designed to indicate
                                                    fouling of the trash screens on the suction side of the nuclear
                                                    service water pumps. The team asked the operators what compensatory
                                                    measures were being taken while these annunciators were disabled.
                                                    The operators showed the team an Increased Surveillance Log book,
                                                    that was used to record all increased surveillance        in effect.              The
                                                    team found this book to be well organized and an effective operator
                                                    aid. However, it indicated that no increased surveillance was in
                                                    effect for.the nuclear service water suction pit screens.
                                                    The team looked in the FSAR and found that these annunciators were
                                                    described therein. They then asked for the 10 CFR 50.59 safety
                                                    evaluation for disabling the annunciators. The licensee had a 50.59
                                                    evaluation, which identified three instruments that would be disabled
                                                    during modification installation: the two annunciators in question
                                                    and also tne control room indicator for Standby Nuclear Service
                                                    Water Pond Level. The evaluation stated that operators would have
                                                    to use compensatory measures to monitor the level of the SNSWP to
                                                    comply with TS 3/4.7.5.        The team confirmed that SNSWP level was
                                                    being monitored daily by operators, as required by the TS.                      This  i
                                                    was done by physical inspection of a level stick in the SNSWP by an                    ;
                                                    auxiliary operator, who then phoned the level information to the
                                                    control room.
                                                    The fact that operators would not have indication of differential
                                                    pressure across the screens in either pit for about 30 days was
                                                    stated in the safety evaluation. But the fact that tiie RN Pit Screen
                                                    Hi D/P annunciators were described in the FSAR was not specifically
                                                    stated, nor was there any mention of compensatory measures to be
                                                    taken while these annunciators were disabled.        The licensee stated
_ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _
 
      _.                  . _ _ _ - .    - _              -                                                          -        -.
                                                                                                                                                ,
(                              :..
                                        .
                                                                                                                                                  l
                                                                                                                                                  ;
        e                            >
                                                                                              8
                                                      that unwritten consideration of compensatory measures had been done,                        )
                                                      and that they had decided that none were needed. The team identified                        j
                                                      the lack of written consideration of compensatory measures as a
                                                      weakness in the 10CFR50.59 evaluation. This -item will be followed
                                                      up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-04.                                                          i
                                              d.      Shift Turnover and Control Room Decorum
                                                      The team observed two morning shif t turnovers.            Operators conducted
                                                      both turnovers efficiently and effectively.            Prior to turnover, the            1
                                                      off going shift assembled a thorough compilation of the scheduled
                                                                                                                                                '
                                                      surveillance sheets, technical memorandums, a special interest items
                                                      list, and an inoperable equipment list. They then informed the
                                                      on-coming shift about previous and planned plant activities. The
                                                      interface and exchange of information occurred between each of the
                                                      control room operators, the auxiliary operators, and the shift
                                                      supervisors.          In. addition, the shift supervisor conducted a verbal
                                                      briefing of all auxiliary operators.
                                                      During the turnover, the oncoming shift completed and signed turnover
                                                      checklists, as required by Operations Procedure 2-22, Shift Turnover,
                                                      Revision 24. During and following turnovers, several annunciator
                                                      alarms occurred. The operators promptly acknowledged these alarms
                                                      and took the appropriate corrective actions.
                                                      Throughout the team evaluation the operators displayed a professional
                                                      attitude concerning the plant equipment and their responsibilities
                                                      as operators.            The onshift operations personnel appeared to be
                                                      sufficiently rested, awake, and alert to safely perform plant
                                                      manipulations. Operator control of access to the control room was
                                                      good.          Control room entry gates and 'at the controls area' markings
                                                      were in place, and operators were aware of who was in the control
                                                      room. Operators were attentive to their panels. Overall control
                                                      room decorum was good. Operators maintained an orderly appearance
                                                      and proper behavior in the room.
                                                      The team noted that a number of persons in the control room (pri-
                                                      marily maintenance or performance personnel) wore hardhats while
                                                      standing over main control boards. The team discussed this practice
                                                      with operators and management, who acknowledged that it is routinely
                                                      allowed. They reviewed the potential hazard of a hard hat falling
                                                      on a control parel and causing an uncontrolled equipment actuation,                      ,
                                                                                                                                                '
                                                      and the fact that many other plants do not allow hard hats to be
                                                      worn in the control room.
                                              e.      Plant Rounds
                                                      The team accompanied auxiliary plant operators on daily auxiliary
                                                      building rounds for units 1 and 2.                The operators used Daily
                                                      Auxiliary Building Rounds sheets in the performance of the rounds.
                                                      They examined each area specified by the rounds sheet, ensuring that
_ - _      _ - _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _                _ _ _ _ _ .  . _ _ _    -        _      ___                            _          . _ _ _ .
                                                                                                                                                ,
 
                      _ - -    .- _
                      o
E                  ..        .
        Cb                *
                                                                      9
                                      each parameter was within its required range. During the rounds,
                                      the unit 1 operator had to enter four contaminated pump rooms and
                                      the unit 2 operator had to enter six contaminated pump rooms for the
                                      purpose of examining equipment as required. Each of these areas
                                      required full dress in protective clothing. The process of multiple
                                      suiting and unsuiting was time consuming, and may be a deterrent to
                                      operator and management surveillance of the contaminated pump rooms.
                                      Having the large number of contaminated rooms which require routine
                                      access for proper surveillance is considered to be an area of weak-
                                      ness. This item will be followed up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-05.
                                      The team observed that the operators did not frisk when exiting each
                                      contaminated area.    Portable friskers were not located at any of
                                      the contaminated pump rooms. A few portable friskers were located
                                      throughout the auxiliary buildino, and generally one was within about
                                      50 to 200 feet of each contaminated pump room. However, operators
                                      stated that they were not required to use these portable friskers,
                                      but instead were to complete their rounds, walking throughout much
                                      of the auxiliary building, and then use the whole body radiation
                                      monitors. The team reviewed Station Directive 3.8.3 (T.S.), Contami-
                                      nation Prevention, Control, and Decontamination Responsibilities,
                                    ' Revision 24. It states that exiting a contaminated area requires a
                                      whole body frisk: "a whole body frisk shall be performed at the first
                                      available frisker to prevent the spread of contamination." The team
                                      reviewed this with health physics supervisors, who stated that they
                                      had no problem with the observed practices of the operators, did not
                                      have a problem of inadvertent spreading of contamination, and did not
                                      intend to place more friskers in the auxiliary building.      The team
                                      also reviewed this matter with the operations superintendent, who
                                      stated that the observed practices would be continued and the station
                                      directive would be changed. Discussion of this item at the final exit
                                      with plant management resulted in a commitment from the licensee to
                                      re-review the resolution to this practice. The failure of operators
                                      to frisk when exiting contaminated areas, as required by the station
                                      directive, is identified as an example of violation 50-413/89-09-01.
                                      Areas and equipment examined during the rounds were all levels of
                                      the auxiliary building, including portions of the following systems:
                                      containment spray, residual heat removal, high pressure injection,
                                      safety injection, component cooling, auxiliary feedwater, ventilation
                                      and air conditioning, eler u cal switchgear, spent fuel pool, diesel
                                      generators, and various valve galleries. The team found labeling
                                      to be overall very good, with the exception of doors and instrument
                                      root valves.  The operators exhibited a good " hands on" approach to
                                      the rounds, and initiated corrective actions for a number of mino-
                                      deficiencies that they observed.      They demonstrated an adequate
                                      knowledge of the equipment and existing conditions.          Overall,
                                      operator rounds were very thorough.
- _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ -
 
                                                                                                                    - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    '
                t
        ..
      .      ...
    ..      .
                                                                                    10                                                  t
                                                                                                                                        i
                                                                                                                                    l
                                                                                                                                    -
                                                                                                                                        1
                                                  The , team found that housekeeping in general was very good. The team .            .
                                                  identified two areas in which an improvement could be made: the 522'
                                                  elevation in: the auxiliary building had various-items of protective
                                                  clothing on-the floor, and the 1A charging pump room contained trash.
                  f.                            Diesel Generator Batteries
                                                  During plant rounds, the team observed' that the batteries for
                                                  each of the- four emergency diesel generators did not appear to _ be
                                                  seismically mounted. ' Cell motion restraints were' lacking. ;There
                                                                          .
                                                                                                        -
                                                  were no separators between the cells and not all end cells were
                                                  braced as required by current IEEE standards. In a seismic' event,
                                                  the cells could move and' impact with each other as well as with the
                                                  steel battery rack. When questioned about this, the licensee stated
>
                                                  that these battery installations were seismically qualified, and
                                                  that they had been seismically tested.
                                                  The team reviewed the battery seismic test results and identified no
                                                  deficiencies with them. The batteries had demonstrated operability
                                                  before and af ter being shaken at a minimum directional acceleration
                                                  of 0.2 g. The testing had been done in 1984 by Southwest Research
                                                  Institute in San Antonio, Texas. The FSAR states that the Safe-
                                                  Shutdown .Ea'rthquake maximum ground acceleration for this site is
                                                  0.15 g. The' team confirmed that the battery cells and rack that
                                                  were tested were the same as those installed in the plant. The team
                                                  also found that the licensee had not committed to current IEEE
                                                  standards that require cell separators and bracing.
                                                  The licensee stated that other people had questioned the seismic
                                                  design of these battery installations, and that a modification was
                                                    scheduled to be completed next year that would upgrade the diesel
                                                  batteries by adding cell separators and bracing.        This upgrading
                                                  was being done in response to an EPRI initiative called Safe Margin
                                                  Earthquake. .The SME is calculated differently than the SSE, and the
                                                    licensee stated that for this site the SME had a maximum acceleration
                                                  of 0.3 g as compared to the SSE at 0.15 g. A licensee SME review of
                                                  the site had determined that, from a seismic standpoint, the diesel
                                                  batteries were the safety equipment that was most susceptible
                                                  to failure.    The licensee stated that, for the site to meet SME
                                                  standards, basically only the diesel batteries and auxiliary feed
                                                  pumps needed to be upgraded.
                                                  On further investigation, the team found that this EPRI initiative
                                                  had begun after the NRC had found that SSE calculations for another
                                                    site were inadequate.    A review of the design calculations that
                                                  determined the SSE for this site to be 0.15 g of ground acceleration
                                                  was beyond the scope of this inspection and was not done. Overall
                                                  on this issue, the team evaluated the licensee's initiative toward
                                                  upgrading the seismic safety margin of the units as commendable.
                                                                                                                                        :
-__L______-_--      _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _
 
                  _ _ _ _ _ -                                                    _ _ - - - - _ _ - -- - - _ _                    _ - - -_
L
        :.
        1                      . .
  u            .
                              <
                                                                                                                              11-
                                    g.                                    - Fire 'and: Security Doors
                                                                            :While touring the: plant, -the team observed that the door. to the 1A
                                                                                                                          '
                                                                            diesel generator room (fire door AX-302) did not close fully or
l
                                                                            latch by' itself. The team closed the door, and subsequently found
                                                                            that procedure PT/0/A/4200/48, Periodic Inspection of Fire Barriers
;;                                                                          and Related Structures, change 0 requires that fire . doors "shall
h                                                                            latch in the closed position. automatica11y' (no external force
l
                                                                            . applied) when released from the open position." The team promptly
                                                                            reported the fact. that . door AX-302' did not close automatically to                    ~l
                                                                            the fire ' door coordinator, who checked the door and declared it-
                                                                            inoperable that same day. The team verified that an hourly fire
                                                                            watch had. been initiated on the door. The team also verified that
                                                                            . the door had passed its last scheduled inspecti.on. The licensee
                                                                            followed established procedures with respect to this fire door, and
                                                                            when a problem with the door was identified to them, they did take
                                                                            prompt' corrective action.
                                                                            The team'also observed two other fire doors open because they. failed
                                                                            to close automatically. One was the unit I control room door (fire
                                                                            door 501), which the team found wide open and with no personnel in
                                                                            sight. This door 'is not only a fire door, but also is a vital
                                                                            security- door.                      The team promptly reported the open door to the
                                                                            . shift supervisor, who assisted in closing it. ,This door, which is
                                                                            very heavy, had rubbed on the floor and jammed open. The team
                                                                            waited for a security guard, who arrived within two minutes.                        The
                                                                            licensee. stated that a modification was planned to install a lighter
                                                                            door.                  The control room security door problem has been referred to
                                                                            NRC security personnel for followup.
                                                                            .The team subsequently observed the fire door to the IAE engineers'
                                                                            office area wedged open with its doorknob, which had apparently
                                                                            fallen off.                      IAE. personnel were notified, and they closed the door.
                                                                            As a result of finding three fire or . security doors open during
                                                                          'the inspection, the team concluded that the licensee's control of
                                                                            doors is an area of weakness. This item will be followed up under
                                                                            IFI 50-413, 414/89-09-06.
                                    h.                                      Outside Rounds
                                                                            The team accompanied an auxiliary operator on the daily outside
                                                                            rounds, which covered both units. The operator examined each area
                                                                            and component as specified by the Daily Outside Rounds Sheet. In.
                                                                            the nuclear service water pump house, housekeeping needed improve-                        i
                                                                            ment. Various loose items were in that area, including a seven foot
                                                                            length of three inch pipe, a ladder, a fire extinguisher, a chair,
                                                                            and some wood. In the intake and pump area for the conventional low
                                                                            pressure service water pumps, the operator identified a deficiency
                                                                            (water inside a pump flow gauge) which he properly documented via
                                                                            the discrepancy reporting system. In addition, he initiated a work
                                                                                                                .
                                                                            request and hung an orange tag as required by plant work request
                                                                                                                                                                        i
    _ _ - _ - _                    - - _ - _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
 
_ _ _ _ .                                                                _ _ _ _        _ _ - - . - - _                                                _ _ _ _
                                                                                                                                                                  _ ___                              __
                          _
                      .                    .
          .,-                ,
                                                                                                              12
                                '
                                                                          procedures.          The cooling towers and their fan control rooms were
                                                                          inspected, where the operator replaced a few burned out light bulbs.
                                                                          The electrical switchyard was toured, with' no ' discrepancies noted.
                                                                          Overall, the team considered' that the outside rounds were performed-
                                                                        .iri a thorough and professional manner.
                                                          i.            Configuration Control.and Independent Verification                                                                              )
                                                                          The team evaluated the methods utilized by.the licensee for control-
                                                                        . ling the configuration of safety systems, particularly the alignment
    1                                                                    of valves and breakers, to reduce the possibility of an. occurrence
                                                                          which could. result in or contribute to an accident. .The evaluation
                                                                          included a selective review of completed system alignment verifica-
                                                                          tion checklists; system walkdowns; a review of Station Directive
                                                                          4.2.2,    Independent ' Verification Requirements, revision 1 and
                                                                          Operations Management Procedure                1-5, Independent Verification,
                                                                          revision 11; and interviews of several plant operations personnel.
                                                                          The ' team also reviewed Station Directive 3.1.1, Safety Tags and
                                                                          Delineation Tags, revision 21. The team identified no deficiencies
                                                                          with.the operators' knowledge of independent verification. procedures
                                                                          or with the completed system alignment verification checklists.
                                                                          The team did identify three items for potential improvement in the                                                              ;
                                                                                                                                                                                                          1
                                                                          licensee's procedures: These items will be followed up under IFI
                                                                          50-413,414/89-09-07.
                                                                          (-1) The procedures allow both operators who are checking and
                                                                                  verifying the position of a valve or breaker to go together,
                                                                                  and the team observed this to be the practice of the operators.
                                                                                  Past experiences at other sites have shown that two operators -                                                        I
                                                                                  together are not totally independent, as there is a tendency                                                            ;
                                                                                  for' both to make the same mistake. A more effective' practice                                                          I
                                                                                  is for both to go separately.
                                                                          (2) The procedures allow both operators to use the same remote
                                                                                  indicator to verify the position of a valve.                                  This allows
                                                                                  iinporUnt valves, which are remotely operated from the control                                                          '
                                                                                  room, to be aligned for plant startup without being physically                                                          l
                                                                                  inspected for deficiencies. The inspection of equipment for                                                            j
                                                                                  significant material conditions should be included in a good                                                            1
                                                                                  system alignment verification process.                                                                                  l
                                                                                                                                                                                                          1
                                                                          (3) The procedures for restoration of a system during removal of a
                                                                                  tagout do not address alignment or independent verification of
                                                                                  valves inside the tagout boundary, such as a valve on which                                                              l
                                                                                  maintenance was performed.            Operators that were interviewed                                                  !
                                                                                  stated that they were trained to list such valves on the tagout                                                          l
l
                                                                                  restoration checklist, even though this was not specified in
                                                                                  the plant procedures.
'
i
l
_ _ _ __ _________________ _ .----___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . _                                          _ ___      . - - - - - _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _    _      _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -____________a
 
.            .                        . _ _ _ . . __        . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .    ._. - .        __ __ _ - _ - _ _ _
              .
            -    -
  ,            .                                                                                                                I.
                                                      13
                    j. System Walkdowns: AC Power and Nitrogen
                      The team conducted a partial walkdown for two safety related systems;
                      one electrical and the other mechanical / piping. The electrical
                      walkdown verification checked the condition and position of the
                      power supply breakers for portions of the unit 2 4160 and 600VAC
                      switchgear. The other walkdown checked the valves and piping
                      which supply the nitrogen to the unit 1 passive safety injection
                      accumulators.
                      The team accompanied an auxiliary operator while conducting the
                      electrical walkdown verification for the unit 2 4160 and 600VAC
                      switchgear. During the walkdown PT-2A-4350-03, Electrical Power
                      Source Verification Checklist, change 14 was utilized for assuring
                      proper breaker positions. The team compared the as found positions
                      of the electreal circuit breaker with the positions shown on the
                      checkli st. No deficiencies were identified.
                      While conducting the walkdown for portions of the nitrogen system
                      for unit 1 passive safety injection accumulators, the team refer-
                      enced site drawings CN-1562-1.1, Safety Injection NI, revision 6;
                      CN-1602-1.0, nitrogen system, revision 13; the control room completed
                      copy of OP-1A-6200-09, Accumulator Valve Checklist Enclosure 4.2,
                      retype 6; and the applicable Independent Verification Checklist
                      Enclosure 4.2. , retype 6.    The walkdown verified valve positions
                      as compared to the above referenced valve checklists.                            Each valve
                      was found to have attached valve identification tags which clearly
                      identified the appropriate valve number.                          All pipe caps were
                      installed as shown on site drawings.                      The team did not identify any
                      unsatisfactory conditions while conducting these walkdowns.
                    k. System Walkdown: Component Cooling Water
                      The team also performed a partial walkdown of the unit 1 component
                      cooling water system with the assistance of the system engineer.
                      The system operating procedure OP/1/A/6400/05, Component Cooling
                      Water, change 45, and system flow diagrams CN-1573-1.0, Rev. 16
                      and CN-1573-1,1, rev. 11, were utilized by the team during the
                      walkdown.  The majority of the walkdown was conducted in the
                      Auxiliary Building on levels 560' and 577' .                        The team traced out
                      various portions of the system checking for proper labeling of
                      components, material condition of the system, proper labeling of
                      components compared to procedural requirements, and the status of
                      locked valves.
                      The team observed system valve and component labeling to be good.
                      All valves and components examined were labeled with large black
                      tags with white letters that were readily readable from a distance
                      and allowed for easy identification of equipment.                              The team con-
                      sidered the overall material condition to be adequate. The only
    - - _ _
 
-          _ _ - .
      .
    .    .                                                                                          .
  .    .
                                                      14
                        discrepancies noted were a few slightly leaking valves which had
                        been previously identified by the licensee.        These valves were
                        tagged with the licensee's orange deficiency ID tags' and had cable
                        funnels installed beneath them.
                        The team verified that all valves observed during the walkdown were              j
                        in the correct position as required by the operating procedure,                    t
                        However, valve 1KC-9, the component cooling pump 1A2 discharge
                        valve, was found open in lieu of locked open as required by the
                        system operating procedure and system flow diagram. The valve was
                      .not locked open due to the chained handwheel being separated from
                        the valve stem. The licensee has been previously issued notices of
                        violation for failure to lock other valves: Violation 414/86-18-01
                        dated June 3, 1986 and Violation 413/87-30-03 dated October 14, 1987.            I.
                        This valve not being locked as required is identified as an example                g
                        of Violation 50-413/89-09-01.
                        After the licensee had re-attached the 1KC-9 handwheel, the team
                        checked all of the unit 1 and 2 component cooling pump suction and
                        discharge valves. During this walkdown, the team noted that the
                        handwheels on unit I valves IKC-4,1KC-9, IKC-7 and 1KC-10 were not
                        fully seated on the valve stems.    The team also found that all of
                        the unit 2 pump suction and discharge valve handwheels were more
                        positively attached with a stem bolt and washer, while none of the
                        unit I valve handwheels were attached in this manner. This may have
                        contributed to the valve problem noted.    (These valves are IKC-4,
                        IKC-6, 1KC-7, 1KC-9, 1KC-10, 1KC-12, 1KC-13, AND 1KC-15). The final
                        item identified by the team during the walkdown was that the valve
                        positions of valves IKC-16 and 1KC-17 could not be determined without
                        the use of an extension mirror due to the close proximity of the
                        valves to a wall . The team did not note any such implement in the
                        area of the valves.                                                          - -
                                                                                                            1
                    1.  Auxiliary Feedwater Surveillance
                        On April 12, the team observed the performance of portions of the 1B
                        Auxiliary Feed (CA) Pump Surveillance in accordance with procedure
                        PT/1/A/4250/06, Enclosure 13.4, CA Pump Head and Valve Verification,
                        change 28. The team accompanied a licensed operator and auxiliary
                        plant operator for the local performance of the surveillance. The
                        purpose of the surveillance was to ensure that the auxiliary feed-
l                      water pump head and flow were within the technical specification
'
                        allowable limits.    During the accomplishment of the test, the opera-
l                      tors followed the written instructions specified in the procedure.
                        At the completion of each step requiring a sign-off, work was stopped
                        and the operators made the required signatures.      The operators kept -
                        control room personnel well aware of the status of the test and
                        informed them of any problems as they were encountered.
                                                                                                ,
                                                                                                  e
 
                                    .
                                                              . _ . -_    - - -  .-        __- _ - - _
          .
                            .                        _
a        7      .s
      ;,      ..:
  :s-      .. ,
                                                        15-
                      1 The- results of7 the surveillance (as observed by the. team)' were
                        unsatisfactory.    The requirement that the . pump achieve - an dynamic
                        head ~ pressure -(DHP) (DHP = pump discharge . pressure''minus pump
                                                                                    .
                        - suction. pressure) of.1521 psig was not' satisfied. . Calculations
                        revealed.the result'to be approximately 1507 psig. At this time, the
                        licensee had already entered a 72 hour T.S. - Action . Statement due to
                        removal of, the pump from service for t? sting.
                        The following day, the team inquired about the operability status of
                        the' 18 auxiliary feedwater pump. The team was informed that the pump-
                        had passed its operability run and had subsequently been declared ~
                        . operable by-the licensee. The team reviewed the surveillance records'.
                        This data was accompanied by a Duke Power Company, Procedure Discrepancies-
                        Process Record (DPCPDPR) which recognized the discrepancy'. The problem
                        resolution as'specified on the DPCPDPR and an accompanying calculation
                        on enclosure 13.4' of procedure PT/1/A/4250/13B was to ' compensate for'-
                        -the temperature difference in the suction source for the pump (the UST).
                        The UST temperature had been found to be approximately 140 degrees F,
                        which was higher.than the tank's normal temperature of 90 degrees F.
                        Additionally,. .the licensee had determined . that the temperature
                        difference in the UST had been caused by failure of a steam regulator
                        in' the steam supply for the tank. This regulator was subsequently
                              -
                        repaired /r9placed by the licensee.
                        On May 1, the team observed the performance of the 1A auxiliary feed-
                        water pump surveillance in accordance with procedure PT/1/A/4250/06,
                        Enclosure'13.3, CA Pump Head and Valve Verification, change 29. The
                        team observed the local performance of the test by .two auxiliary-
                        operators. -The test was performed as specified by the procedure,-            i
                        and'the results were satisfactory.
                    m.' Test Observation
                        The team observed performance of the INS-1B pump performance test,
                        PT/1/A/4200/04C, Change 0 to 27 incorporated, dated 4/30/86. Review
                        of the procedure and observation of the PT resulted in the following.
                        comments (Note: The pump satisfactorily past the performance PT):              {
                          1.    Section 2.0, References, should include the KF drawing showing
                                the location of 1KF101B, which is listed on Enclosure 13.5,
                                Valve Checklist.
                        2.    Step 6.8 refers to minimum and maximum flows for pump operation.        !
                                Step 12.8 and step 12.10 start the pump and throttle flow. No          j
                                cautions or warnings are included immediately prior to these
                                steps to reinforce the limits of pump operation. During the
                                performance of the PT, the pump was run below the minimum flow
i
                                value until the throttle valve could be properly adjusted.
I                              Starting the pump with the throttie valve set to allow minimum
;                              flow could possibly eliminate this problem.
L
                                                                                                        I
  .
                                                                                                        i
 
                                                                                                                                                                                      _ _ - _ _ - _ _ -
                                .
                  .                .
      .                          ,
                                                                                                                16
                                                                  3.    The required values in the procedure have many times the
                                                                        accuracy indicated in their significant figures than can be
                                                                        obtained through the measurement instrumentation used.                                                                        For
                                                                        example, step 12.10 states, ".. . obtain a flow of 620.3 gpm
                                                                        (613.8 to 626.7 gpm) by observing INSPG5120. . ." . The flow
                                                                        instrument is a 0 to 700 gpm Barton with 10 gpm divisions.
                                                                        Readings are possible to the nearest 5 gpm, if the needle is
                                                                        stable. The instrumentation used in the test were subject tc
                                                                        considerable bounce.
                                                                  4.    Communications between the remote location of the throttle
                                                                        valve and the meter that reads the flow was difficult during
                                                                        performance of the PT.                    One person reading the flow gauge
                                                                        walked about 40 feet to a location that could be seen by
                                                                        another technician in a doorway.                  This person then walked to a
                                                                        position that could be seen by the operator manipulating the
                                                                        throttle valve. The operator changed the valve position, and
                                                                        the process started again, until the proper flow was indicated.
                                                                        Improved communications should be worked out.
                                                                  5.    In the pump room, instrument number 1NSTH5010 was broken,
                                                                        and its laminate tag was wrong. In addition, the motor covers
                                                                        on NS pump 1B were loose or missing.
                                                                  These deficiencies will be followed up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-08.
                                      n.                          Safety Tags
                                                                  The site has two procedures which focus on the control and issuance
                                                                  of safety and delineation tags.                      These procedures are Station
                                                                  Directive 3.1.1 (0P), Safety Tags and Delineation Tags, revision 21;
                                                                  and Operations Management Procedures 2-1, Audit Of Safety Tags and
                                                                  Tagout (R&R)'s, revision 11. The first of these two provides for
                                                                  the issue, placement, recall, transfer, and removal of red personnel
                                                                  safety tags, white equipment safety tags, and yellow " HOLD" safety
                                                                  tags. The audit procedure is implemented vigorously by operations
                                                                  management personnel to make sure that none of the listed tags are
                                                                  missing or inappropriately applied.                                                                                                                3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1
                                                                  The team selected several safety tags which were fastened to the
                                                                  unit 2 4160 VAC switchgear. The tags were checked against the
l                                                                appropriate tagout (R&R) record sheets and were found to be active
                                                                  and properly indexed. The tags and the tagout records were com-
                                                                  pleted, signed, dated, and applied as required by the controlling
                                                                  station directive. The tagout (R&R) records sheets which have been
                                                                  outstanding for an extended period were evaluated.                                                            Two of the
                                                                  sheets, one for each plant, indicate that in 1987 the diesel
                                                                  generator engine fuel oil booster pumps had tags applied to their
                                                                  power supply switches. The plant operations supervisor stated that                                                                                  3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      !
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      l
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      !
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      ,
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      l
  _ -  - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _    . _ _ _ - - _ - _ . _ - _ _            - - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -  _  _-        _  _ . _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ .                          ___._____ a
 
                                                                                            _ _ _
                                                                                                  _ _ _ -
{                '
;.            -    -
lo                .
L                                                        17
                          these tags are necessary due to the incomplete status of the instal-
                          lation of these booster pumps. He further revealed that prior to
                          installing these pumps more guidance must be provided . by design
                          engineering.
                          A Unit I tagout sheet indicated that several condensate flow orifice
                          bypass valves have had tags applied to them since 1986. The opera-              ,
                          tors stated that this is an acceptable site practice authori.ed                  i
                          by the condensate system controlling procedure. The procedure
                          allows the tags to be temporarily lifted as required to manipulate
                          the valves. Upon completion of the valve operation the valves are
                          returned to the properly tagged position and then the tags are
                          reapplied.
                          A similar tagout sheet has remained outstanding since 1984 for two
                          alternate power supply breakers in unit 1.    These two breaker 3 are
                          normally " RED" tagged in the off position. But when the need arises
                          the breakers could be put into service and operated, as allowed by              i
                          procedure. Upon completion of use, the breakers would be returned
                          to the tagged positions and the " RED" tags would be reapplied.
                          The team found that there are a limited number of other instances
                          similar to the above. Allowing certain tagouts to remain active for
                          extended periods and allowing the tags to be temporarily lifted has
                          been authorized by site procedures.      The team considered that
                          leaving red tags in place for years and routine temporary lifting of
                          red tags potentially dilute the importance of the red tag system.
                      o. Operator Access
                          The auxiliary operators are issued key rings which contain all of
                          the required keys for routine access to areas which are administra-
                          tively controlled. In the event that the normal security door locks
                          improperly function, provisions have been made which will allow
                          these doors to be opened by the operators. Keys for other personnel
                          who may need them for access to administrative 1y controlled areas
                          may be obtained from the shift foreman. The team observed operations
                          personnel using the system and when questioned each of those
                          interviewed were familiar with the key control process and its
                          importance. The system utilized for key controls seems to be working
                          satisfactorily,
                      p. Required Reading
                          The shift foreman's administrative staff is responsible for assuring
                          that the various plant operators complete their required reading.
                          The required reading material may consist of procedures which have
                          been recently revised and other material which management feels that
                          the operators should be familiar with.    The tehm verified that the
                          operators have been reading the required material and that they are              '
                          familiar with what they read.      The administrative staff requires
                                                                                                          !
-  _ - _ _ _ _
 
- _ - _ - _
                  .
              '.    ..
            ,-      .
                                                                  18
                                  that each of the operators complete reading the material within the
                                  established time period.    Upon completion, the operators sign or
                                  initial the required reading notebook as proof that they reviewed
                                  the material,
                              q.  Overtime
                                  The team verified that the licansee      has in place controls and    .
                                  procedures for use of overtime.        Station Directive 3.3.0 (SS),
                                  Control of Overtime Hours, revision 2 provides guidance to help
                                  assure that the licensee maintains the staff overtime and work hours
                                  within the limits of T.S. Section 6.2.2,f. The team evaluated the
                                  overtime hours which were worked by the plant operators for the
                                  months of January, Februa ry , and March 1989.    The team concluded
                                  that the operations staff does frequently work overtime hours.
                                  However, after evaluating the records and interviewing several
                                  operations personnel, the team concluded that overtime hours are
                                  being worked within limits of the TS.
                                  The team also observed operators dividing up available overtime days    i
                                  among themselves.    They were adhering to a plant administrative
                                  limit of 60 work hours in any 7 consecutive days. This 60 hour
                                  limit is substantially below the TS limit of 72 hours in 7 days.        i
                                  The operators stated that these administrative overtime limits are
                                    in force during outages as well as when a unit is operating.
                              r.  Scaffolding Controls
                                  While walking through the plant, the team observed scaffolding that
                                  was not tied down and had no kickboards. For example, scaffolding
                                    in the 1A diesel generator room had a work platform that was
                                  approximately six feet above the floor and had no kickboards.      In
                                  addition, this scaffolding was not tied down to prevent movement.
                                  The team subsequently reviewed scaffolding controls with the
                                    licensee. The licensee statad that the scaffolding control program
                                  was recognized to be weak, and that an improvement effort was under-    ;
                                  way. Personnel safety items such as tiedowns and kickboards were to
                                                                                                            '
                                  be addressed in a forthcoming rewrite of scaffolding procedures.        i
                                                                                                              <
                                  The team inquired about scaffolding controls as related to potential
                                    impact on operability of safety equipment. Three specific concerns
                                  were discussed: additional loads placed on safety equipment,
                                    physical interference with safety equipment, and seismic considera-    4
                                    tions. The licensee has a program in place for evaluation of placing
                                    additional loads (such as scaffolding) onto safety piping. This
                                    program is implemented by Station Directive 3.8.17, Installation of
                                  Temporary Loads, revision 4. The licensee also tas procedures that
                                    address physical interference with safety equipment (ie. by obstruct-
                                      ing a travelling valve stem): Station Directive 3.8.12 and also
                                    Station Directive 2.11.6, General Scaffold Guidelines, revision 3.
                                    In addition, the licensee stated that the crews of scaffolding
                                                                                                              1
                                                                                                              I
L_____                .._ _ _    _  _ _ _ _ _ _
 
-  - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _                        _ _ - _ . _ _ _      _  _  _ _      _ - _ .      . _ _ _ _ _ _            .. _-_    - _ _ _ .
                                                                                                                                                __-_-
                    .
          .                                .
  .                          .
l
1
                                                                                                19
l                                                            builders are aware of equipment operability concerns and have demon-
                                                              strated the knowledge needed to be able to build scaffolds without
                                                              affecting the operation of equipment.
                                                              The potential seismic impact of scaffolding on the operability of
                                                              safety ' equipment was not addressed in the licensee's procedures.
l                                                            Since the scaffolding is not seismically qualified, the concern here
                                                              is that scaffolding erected over or near safety equipment could, in
                                                              a seismic event, reduce the functioning of the safety equipment.
                                                              This concern is addressed in NRC Regulatory Guide 1.29, to which the
                                                              licensee has committed. The failure of the licensee's procedures to
                                                              address seismic impact of scaffolding on operability of safety
                                                              equipment is considered to be a weakness. This item will be followed
                                                              up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-09.
                                            s.              DC Electrical Ground Faults
                                                              In the control room, the team observed a unit 2 lit annunciator,
                                                              "125 V ESS PWR Channel A Trouble", that indicated an existing vital
                                                              de system electrical ground fault. The licensee was aware of the
                                                              ground fault and had recently initiated an MWR to locate and repair
                                                              it.  The team then discussed vital de ground faults in general with
                                                              licensed operators, cognizant I&E engineers, and the cognizant I&E
                                                              foreman,    Discussions covered safety significance, IEN 88-86,
                                                              frequency and duration of ground fault occurrences, policy and
                                                              procedures, methods of detecting and locating, annunciator setpoint
                                                              and calibration, types and sensitivity of ground locating equipment,
                                                              and IEN 88-86 Supplement 1. The licensee had procedures in place to
                                                              identify and correct ground faults.              However the procedures and
                                                              practices did not include the use of any portable ground locating
                                                              equipment, such as is used by other plants, including the licensee's
                                                              sister plant, McGuire. The use of this equipment would enable ground
                                                              faults to be located and isolated much more            expeditiously. The
                                                              licensee stated that vital dc ground faults            are likely to take a
                                                              week or more to locate, due to waiting for              operations to open
                                                              breakers. Use of portable equipment would              not require opening
                                                              breakers and would enable ground faults to be located and repaired
                                                              within one or two days.        The team considered the use of portable de
                                                              ground fault locating equipment as a much needed improvement, with
                                                              direct safety importance.      This item will be followed up under IFI
                                                              50-413,414/89-09-10.
                                            t.              Safety Rtview Group
                                                              The team observed a meeting of the Safety Review Group. The subject
                                                              of the meeting was a review of draft LER 413/89-011, titled "Techni-
                                                              cal Specification Viciation for Lower Containment Compensatory Action
                                                              Not Being Performed due to Failure to Notify Appropriate Personnel".
                                                              This event centers around a large number of :ontainment fire detector
                                                              failing.    In two samples, 37% and 50% were found to be out of cali-
                                                              bration. Design Engineering had sent a letter to Compliance stating
-                      - - - - _ _ _ _ _ -
 
7
          .
    Nh:~.
        .      .
    s      .c                              >
                                                      ~20'                                      ,
                        th'at both- unit 1 and unit 2 lower containment fire detectors should    ,
                        be considered inoperable; _ Compliance-then sent a Technical Specifi-
                        cation Operability Notification Sheet to unit. 2 operators. but not
                        unit 1. As a result, unit 2 operators conducted the 'TS required
                        hourly temperature monitoring in lower -' containment but: unit 1
                        operators did not. ' The failure of . Compliance to notify unit l'
                        operators 'was identified and discussed' as the only root. cause of
                        this event.
                      .The failed : detectors were Hochiki model SIF-24F. Ionization Smoke
                        Detectors, which .had been installed throughout the Containment
                        Buildings. Turbine Building, Auxiliary Building, and. Service-
F
                        Building in 1987.
                                                                                                  'l
                        In' January 1989, a high failure rate of the detectors located _in the
                        Containment Buildings was recognized.      In February 1989, Hochiki
                        Electroni.cs determined the.cause of the failures to be a high level
                        of radiation. The licensee plans to replace the Hochiki ionization.
                        detectors in the containments with more reliable photoe'lectric type
                        ~ detectors, as recommended by the manufacturer.
                        The team observed the discussion- among the Safety Review Group
                        members to. be lively, open, and focused on the details and wording
                        of. the LER. However, the team noted that a significant root cause
                        of this event had been overlooked - the purchase of the. Hochiki
                        detectors for use in containment.    Had the purchase order correctly
                        specified the environmental conditions ' (including radiation) in
                                                                    -
                        which these detectors were to be operated? Are incorrect purchase
                        order: specifications for safety. equipment a recurring problem?. The.
                        team considered that the identification of all contributory causes
  i                    of. a event and accomplishment _ of complete corrective actions to
                        prevent recurrence are the most safety significant parts of an LER.
                        The Safety Review Group stated that they would investigate the
                        purchasing of these detectors.
                        The team reviewed approximately- two hundred licensee LERs, and found .
                        them generally to be well written and complete.        Only one other
                        case of overlooking a major root cause and corrective action was
                        identified. The team judged that this instance of incomplete identi-
                        fication of root cause and needed corrective action was an isolated
                        case.
!
'
                  In the area of Operations, . one violation (paragraph. 2.k) and no devia-
                  tions were identified.
              3. Emergency Operating Procedures (42700, 2515/92)
                  a.    E0P/GTG Comparison
                        The team reviewed the relationship between the Catawba E0Ps and the
                        plant specific technical guidelines (PSTG). The Catawba PSTG was
l                                                                                                I
f
i          .
                                                                                -            - J
 
        .
      .    .
    .    .
                                                21
  '
              developed from Revision 1 of'the ERG by the safety analysis group at
              the Duke' Power general office. The PSTG incorporates a number of
              additions to, deletions from, and restructuring of the ERG resulting
              from:
              *  plant-specific design differences
                  preference for some elements of ERG Revision 0
                  engineering evaluations
                  operating philosophy
                  operating experience
                  experience with other vendor guidelines
                  verification and validation activities
              Those changes determined by the safety analysis group to be safety
              significant were justified in two deviation documents, dated June
              and July 1984      In addition, plant specific setpoints were developed
              by the safety analysis group for use in converting the ERG into the
              Catawba PSTG.    However, the document, " Emergency Procedure Guideline
              Setpoints," was not approved until May 1986.        Duke Power identified
              one incorrect setpoint, pressurizer level, in the original revision
              of the Catawba E0Ps, and the E0Ps were subsequently corrected.
              Production of the upgraded Catawba E0Ps from the PSTG was conducted
              by the document development group of the Catawba operations section
              in parallel with PS1G development. E0Ps were produced by application
              of the principles in the Catawba writer's guide to the technical
              information in the PSTG. Following completion of the E0Ps in January
              1984, verification and validation of the procedures began, with
              implementation of the procedures on Unit 1 in May 1984.
              A description of the PSTG was submitted for NRC approval as part
              of the PGP in February 1983.        Upon the request of the NRC, the
              deviations document was provided for review.        Subsequently, the NRC
              required that the deviations document be revised to be based upon
              Revision 0 of the ERG.        In this version, some deviations were
                included by Duke Power due to preference for the Revision 1 ERG
              approach. Several requests for additional information were made by
              the NRC.    In SER Supplement 6, dated May 1986, the NRC concluded
              that all information received on the PSTG was complete and adequate
              at that time.
              The team con. pared the Catawba E0Ps to the ERG to verify that the
L              accident mitigation sequence of the ERG was represented in the E0Ps.
              The E0Ps were determined to adequately cover the broad range of
              accidents and equipment failures addressed in the ERG.
              The role of Duke QA in the development of the PSTG and upgraded
                E0Ps was reviewed. There was no documented QA involvement in the
              development of the Catawba PSTG. The QA departacnt at Duke General
              Office reports performing an overview of the McGuire PSTG, which was
                reported to be a similar process, but has no record of any direct
I
l'
 
    _ - _          _      .    .    _  _
                                                                                                        e
          ..
        .      =..
  k          ..
j                                                              22
L
n
                                involvement in the? Catawba PSTG - development. ' However,. the team
                                found that adequate management controls ~ (general office safety
                                analysis group oversight, Catawba- document development group) had
                                been applied in' lieu of QA involvement.
                                The ' team compared ' the E0Ps to the Catawba PSTG .and found many,
p                              differences, where there should be none. These differences are
L                            11dentified by the designation "PSTG DEV" in apper. dix B. The. team
i.                              did not - consider the numerous instances of a single PSTG step which -
                                had been broken out to multiple steps ir the E0P. as constituting -      ,
                              ' di f ferc.nce s . An assessment of this comparison will be performed
                                during a future inspection under IFI- 50-413,414/89-09-11.
                                The' current: Catawba writer's guide applies to both E0Ps and A0Ps.
                              - Review = of the E0Ps. against- the requirements of the writer's guide
                                identified a variety of deviations.        The_. most significant and
                              . consistent .of these ' is the . improper structure. and applic3.an of
                                cautions and notes (paragraph 3.b). This weakness 1 suggests a lack
                                of verification against the writer's. guide.
                              '.The relationship . of procedure nomenclature to the control room.
                              . labeling was found'to be clear-and consistent.
                                The.AOPs contained many.more deviations from the writer's guide than-
                                did the E0Ps.- Every aspect of the A0Ps contained examples of lack
                                of conformance to guidance, as well as, inconsistencies within and
                                between the AUPs.. The Catawba staff stated that the- A0Ps had neither
                                been rewritten nor verified to correspond to' the writer's guide and
                                                                                -
                              -that the schedule for upgrading the AOPs has been receatedly~ delayed
                                due'to reprioritization. The team finds this delay undesirable.
                      b.      -Independent technical adequacy review of the E0Ps
                                The team. reviewed the procedures listed in Appendix A and found that
                                generally the vendor recommended accident mitigation strategy was
                                followed. However, the team identified many instances where the
                                vendor recommended action sequence was not followed. Although some
                                of these action sequence variations were cited in the deviation
                                document, many of these variations were not - documented. Another
                                variation from the vendor guidance was the lack of entry conditions
                                contained in the E0Ps. The two entry pointy were E-0 and ECA 0.0.
                                These procedures listed symptoms which would require implementation
                                of the procedures but did not have definitive entry conditions as in
                                the ERG and the PSTG. Some of these variations are identified in
                                appendix B and will be resolved under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-12.
                                Cautions and notes were consistently incorrect in application of the
                                writers guide. In'some cases cautions were actually notes or action        '
                                steps required in the step sequence.      Notes were at times actually
                                cautions or procedure steps. Some notes and cautions that were              !
                                appropriately . labeled as such lacked conformance to the writer's        J
                                                                                                            l
                                                                                                            l
_                        _        -                                                                      i
 
      .
    ,    ,
  .o    .
                                              23
                guide.  For example, cautions were generally found lacking identifi-
                cation of the potential hazard to equipment or personnel as required
                by t'e writer's _ guide, and both notes and cautions were written
                containing action steps -or conditional steps also contrary to the
                writer's guide.    Specific examples are delineated in Appendix B.
                Peacekeeping deficiencies were identified during the simulator
                inspection. of the E0Ps and are discussed in paragraph 3.d.        No
                deficiencies in the control room usage of peacekeeping aids were
                identified.
                The degree of adherence to the guidance in the ERG was found to be
                generally acceptable although, as documented in Appendix B, many
                undocumented deviations existed.
                Operator action setpoint values were contained in the Catawba set-
                point document and associated engineering calculation sheets. These
                values were used in the E0Ps except for the few instances noted in
                the appendices.
                Control room drawings were inspected to verify that E0P specified
                components were accurately typified.
                The team found that the safety significant deviations identified by
                the licensee had been reported to the NRC. Safety Evaluations for
                these deviations were not inspected.
            c. Review of the E0Ps by inplant and Control Room walkthroughs
                Inplant and Control Room walkthroughs of the emergency and abnormal
                procedures listed in appendix A were conducted.        Generally, the
                nomenclature appeared to be consistent between the procedures and
                the instrumentation and labeling on the control board. The discrep-
                ancies noted were enumerated in appendix D. The licensee committed
                to review these and make changes as appropriate. Resolution of this
                issue is identified as IFI 50-413,414/89-09-13.
                Indications, annunciators and controls referenced in the E0Ps were
                found to be available to the operators. One set of emergency and
                abnormal procedures was maintained in the Control Room at all times
                for each unit. These procedures were verified to be the latest
                revision. A discrepancy      between step C.4, RNO, of procedure
                EP/1/A/5000/01, Reactor Trip of Safety Injection and the S/G pressure
                meter in the Control Room was found during the walkthrough.      This
1              item had previously been identified co the licensee in August 1987    :
l              but had not been resolved. Resolution of this issue wil' be identi-
L              fied as IFI 50-413,414/89-09-14.
l
                                                                                        l
                                                                                      l
 
        ,      ___ ___ _ _ _ _                                      _
                                                                                _, _                          __
              . -.
:        - .,                - , ,
      jc                  . .
i--
e                                                                                                            '24
m
                                                                  While the: results of the walkthroughs were generally' positive, some
                                                                  discrepancies ; in the' areas of technical adequacy, writer's guide,-
                                                                  adherence and human factors were noted. Technical and human factors
                                                                  discrepancies are noted in appendix B while. writer's guide discrep-
                                                                  ancies 'are noted in appendix C. .The licensee has committed' to
                                                                  consider 'the. discrepanc-les identified in the -aforementioned
    ,:                                                            appendices. Appendix C discrepancies will' be' identified as' IFI-
                                                                  50-413,414/89-09-15.                                                                                <
                                                                  Operators' stated that the level of noise in the Control Room caused -
                                                                  by auto-start .'of both.. ventilation trains during S/I response ~ is
                                                                                                                  .
                                                                  cxcessive and requires shouting _ for audible communications between
                                                                  personnel. Problem Investigation Report serial number;0-C-89-0145
                                                                  dated April 12,. 1989, had been' submitted to Duke Power design-
                                                                  engineering L for evaluation and correction. The design engineering
                                                                  staff reported that a sound survey during use of both trains of
                                                                ' control room ventilation _ is currently being scheduled and that
                                                                  necessary action:will be based on analysis of sound survey findings.
                                                                  This item will be' identified as IFI' 50-413,414/89-09-16.
                                                                  Due to time constraints, many of the aspects of thE validation and
                                                                  verification program that were applied to the development of the
                                                                  E0Ps were not inspected in' depth. Deficiencies in ' connection with
                                                                  the licensee's ongoing evaluation of the E0Ps are identified in
                                                                  paragraph 3.e.
                                              d.                  Simulator Observations
                                                                  The -team observed a crew performing the following five scenarios on-
                                                                            ~
                                                                  the Catawba simulator:
                                                                  (1) Steamline break outside containment
                                                                  (2) Loss of all ac power
                                                                  (3) S/G tube leak
                                                                  (4) S/G tube rupture with a steam line break.
                                                                  (5) Natural circulation cooldown with a void in the reactor head
                                                                  The procedures provided operators with sufficient guidance to fulfill
                                                                  their responsibilities and . required actions during the emergencies,
                                                                  both individually and as a team.
                                                                  The procedt.res did not cause the operators to physically interfere
                                                                  with each other while performing the E0Ps and AOPs. However, the
                                                                  concurrent use of several AOPs resulted in operators responding to
    '
                                  ,                              the directions of more than one person at a time.
                                                                  The procedures did not duplicate operator actions unless required
                                                                  (e.g. , for independent verification).
                  _ - _ _ .          -_ ____- _ ___ _ ______ _ -                          _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _        _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - _ - _ - _ _--__ -
 
p
e        .
      .    ...
    t    .
                                                    25
                      When a transition from one E0P to another E0P or other procedure was
                      required, precautions were taken to ensure that all necessary steps,
                      prerequisites, initial conditions, etc. were met.        However, the
                      method of filing procedures made it possible for an operator to
                      select the wrong procedure from the filing cabinet in the simulator
'
                      Control Room. Operators were found to be knowledgeable about where
                      to enter and exit the procedures.
1
'
                      It was observed that the entry symptoms contained in the E0Ps were
                      not sufficiently clear to preclude an operator from inadvertent
                      implementation of certain procedures. An inconsistency between the
                      plant and simulator existed in that peacekeeping used in the plant
                      for E0Ps and required by the PSTG was not used in the simulator.
                      Deficiencies in 1) concurrent use of several AOPs, 2) procedure
                      filing and 3) clarity of entry conditions will be identified as IFI
                      50-413,414/89-09-17.
                      Activities that should occur outside the control room were initiated
                      by the operators and proper confirmation of their completion was
                      given. These actions were inspected during in plant walkthroughs of
                      the procedures. However, one deficiency was noted in that the
                      simulator was unable to simulate the local closing of NV-295 on
                      malfunction of NV-294.      This deficiency prevented the proper
                      completion of the planned scenario.
                e.  The team reviewed audit cccumentation and conducted interviews to
                      determine the quality assurance measures taken to assure that the
                      emergency procedures were adequate and that they met the require-
                      ments of the Procedure Generation Package (PGP). The team found
                      that the QA organization conducts audits at periodic intervals.    The
                      adequacy of these audits was not examined in detail.
                      The team verified that the PSTG and the set point document are
                      controlled documents. Station master files, retain E0P retypes and
                      V & V associated with the E0Ps.
                f.    E0P user interviews
                      The team conducted interviews with six licensed operators.        The
                      operators felt that the E0Ps had been improved with the recent revi-
                      sion. Those interviewed expressed their belief that the level of
                      detail.in the E0Ps was adequate for and compatible with the level of
                      knowledge of the typical operator. Overall, the operators had confi-
                      dence in the ability of the E0Ps to perform their intended function.
                      The operators noted that the A0Ps are not at the same useability
                      level as the E0Ps. Those interviewed felt that an upgrade to the
                      AOPs similar to that which the E0Ps received would be beneficial.
                In the area of Emergency Operating Procedures there were no violations or
                deviations noted.
____      _
 
                                                                      .    _      - - _ _    _  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _    . - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _
                      .
                .          .
,..
    4                  e
                                                                                  26
                          -4. Support of Plant Operations (62700,42700,37700)
                              a.                Maintenance interviews
                                                Interviews were conducted with mechanics, IAE technicians, . and
                                                maintenance supervisors and managers.          The interviews concentrated
                                                on maintenance training and retraining, overtime, supervision,
                                                operations / maintenance interface, and staffing. Some strengths and
                                                weaknesses were identified during these interviews and are discussed
                                                below.
                                                Interviews with four mechanics and four IAE ' technicians indicated
                                                that there is a good working relationship between the various plant
                                                work groups (i.e. operations, maintenance, health physics, and
                                                engineering). All who were interviewed conveyed a " team effort"
                                                attitude. All felt that they worked together well to operate and-
                                                maintain the plant.      This attitude was determined by the team to be
                                                a strength and overall performance should improve as the groups
                                                continue to work together.
                                                The mechanics and technicians stated that they feel that plant
                                                management has taken measures to emphasize procedural compliance and
                                                independent verification.        Maintenance personnel were provided
                                                training sessions on these topics, and discussions are periodically
                                                conducted at the daily crew meetings.
                                                During an interview with an IAE supervisor, an incident was used to
                                                demonstrate management's commitment to ensure compliance with the
                                                independent verification program.        In this incident, two technicians
                                                were found to have violated the independent verification program and
                                                were given written reprimands that were placed in their personnel
                                                files.    This action by management impressed upon plant personne)                                                              ,
                                                that management was serious about compliance with the independent                                                                '
                                                verification program, as well as, procedural compliance. This was
                                                seen by the team as a strength.                                                                                                    '
                                                Discussions with the mechanics and technicians revealed differing
                                                attitudes with regard to overtime. Management has taken steps to
                                                reduce the amount of overtime for plant personnel as a result' of
                                                discussions with the NRC Resident Inspector. Prior to taking action
                                                to reduce the emount of overtime, there were instances of personnel
                                                exceeding the T.S. limits on overtime. As a result of management's
                                                actions, some of the mechanics and technicians enjoy the reduction
                                                in overtime, while others feel there is not enough.                      The first line                                          ,
                                                                                                                                                                                  i
                                                supervisors expressed the feeling that they had sufficient staffing
                                                to handle the day to day maintenance requirements, but that increased
                                                staffing would be needed for outages in order to comply with the
                                                requirements on overtime and to perform the outage work on schedule.                                                              1
                                                                                                                                                                                  !
      _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _            _ _ _ _ . . _ .        ._ _
 
                                                                                                                            i
        a:        y                                                                                                      j
      .          .
    g    ...
j                                                                            27
                                                              ~
                      The mechanics and technicians expressed. dissatisfaction with the
                      manner in which the training and . qualification program (ETQS) was
                      being implemented. They did state that they felt that the objective                              j
                      of the program was good and that once the bugs get worked out, it
                      will be beneficial. They stated that they . did, not ' feel- that the
                                                                                                                          .
                                                                                                                        '
                      time requirements for completing. the program were fair This was
                      because .they felt that certain requirements could not be - met in a
; .                    two year period. Additionally, they expressed. concern that they may
                      lose positional status or promotional opportunity if they did not                            ,
                      meet the time restraints.
                      Discussions with the supervisors of these men indicated that the
                      mechanics and technicians did not fully understand the program                                  '4
                      and its requirements. Some of the concern expressed by them was-
                      unjustified, according to the supervisors.                          The supervisors stated -
                      that some of concerns were due to the program changing several-
      ,              times in order to improve it. Other concerns were due to the plant
                      personnel. responding to the personnel that were brought in from'CMD.
                      When the CMD personnel were informed of the program they apparently-
                      misunderstood how the program was to work. The CMD personnel then
                      discussed. their understanding of the program with the. permanent
                      pl. ant personnel and the problem grew. The. supervisors stated that
                      had management communicated the intents and requirements of the
                      program better, there would not have been- as much adversity. The
                      supervisors also stated that no one would lose positional status or
                      promotional opportunity by not . completing the program within the
                      requirnd time frame.                            They said that this was another case of
                      misunderstanding what was promulgated by management.
                      Discussions with the Maintenance Manager indicated that the licensee
                      was already aware of the problem and was taking steps to correct it.
                      The-weakness was in the Employee Training and Qualification System
                      (ETQS) and was due, according to the Maintenance . Manager, to the
                      program being in a state of flux as a result of reevaluation of the
                        system. Management is attempting to improve the system by making
                      the requirements for completing the tasks more consistent and
                      relative to job performance. Additionally, management is evaluating
                      'the time requirements for completing the qualification program and
                      how to deal with those that are delinquent in their qualifications.
                      The ETQS for IAE is scheduled to be implemented by June, 1989, while
                      that for mechanical W ntenance is scheduled for January, 1990.
                      There is a possibility that the implementation of the IAE system
                      wi? ' be delayed to January,1990, but no decision had been reached
                      at the time of the inspection.
                      Every mechanic and technician expressed a feeling that their first
                        line supervisor was the best possible. All were supportive of the
                        first line supervisors, but expressed some dissatisfaction with
                      upper management. This dissatisfaction was concentrated in two main
              _--        _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ - - - - _ _ _ -  _ _ _ -
 
p.              -
              .
        ....      .
      l'        .-
                                                                        28
  ,
                                    areas.    One was the ETQS discussed above, and the other was the
                                    change of ' shift assignments and shift schedule for: the current
                                    outage.
                                    The IAE ' technicians stated that they were dissatisfied with manage-
                                    ment's- decision to alter the shift schedule and assignments. The
                                    supervisors of these technicians stated that it'was only a perception
                                    that the technicians would lose some overtime. _ The supervisors also
                                    stated that- the problem could have been avoided if there had been
                                    better communications among those involved in making the decisions
                                    and those that the decisions affected.
                                    The first 'lin'e supervisors, in general, felt that their supervision
                                    was supportive, but felt that first line supervisors were not .
                                    included enough in some decision making processes. They felt .that
                                    if they were included more, they could help correct problems .that
                                    arose due to misunderstanding the intent of what was to be _imple-
                                    mented. This feeling apparently was also due to poor communications
    .                              because their supervisor, when interviewed, stated that 'the first.
                                    line supervisors were included in the process but may rot be aware-
                                    of it.
                                    The interviews 1 indicated that upper management may not have a working
l'                                . feedback loop .in the communication path to ensure that the: communi-
                                  ; cated ' idea was received and understood properly. Discussions with
'
                                    the Mechanical and IAE Supervisors and the Maintenance Manager
                                    identified this as a ' potential problem.        They agreed that the
                                    communication path may have a missing link and that.it was a weakness
                                    that would be investigated and resolved.
                                    Following are the strengths identified during. the interviews and
                                    observations. There is an attitude of being on the same team and
                                    everyone working together to achieve a common . goal . Management
                                  . tries to take an active role in the daily operation of the plant.
                                    Management .is serious' about enforcing procedural compliance and
                                    independent verification.          And, lastly, management is trying to
                                    improve the qualification program for mechanics and technicians.
                                    Only two weaknesses were identified during the interviews and
                                    observations. These were the present state of the qualification
                                    program, and the problems with communications. These issues will be
'
                                    followed up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-18.
                        b.        Nuclear Station Modifications
                                    As of April 11, 1989, there were 141 active NSMs for the Catawba
                                    project. Of these,17 safety related . isms were " Design Complete -
                                    Not Ready to Work", and 34 safety related NSMs were " Design Complete
                                    - Not Installed", for a total of 51. active safety related NSMs. The
                                    team reviewed two NSMs for compliance with the requirements of the
                                    Nuclear Station Modification Manual (NSMM) and Catawba Nuclear
!-
                --  _ - - - _ _ _        _  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . _ _ - _
 
-        - _ _ _ - _ - _ - -                            . _ - _ - _ _ .    __ _          _ _ _ _
                                                                                                                      _-      -_ _ - - -
      ..                    .
  A                          ,
                                            '
                                                                                    29
    ,
                                          Station Directive (CNSD).              The NSMs were: NSM #CN-11042, Rev. O,
                                          Replace Valves IKC50A and 1KC53B with 20" Possiseal Valves; and, NSM
                                          #CN-11159, Rev. O, Replace Reactor Vessel Nonle Inspection Hatch
                                        ' Covers.
                                          Engi.neering Safety Evaluations for the NSM were thorough, addressing
                                          the potential affect on the FSAR and Technical Specifications
                                          as well as unreviewed safety questions. . The NSMs contained the -
                                          neces sary . documentation and were normally completed . as required
                                          by the procedures. There was one example, NSM #CN-11159, which
                                          was completed on November 29, 1988, and the -affected procedure,
                                          MP/1/A/750/42 had not been revised as of April 28, 1989. This is
                                          considered to be an isolated case and the team concluded -that the
                                          NSM program was satisfactory.
                                      c.  Temporary Station Modifications (TSMs)
                                          As of April 11, 1989, there were 131 active TSMs, of which 33 were
                                          . safety related.              Of the 131 active TSMs, 68 were older than 16
                                          months, with 7 being safety related.                    CNSD 4.4.5, Rev. O, Temporary
                                          Station Modifications, dated July 5, 1988, states that temporary
                                          modifications should not be installed for more than 12 months for
                                          those not requiring -an outage, or. the next refueling outage for
                                          those that do require an outage for removal.                    The licensee stated
                                          that the intent was to apply the directive to all new TSMsj and-
                                          to work at reducing the number of existing TSMs. A meeting was
                                          scheduled for May 24, 1989, to discuss reducing the number of active
                                          NSMs and TSMs. The high number of TSMs and the duration of time
                                          some are open is considered a weakness. This issue will be followed
                                          up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-19.
                                          Two TSMs were randcmly selected to determine the effectiveness of
                                          the control and documentation of TSMs. The modifications selected
                                          were WR# 007121, Replace SSF Diesel Water Jacket Heater Model
                                          #3P5-0600 with Model #C5033-050; and, WR# 009389, Replace VI Pressure
                                          Regulator (PR-2) with Fairchild Model 80P.                  Both were found to be
                                          adequate and documentation was completea as per CNSD 4.4.5 and NSMM
j                                          Section 9.
                                          Fifteen safety related TSMs were selected to review the affected
                                          control room drawings. The drawings were reviewed to verify proper
                                          reference to or red lining of the applicable TSM on the affected
,
                                          drawing. No discrepancies were noted during this check. A complete
!                                          review of control room drawings for the effects of all types of
f
'
                                          plant modifications was not conducted by the team due to issues
                                          in this area which had already ' oeen addressed by the resident
                                          inspectors. The results of their review of the area is documented by
                                          a violation in their April,1989 monthly inspection report.
-                  w__        __ - -        _ - _ _ -
 
            - . _ - _ _ _ . - - _ _ _                    -        __
                                                                            ._ _          . _ -    _ __  . _ _ . . _ _ _ _      _ - _ _ _ __
                              .
                    .                  .
  2:                                  .
                                                                                  30
                                                d. Licensee Event Reports and Potentially Reportable Events
                                                  The team examined the licensee's administrative control programs for
                                                  review, investigation, and reporting of non-routine events to assure
                                                  conformance with regulatory requirements and to assess its efficiency
                                                  in increasing equipment reliability through correct identification
                                                  of root causes and by initiating appropriate corrective actions. The
                                                  program was'being applied to a number of events which were the scope
                                                  of the team's evaluation.      These events occurred between August 1,
                                                  1988, and April 24, 1989.
                                                  The number of events reported during the previous SALP period was
                                                  68. The number reported during the 9 month sample performed for
                                                  this inspection was 23. The percentage of personnel errors remained
                                                  constant at approximately 33%, however, the percentage of procedural
                                                  deficiencies increased from approximately 3% to approximately 17%.
                                                  The reduction of total LERs indicates that the licensee is making an
                                                  effort to reduce reportable events.            However, the increase in
                                                  procedural deficiencies indicates that a review of procedures !s
                                                  warranted. The licensee had realized this also and was in the
                                                  process of performing the necessary reviews and procedural upgrades.
                                                  The area of potentially reportable events is covered by the Problem
                                                  Identification Report (PIR) program. This program is governed by
                                                  CNSD 2.8.1 which describes the problem identification ard assignment
                                                  of the responsible group to investigate the problem. The FIR program
                                                  serves as the basis for the processing, evaluating, and resolving of
                                                  any identified problem. The PIR program also includes provisions for
                                                  recognizing and reporting events covered by 10 CFR 50.73, as well as,
                                                  10 CFR 21 and other reporting requirements.
                                                e. Preventive / Predictive Maintenance Programs
                                                  The team reviewed the licensee's preventive / predictive maintenance
                                                  programs in an effort to assess management initiatives to improve
                                                  the availability and reliability of equipment service.              The team
                                                  determined that the licensee has well established maintenance
                                                  programs.
                                                  The Standing Work Request (SWR) program is used to schedule, track,
                                                  and document routinely performed preventive maintenance tasks.
                                                  Daily, an SWR report is generated that contains a complete listing
                                                  of all maintenance, pe.riodic testing, and scheduling records, as
                                                  well as, the associated schedule dates.          The weekly periodic test
                                                  report contains the completion dates for all surveillance from
                                                  the previous week and/or surveillance requirements not previously
                                                  reported. An overdue report is run daily to identify any required
                                                  SWR item that has reached or exceeded the earliest date.                    As of
                                                  April 24, 1989, the team verified that there were no T.S. items
                                                  overdue, and only a few backlogged PM items.
-  _ _ _ -                              _ _ -    -
 
,                                                                __              __                        _ _ _  _ _ . _ - _ _ _ _        _._______
                                                                                                                                                            _
II
          e-                          e
  I
      $'              4
                                                                                                          31
                                                        The licensee has. a ' computerized ' program to assist .in . scheduling PM
                                                        items.. The' program calculates the earliest. start date and the late
                                                        date, to ensure that the requirement does not exceed any T.S. limit.
                                                        This' includes the 3.25 times the periodicity for three consecutive
                                                      .. times. - Any requirements that have' been missed to date' have not been
                                                        the result of lack of scheduling, but due to other factors. (i.e.
                                                        personnel error, plant conditions, lack of parts).
                                                        The team discussed the predictive maintenance program with plant .
                                                      . personnel. .The goal of the program is to provide a structure for
                                                        monitoring and evaluating rotating' and. reciprocating equipment' in                              -
                                                        order to aid.in predicting equipment failure. ~
                                                      : The predictive ' maintenance program consists- of oil analysis' and
                                                        vibration . analysi s . and trending. During 1988, ' performance trending
                                                        was conducted on. approximately 300.. components. The licensee has a'
                                                        plan' that will expand the program wo include more high maintenance
                                                        components in the vibration analysis database and to also purchate
                                                        additional diagnostic . equipment. Management has provided excellent
                                                        support:to this effort in order to insure its success.
                                                    f.  Information Notices (ins)
                                                        Information Notices are useful in avoiding fmaking the same mistakes.
                                                        that others have made, as well as, providing for increased equipment-
                                                        availability. The team examWed the licensee's program for review,
                                                        response, and resolution of ins. A random selection of six notices
                                                        issued during the previous.18 months was performed and the applicable
                                                        notices were reviewed.
                                                        The following lists the ins selected.
                                                              IN 89-08 Pump Damage Caused by Low Flow Operation, January 26,
                                                                          1989.
                                                              IN 88-86 Operating With Multiple Grounds in Direct Current
                                                                          Distribution Systems, October 21, 1988.
                                                              IN 88-74 Potential Inadequate Performance of ECCS in PWRs
                                                                          During Recirculation Operation Following a LOCA,
                                                                          September 14, 1988.
                                                              IN 88-34 Nuclear Material                            Control and Accountability 'of
l                                                                        Non-fuel Special Nuclear Material at Power Reactors,
                                                                          May 31, 1988.
l
                                                              IN 87-60 Depressurization of Reactor Coolant System in PWRs,
    e                                                                    December 4, 1987.
                                                              IN 87-53 Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Trips Resulting from Low                                        ,
                                                                          Suction Pressure, October 20, 1987.                                                    l
_          _ _ - - - - _ _ _ _ - - - _ _ _ - _ -__.                                  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _                            _ - _ .          _    .-_
 
_ _ _ _ _ -                      .. . . _ .
                      .
                    .    .
  %                    e
                                                                            32
                                            The team verified that the Nuclear Safety Section of the Nuclear
                                            Safety Assurance Group at 'the General Office coordinates the
                                            processing of ins. 'This requires inputs from various plant sections,
                                            including Design / Technical Services Engineering Support, Production
                                            Training Services, and . Regulatory C )mpliance. Applicable ins are
                                            distributed to the appropriate station work group for information,
                                            for additional input, or for corrective action if necessary.
                                            The team determined that the licensee reviewed the subject ins in a
                                            timely manner and any actions that were required were also performed
                                            in a timely manner.
                                - g.        Backlog Status of Maintenance Work Requests (MWRs)
                                            The team reviewed the status of d- MWR backlog and the adequacy of
                                            the assignment of priorities to MWRs. The status of outstanding MWRs
                                            is published biweekly by the Integrated Scheduling Group. The MWRs
                                            are categorized based on whether the work '+ Corrective Maintenance -
                                            Non-outage, Corrective Maintenance - Outage, Preventive Maintenance,
                                            or Modification. Although the number of MWRs outstanding appeared
                                            large, Catawba is average compared to the INPO guidelines.
                                            As of April 24, 1989, there were 5,332 outstanding MWRs. These can
                                            be divided-into: 1,953 Corrective Non-outage; 1,994 Outage; 504 PM;
                                            and 881 Modification. As of May 4, 1989, the Outage MWRs outstanding
                                            had been reduced to 1,646, with many of those (approximately 600)
                                            waiting for functional testing. The ratio of Non-outage MWRs greater
                                            than 90 days to the total number of Non-outage MWRs has remained
                                            approximately constant at approximately 45%, which is better than the !
                                            INP0 guideline of 52%. Although the raw data is not encouraging      '
                                            (proper management of over 5000 items is very difficult), team review
                                            of the details of this backlog determined that the licensee does have
                                            control ever the backlog and is actively pursuing means to reduce it.
                                            The I,tegrated Scheduling Group conducts a daily review df out-
                                            standing MWRs by priority code and works with Operations and other
                                            departments to determine which MWRs could be worked in conjunction
                                            with plant availability. This was considered to be a strong point      ;
                                            by the team.                                                            I
                                            Priorities are established based on the classification of the
                                            component and the nature of the work. Priority 1, 2 and 2X are
                                            assigned to work requests of a critical nature and to safety related
                                            equipment. Priority 3 is assigned to work that will improve plant      ,
                                            performance or is for preventive maintenance. Priority 4 or 5 are      '
                                            for non-critical work with Priority 5 being used to designate outage
                                            related work. The team concluded that the licensee adequately
                                            prioritized MWRs.
          - _ _ - _        _ _ _ .
 
                  _      _ -_
l
l                    ,'        .
                    s        .
                                                                    33
                                  h. Work Requests
                                    The work request system was reviewed to determine work flow from
                                    origination of a work request at the time _of discovery of a problem
                                    with plant equipment, through the actual repair.          Maintenance
                                    Management Procedure 1.0, Revision 25, dated January 13, 1989, " Work
                                    Request Preparation", and Operations Management Procedure 2-3,
                                    Revision 2, dated March 22, 1988, " Operations Work Req. ;ts", were
                                    reviewed. Interviews were conducted with personnel from cperations,
                                    the Shift Manager, the Unit Operations Manager, the Mechanical
                                    Planners, Integrated Scheduling, and a maintenance crew was observed
                                    working WRs.                                                            '
                                    The WRs observed were 10274 SWR for cleaning and inspection of the
                                    IVGHXB002 aftercooler tubes, and 503490PS for replacement of a
                                    diaphragm on IVGCPB002 Diesel Air Start Compressors.      The mechanics i
                                    were knowledgeable of the equipment and the tasks. The mechanics        l
                                    familic.rity with the task led to performance of maintenance without    i
                                    removing the procedure from its bag or opening it. The team reviewed    ;
                                    the procedure and determined all appropriate sign-offs had been made,
                                    and no procedural errors had been committed.
                                    Several strengths were noted in the WR process.        The' hanging of
                                    orange Work Request ID Tags on affected equipment helps alert others
                                    using the equipment of its status and helps avoid duplication of
                                    WRs. The planner's inspection of the defective equipment during the
                                    job planning phase is a strength.      The concept of working items by
                                    train or division in a weekly rotation should help to limit problems
                                    with two trains being inoperable at the same time. The trip list
                                    concept is good, but could potentially be expanded to include system
                                    inoperable work lists to take advantage of system outages, as well
                                    as unit outages.      The working groups rotating shifts together is a
                                    strength, in that interpersonal relationships and a feelin; of
                                    teamwork can be deve'noad.
                                    The veakness noted in this area was the mechanical maintenance
                                    meckonics use of procedures. Although no procedural errors were
                                    discovered, the crews did not have the procedures open while the work
                                    was being perfornied. Management needs to work harder to encourage
                                    full utilization of procedures, and encourage the mechanics to pro-
                                    vide feedback in case of inadequacies in the detail of procedures
                                    for covering the assigned task.
                                  1. Planning Meetings
                                    The team observed several planning meetings.      Among the meetings
                                    observed were the daily planning meeting, the morning outage
                                    meeting, and the operating units morning meeting. The meetings were
                                    short, to the point, and effective. Participants were well prepared
                                    for discussion of items, and kept comments focused.
_ - _ _ _ . _ _ -
 
          -- _ _ _ - _ _                                      .-_  _ _ _ _ _ _ _    _-                                  _
                                                                                                                                    !
                                                                                  '
        7                                                                                                                          ]
        ;                ,';.
1
    .y              .
                                                                                                                                    i
  -
                                                                                      34
                                                .j.  Transmission Group
                                                                                                                                    ;
                                                    .The . team inter. viewed the Transmission Group supervisor. ' Transmission
                                                    'does not have ' direct reporting to management. on the plant ' site,          ;
                                                      but is a separate corporate group'. The group provides maintenance
                                                      services for. components of greater than 600VAC!and the 1250C breaker.
                                                      control power co'aponents and relaying. The technicians work , both '
                                                      nuclear and non-nuclear facilities in the Duke . system. -Transmission-
                                                      has its own procedures, training program, -and equipment calibration
                                                      program. Changes to' the station Mechanical or IAE groups programs
                                                      may not be reflected in Transmission, due to 'its separate nature and        ,
                                                      . reporting- authority. Transmission has a fraction of the resources          1
                                                      available for. procedure upgrades, training, or maintenance of test        ,I
                                                      equipment- that is available to other onsite maintenance groups.            'I
                                                                                                                                    j
                                                      The limited resources available to support these activit4s, which
                                                      are considered normal overhead for a nuclear - plants maintenance
                                                      group, will increase the need for monitoring 'to insure co.:pliance in
                                                      safety related activities the group performs. The separate reporting
                                                      authority. and duplication of support functions of Transmission                !
      >
                                                      is considered a : weakness.    This item will be ' followed - up under      ''
                                                      IFI 50-413, 414/89-09-20.
                                                .k.  Management support of Engineering
                                                      Interviews conducted with Design Engineering, Performance Engineer-
                                                      ing, and Maintenance Engineering, showed plant management-to be very
                                                      supportive of these groups. Maintenance Engineering was encouraged
                                                      to develop a Predictive Maintenance program. Funding for equipment            '
                                                      was provided, and the group .was allowed to dedicate engineering
                                                      staffing full time to the program.      Maintenance Engineering was
                                                      reorganized by component type to allow component expertise to
                                                      develop..
                                                      Performance Engineering was provided support to fully implement a
                                                      system engineer or system expert program. These experts use system
                                                      requirements to evaluate equipment. In conjunction with the                  ]
                                                      component engineers from maintenance, this provides for a matrix for.        <
                                                      the evaluation. of plant equipment. This will allow both component            ;
                                                      and system limitations to be considered in evaluations.                      )
                                                                                                                                    l
                                                      Interviews with Design Engineering stowed plant management is
                                                      encouraging all groups onsite to work as a team in problem                    i
                                                      resolution.
                                                                                                                                  /  !
                                                      After interviewing the engineering groups, the plant manager was
                                                      interviewed. He stressed a continuing concept of all the groups _            i
                                                      wor king together to support plant operations. Congruence of goals
                                                      in the different plant engineering groups with support of plant
                                                      management is a strength.
                                                                                                                                    ,
                                                                                                                                    !
                                                                                                                                    i
                            _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _        _ --        -
                                                                                                                                  .i
 
- _ - _ _ _ __ - _ _
                      ..
                    .      ,
          ,              .
                                                                    35
                                1.      10 CFR 50.59 training
                                        The plant is currently developing a program for certification of
                                        individuals to perform 10 CFR 50.59 evaluations.        Knowledge of
                                        requirements and methods of performing the evaluations are being
                                        taught to individuals who, upon completion of training, will be
                                        certified ' level III' evaluators.    This program is seen as a
                                        strength, as it will allow for more consistent evaluations.
                                In the area of Plant Support there were no violations or deviations
                                noted.
                            5. Action on Previous Inspection Findings (92701, 92702)
                                (Closed) DEV. 413,414/87-13-01, Failure to meet commitments of the
                                approved PGP. The licensee provided documentation which indicatad that
                                appropriate corrective actions had been taken.
                                (Closed) VIO. 413,414/87-13-02, Failure to provide adequate training on
                                calculation of subcooling margin. The licensee provided documentation
                              which indicated that appropriate corrective actions had been taken.
                                (Closed) IFI 413,414/87-21-01, Design and implementation of corrections
                                to identified human engineering deficiencies. The licensee provided
                              ' documentation which indicated that appropril 3 corrective actions had
                                been taken.
                            6.  Exit Interview (30703)
                                The inspection scope and findings for both the E0P and Operations / Support
                                portions of this inspection were summarized in separate pre-exit inter-
                                views during the inspection. The findings were again summarized with
                                those persons indicated in paragraph 1 at the formal exit on May 16,
                                1989. The NRC described the areas inspected and discussed in detail the
                                inspection . findings. Although proprietary material was reviewed during      )
                                this inspection, no proprietary material is contained in this report.          j
                                                                                                              i
                                    Item Number                Status    Description / Reference Paragraph
                                VIO 413/89-09-01                Open      Valve    1-KC-9    found unlocked
                                                                          (paragraph 2.k)      and operators
                                                                          not frisking    immediately after
                                                                          exiting    contaminated    areas  l
                                                                          (paragraph 2.e)                      l
                                IFI 413,414/89-09-02            Closed    Cold    Leg    Accumulator    Boron
                                                                          concentration    adjustment made
                                        -                                  with a weak written procedure
                                                                          (paragraph 2.a)
                                                                                                              I
                                                                                                                l
C________________.__.              _      _    __
                                                                                                              j
 
        -
      .
    .        .
t
  :-      .
            '
                                          36
l
                    Item Number      Status  Description / Reference paragraph
                IFI 413,414/89-09-03 Open    Thermal power computer calibration
                                              inputs not tracked on computerized
                                              tracking system (paragraph 2.b)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-04 Open    Weak 10 CFR 50.59 evaluation on
                                              Nuclear Service Water Modification
                                              (paragraph 2.c)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-05 Oper.    Many of the sites safety related
                                              pump  rooms    are    contaminated
                                              (paragraph 2.e)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-06 Open    Weak  control of        fire doors
                                              (paragraph 2.g)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-07 Open    Procedures      for      independent
                                              verification      need    improvement
                                              (paragraph 2.1)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-08 Open    Deficiencies      noted    during  NS
                                              PT (paragraph 2.m)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-09 Open    Control of scaffolding needs to
                                              be improved (paragraph 2.r)            ;
                IFI 413,414/89-09-10 Open    Site does not have DC ground fault
                                              locating equipment (paragraph 2.s)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-11 Open    There are many differences between
                                              the E0Ps and the PSTG (paragraph
                                              3.a)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-12 Open    Correction of technical discrep-
                                              ancies contained in the E0Ps as
                                              outlined Appendix B (paragraph
                                              3.b)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-13 Open    Correction of labeling discrep-
                                              ancies betwcen E0Ps and panel
                                              indication      as    outlined    in
                                              Appendix D (paragraph 3.c)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-14 Open    Correction of S/G pressure meter
                                  '
                                              indications (paragraph 3.c)
                IFI 413,414/89-09-15 Open    Correction    of  writer's      guide
                                              discrepancies contained in E0Ps
                                              as  outlined in        Appendix    C
                                              (paragraph 3.c)
                                                                                      l
 
g
            ..
        . c-      -
                .
                      .u                                                                                6
L
                    <
                                                                                                                                                    37
,                                                                                                                                                    .
                                                                                                                                                    J
                                                                        Item Number                                                          Status  Description / Reference-Paragraph
                                              IFI 413,414/89-09-16                                                                            Open    Resolve control room noise level
                                                                                                                                                      (paragraph 3.c)
      1
                                              I FI . 413,414/89-09-17                                                                          Open    Review simulator. effectiveness in
                                                                                                                                                      training on E0Ps (paragraph 3.d)
                                              IFI 413,414/89-09-18                                                                            Open    Weaknesses noted in the site's
                                                                                                                                                      ETQS program (paragraph 4.a)
                                              IFI 413,414/89-09-19 '                                                                          Open    There are a significant number of
                                                                                                                                                      TSMs on site, some ranging in , age
                                                                                                                                                      of from 3 to 4 years. (paragraph
                                                                                                                                                      4.c)
                                        - IFI-413,414/89-09-20                                                                                Cpen    The seperate_ reporting authority
                                                                                                                                                      and    duplication. of ' support
                                                                                                                                                      functions for the transmission
                                                                                                                                                      group is considered a weakness
                                                                                                                                                      (paragraph 4.j)
                                            The following is a list' of the commitments. made by licensee _-personnel
                                            during this inspection:
                                            -
                                                                                            Licensee personnel committed to add calibration of themal power.
                                                                                          computer inputs'to the computerized periodic Test Program for Unit 1
                                                                                            (see paragraph 2.b).
                                            -
                                                                                            Licensee personnel committed to sending Out of Calibration Notifica-
                                                                                            tion Forms for the _ Unit 1 thermal power computer inputs to the
                                                                                            systems Engineer ,(see paragraph 2.b).
                                            -
                                                                                            Plant management committed to review the procedures for and practices
                                                                                          of plant operators concerning frisking when exiting contaminated -
                                                                                            areas (see paragraph 2.e).
                                            -
                                                                                          The SRG committed to investigate the purchase of Hochiki Detectors as
                                                                                            a part of LER 413/89-011 (see paragraph 2.t).
                                                                                          The lice ;<e cumm, Lo&d t: r.<;ew and correct (as appropriate) the
                                      '
                                            -
                                                                                          momemclature difficiencies in Appendix 0 (see paragraph 3.c and
                                                                                          Appendix D).
  '                                          -
                                                                                          The license committed to evaluate the discrepancies in Appendices B
                                                                                            and C (see paragraph 3.c and appendices B and C).
                                            -
                                                                                          The licensee committed to resolve the conflict between EP/1/A/5000/01
                                                                                            and the markings on the S/G pressure meters (see Appendix B, para-
                                                                                            graph 1.g).
    5
                        . _ _ , . - . _ - _ _ , - . , - - - _ _ - . _ - - - - , - _ , - - - - . _ _ . - - _ - , _ . . - _ - - - - - ---u-_---
 
                        _-          ____ -
                              .
                            .      .
              ..              .
                                                                  APPENDIX A
                                                            PROCEDURES REVIEWED
                                  AP/0/A/5500/20  LOSS OF NUCLEAR SERVICE WATER                  10/29/87
                                  AP/0/A/5500/22  LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR                          06/02/88
                                  AP/0/A/5500/31  ESTIMATE OF FAILED FUEL BASED ON I-131          02/19/88
                                                  CONCENTRATION
                                  AP/0/A/5500/34  SECONDARY CHEMISTRY OUT OF SPECIFICATION        11/04/88
                                  AP/1/A/5500/02  TURBINE GENERATOR TRIP                          03/13/89
                                  AP/1/A/5500/03  LOAD REJECTION                                  03/31/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/04  LOSS OF REACTOR COOLANT PUMP                    10/20/86
                                  AP/1/A/5500/05  ECCS ACTUATION DURING PLANT SHUTDOWN            06/18/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/06  LOSS OF S/G FEEDWATER                          03/05/87  i
                                  AP/1/A/5500/07  LOSS OF NORMAL POWER                            06/06/88
                                  AP/1/A/5500/08  MALFUNCTION OF REACTOR COOLANT PUMPS            08/18/86
                                  AP/1/A/5500/10  REACTOR COOLANT LEAK                            01/16/89
                                  AP/1/A/5500/11  INADVERTENT NC SYSTEM DEPRESSURIZATION          03/13/89
                                  AP/1/A/5500/12  LOSS OF CHARGING OR LETDOWN                    04/02/86
                                  AP/1/A/5500/13  BORON DILUTION                                  01/07/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/14  CONTROL ROD MISALIGNED                          06/06/84
                                  AP/1/A/5500/15  R00 CONTROL MALFUN'' TION                      03/24/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/16  MALFUNCTION OF NUCL TR INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM  11/07/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/17  LOSS OF CONTROL ROOM                            01/31/89
                                  AP/1/A/5500/18  HIGH ACTIVITY IN REACTOR COOLANT                03/15/88
                                  AP/1/A/5500/19  LOSS OF RESIDUAL HEAT REMOVAL SYSTEM            11/30/88
                                  AP/1/A/5500/21- LOSS OF COMPONENT COOLING                      12/22/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/23  LOSS OF CONDENSER VACUUM                        11/13/86
                                  AP/1/A/5500/24  LOSS OF CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY                  01/08/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/25  DAMAGE 0 SPENT FUEL                            09/10/87
                                  AP/1/A/5500/26  LOSS OF REFUELING CANAL OR SPENT FUEL POOL LEVEL 05/29/86
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1  REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION                03/13/89
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1A  REACTOR TRIP RESPONSES                          03/13/89
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1A1 NATURAL CIRCULATION C00LDOWN                    03/13/89
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1B  S/I TERMINATION FOLLOWING SPURIOUS S/I          03/13/89
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C  HIGH-ENERGY LINE BREAK INSIDE CONTAINMENT      08/01/88
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C1 S/I TERMINATION FOLLOWING HIGH-ENERGY LINE BREAK 08/01/88
                                                  IN CONTAINMENT
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C2 POST LOCA C00LDOWN AND DEPRESSURIZATION        03/01/89
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C3 TRANSFER TO COLD LEG RECIRCULATION              08/01/88
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C4 TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRCULATION              08/01/88
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C5 LOSS OF EMERGENCY COOLANT RECIRCULATION        08/01/88  !
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C6 LOCA OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT                        08/01/88  l
                                  EP/1/A/5000/10  STEAM LINE BREAK OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT            03/13/89
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1D1 S/I TERMINATION FOLLOWING STEAM LINE BREAK      08/01/88
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1E  STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE                    03/01/89  '
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1El POST-S/G TR ALTERNATE C00LDOWN AND              03/13/89  ;
                                                  REPRESSURIZATION                                            l
                                  EP/1/A/5000/IE2 S/G TR ALTERNATE C00LDOWN USING BACKFILLING    03/13/89
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1E3 S/G TR WITH CONTINUOUS NC SYSTEM LEAKAGE-      03/01/89    ,
                                                  SUBC00 LED REC 0VERY                                      j
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1E4 S/G TR WITH CONTINUOUS NC SYSTEM LEAKAGE-      03/01/89    i
                                                  SATURATED RECOVERY
                                                                                                              I
- - - _ - - _ - _ _ _ _ _                  __ _                                                            b
 
              -    . _ -      ._- -_ _ _                                          .--                                - ..
                  ..
                .            ..
          4                ,
                                                                                                                            A-2
l
                              EP/1/A/5000/IE6                    S/G TR C00LDOWN USING ND                                                                        08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2                      CRITICAL SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS TREES                                                            08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2A1                    NUCLEAR POWER GENERATION /ATWS                                                                  03/01/89
                            .EP/1/A/5000/2A2                    LOSS OF CORE SHUTDOWN                                                                          08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2B1                    INADEQUATE CORE COOLING                                                                        08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2B2                    DEGRADED CORE COOLING                                                                            08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2B3                    SATURATED CORE' COOLING CONDITIONS                                                              08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2C1                    LOSS OF SECONDARY HEAT SINK                                                                    08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2C2                    S/G OVERPRESSURE                                                                                03/01/89
                              EP/1/A/5000/2C3                    S/G HIGH LEVEL                                                                                  03/01/89
                              EP/1/A/5000/2C4                    LOSS OF NORMAL STEAM RELEASE CAPABILITIES                                                      08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2C5                    S/G LOW LEVEL                                                                                    03/01/89
                              EP/1/A/5000/201                    IMMINENT PRESSURIZED THERMAL SHOCK CONDITIONS                                                  03/01/89
                              EP/1/A/5000/2D2                    ANTICIPATED PRESSURIZED THERMAL SH0CK CONDITIONS 03/01/89
                              EP/1/A/5000/2D3                    HIGH PRESSURIZER PRESSURE                                                                        03/01/89
                              EP/1/A/5000/2E1                    HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE                                                                        03/01/89
                              EP/1/A/5000/2E2                    HIGH CONTAINMENT SUMP LEVEL                                                                      08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2E3                    HIGH CONTAINMENT RADIATION LEVEL                                                                08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2F1                    PRESSURIZER FLOODING                                                                            08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2F2                    LOW NC SYSTEM INVENTORY                                                                        08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/2F3                    VOIDS IN REACTOR VESSEL                                                                          08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/3                      LOSS OF ALL AC POWER                                                                            08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/3A                      LOSS OF ALL AC POWER RECOVERY w/o S/I REQUIRED                                                  08/01/88
                              EP/1/A/5000/3B                      LOSS OF ALL AC POWER RECOVERY WITH S/I REQUIRED                                                08/01/88
                              PROCEDURES REFERRED TO BY E0P OR AOP THAT WERE REVIEWED (IN FULL OR IN PART)
                              OP/0/A/6200/08                      ICE CONDENSER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
                              OP/0/8/6100/13                      STANDBY SHUTDOWN FACILITY OPERATIONS
                              OP/1/A/6150/02A                    REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION
                              OP/1/A/6450/10                    CONTAINMENT HYDROGEN CONTROL SYSTEM                                                              02/12/86
                              OP/1/A/6700/01                    UNIT ONE DATA BOOK
                              OP/1/B/6250/078                    AUXILIARY ELECTRIC BOILER                                                                        09/09/86
                              OP/2/B/6250/07A                    AUXILIARY STEAM SYSTEM ALIGNMENT                                                                01/04/89
                              DOCUMENTS UTILIZED DURING E0P REVIEW
                              EMERGENCY PROCEDURE GUIDELINE SETPOINTS                                                                                            05/14/86
                              CATAWBA NUCLEAR STATION EMERGENCY PROCEDURE GUIDELINES (PSTG)                                                                      SEP 1988
                              WESTINGHOUSE OWNERS GROUP EMERGENCY RESPONSE GUIDELINES: HP VERSION                                                                09/0l/83
                              REVISION 1A
                              CATAWBA NUCLEAR STATION WRITER'S GUIDE FOR EMERGENCY AND ABNORMAL                                                                  03/09/88
                              PROCEDURES
                                                                                                                                                                                                  \
                                                                                                                                                                                                  l
_ _ _ -----__ _                                _ __ _ _ ___ - - - - . - - - - _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ - - - -        - _ - - - - - - - - _ - . - - _ -    --------.------------.-----a
 
                                                                                    - - - - - - - --
                                                                                                    - ----- --- _ -- ---- _ _ ___ _ -- _,
          4
        .          .
      $    .
                                                                    APPENDIX B
                                                      TECHNICAL AND HUMAN FACTORS COMMENTS
                This appendix contains technical and human factors comments, observations and
                  suggestions for E0P improvements made by the team. Unless specifically stated,
                  these comments are not regulatory requirements. However, the licensee agreed
                  in each case to evaluate the comment and take appropriate action. These items
                will be reviewed during a future NRC inspection as noted in paragraph 3.b.
                          I.        General comments:
                                    1.  The SPD provides operator action setpoints which are required b/ the
                                          CNS E0Ps.    There is no SPD to serve A0P unique requirements.
                                    2.  Operation of the SSF is conducted under an OP.            Since the use of
                                          the SSF presumes the control room and the alternate shutdown panel
                                          have been abandoned, SSF operation is an abnormal condition. SSF
                                          operation should be governed by. a procedure which has the added
                                          control and review provided by E0Ps and AOPs.
                                    3.  AP/0/A/5500/34,- secondary chemistry out of specification, treats
                                          out-of-specification actions by a three case analysis and corrective
                                          response process, by operating mode. The process is an excellent
                                          method of treating this type problem.
                                    4.  In the opinion of the team, EP/1/A/5500/203, high pressurizer
                                          pressure, and the companion modification which added the pressurizer
                                          pressure (2400 psig logic to the integrity critical safety function
                                          tree in procedure EP/1/A/5000/2 were a significant improvement over
                                          the ERG integrity treatment.
                                    5.  Many differences exist between the ERG and the PSTG. The majority
                                          are ERG mitigation sequence differences. The licensee stated that
                                          all differences were evaluated and that deviations were documented
                                          for those differences found to be safety significant.                  Those which
                                          were not safety significant were not documented. The team considers
                                          all mitigation sequence differences as safety significant.
                                    6.  E0P changes can be originated by CNS or the general office.                          Since
                                          the CNS staff does not use the PSTG during the E0P change development
                                          process, the burden of ensuring that the E0Ps conform to the PSTG
                                          falls entirely upon the general office staff.                In view of. the
                                          importance of maintaining conformance, the PSTG must be utilized
                                          during the development of E0P changes.
;
                                    7.  PSTG DEV Only EP 01 and 03 contain entry conditions; the remaining
                                          E0Ps do not. The licensee stated that entry conditions were not
                                          required because entry is by transfer from either EP 01 or EP 03.
                                          The team noted that the PSTG lists entry conditions for all E0Ps.
                                          The team considers the absence of entry conditions in E0Ps as a
                                          deviation from the PSTG and ERG.
- __        . _ _ .. . - _ - _ _ _        __                                                                                            i
 
      _-              _
        '1
          ,.
        .                  .
  '.                    .
                                                                    B-2
                          II. EP portion of the E0P comments:
                                1.    EP/1/A/5000/01 Reactor Trip Or Safety Injection                        i
                                      a.  Step 18: The E0P and the PSTG deviate from the sequence in the
                                            ERG and no deviation has been provided. In the ERG, " Check If
                                            RCS Is Intact" occurs before " Check If SGs Are Not Faulted."
                                      b.  Step 5-14: These E0P steps and PSTG steps are listed as subse-
                                            quent actions, unlike the ERG which list them as immediate
                                            actions and no deviation is documented.
                                      c.  PSTG DEV Step 6: Steps 6 and 7 in EP01 are in the reverse order
                                            of the PSTG.
                                      d.  Steps 7 and 10: These steps require the operator to check the
                                            monitor light panel for proper S/I alignment.      The monitor
                                            lights are arranged in group.s. Not all lights in a given group
                                            are lit on receipt of an S/I signal. This makes it much more
                                            difficult for the operator to verify proper S/I equipment
                                            alignment. The licensee had previously i'lentified these
                                            discrepancies.    Examples of these discrepancies are:
                                            (1) On the Ss panel, the actuation signal for windows D6, 07,
                                                  E6, and E7 has been changed and they are no longer actuated
                                                  by an Ss signal.
                                            (2) On the St panel, windows A6, A7, B6, and B7 light on an Ss
                                                  signal. The rest of the St panel is off on an Ss signal.
                                            (3) On the St panel, the actuation signal for windows L11 and
                                                  L12 has been' changed to an Sp signal, but they are still
                                                  located on the St panel.                                    l
                                            (4) On the St panel, windows F4, F5, and F12 remain da) K for
                                                  approximately 15 to 20 minutes after an St signal. The rest
                                                  of the panel is lit during this time.
                                      e.  PSTG DEV Step 1: This step contains a kick-out to an A0P
                                            unlike the corresponding step in the PSTG.
                                      f.  Step 4: None of the status light panels in the Control Room
                                            have alpha numeric demarcation necessary for ease of location.
                                      g.  Step I.4, RNO:    This step requires the operator to check
                                            whether S/I is required based on a S/G pressure of 725 psig.
                                            The "S/G PRESS" meters in the control room have indicated in red
                                            "SI" at 710 psig. This Item was previously identified in NRC
                                            INSPECTION REPORT NOS. 50-413/87-13 AND 50-414/87-13, 7.0.2 page
                                            20, dated August 6,    1987. This is a safety significant item
                                            which the licensee has committed to resolve. Resolution of this
.
.
                                            issue will be identified as IFI 50-413,414/69-09-17.
_          - - _ _ _
 
- _ -              - _ - -
                  .-
                .            .
      %-                    .
                                                                  B-3
                                    h.  Step 6c.: This step specifies operator action based on a meter
                                        reading of 195 psig; a value which can not be read. The meter
                                        has a range of 0 to 3000 psig and is graduated in 50 psig
                                        increments.
                                    1.  Step 6d.: This step requires operator action at 500 gpm ND
                                        flow; a value which cannot be read.
                                    j.  Enclosure 3: In the first and second bullet, the pot setting
                                        corresponding to a pressure of 1090 psig is not included.
                                    k.  Step 18: This step requires operator action at a containment
                                        sump level of 0.5 ft or greater. The operator can not dependably
                                        read this value on the meter. 0.5 ft is-the bottom of the' meter
                                        scale.  In addition, the meter erroneously read 0.75 ft with a
                                        dry. sump at the time of the inspection.
                                    1.  Step 29: The values given for PRT pressure, level, and tempera-
                                        ture in each of the three bullets do not agree with either the
                                        alarm manual or the setpoint document.
                                2. EP/1/A/5000/1A Reactor Trip Response
                                    a.  PSTG DEV Step 1 thru 3: Steps 1 thru 3 are not contained in the-
                                        PSTG or the ERG.
                                    b.  PSTG DEV Step 4: This step is conducted prior to the corre-
                                        sponding steps 1-9 of the PSTG vice after it.
                                    c.  Step 17 fourth bullet: The' step states "Stop one CF pump." If
                                        only one CF pump is running, all CF would be lost.
                                3. EP/1/A/5000/1A1 Natural circulation cooldown
                                    a.  PSTG DEV Step 9:    There is no caution prior to this step
                                        indicating that S/I will unblock if reactor coolant system
                                        pressure increases above 1955 psig as there is in the PSTG.
                                    b.  Step 11: The E0P and the PSTG do not indicate that subcooling
                                        should be based on core exit thermocouple as does the ERG and
                                        no deviation is documented,
'~
                                    c.  PSTG DEV Step 13: This step does not contain a substep which
                                        ensures letdown is in service, nor its associated RNO, as does
                                        step 12c of the PSTG.
                                    d.  PSTG DEV Step 17:    This step does not contain a substep which
                                        ensures letdown is in service, nor its associated RNO, as does
                                        step 17c of the PSTG.
      _ _ _ - _
 
                                                                                                                                        - _ _
                    ..,
                      .    .
                                                                                                                                            ,
                .._.    ..
                                                                  B-4
                                    e.    PSTG DEV Step 31:    The caution concerning depressurizing the
                                          reactor coolant system is contained after this step vice before
                                          as in the PSTG. Additionally, this caution does not include a
                                          statement directing the maintaining of .the subcooling require-
                                          ments of step 17 as in the PSTG.
                                    f.    The training department does not have an established scenario
                                          for training operstors in how to control the reactor.with a void
                                          in the head.                                                                                        .
                                                                                                                                              I
                              4.    EP/1/A/5000/1B S/I Termination Following Spurious S/I
                                .a.      Step 13c1 RNO: The labeling on the reference instrument is
                                          misleading and makes location difficult. The meter actually
                                          indicates the RN to the KC HX outlet flow,
                                    b.    Step 13c2 RNO: The step does not reference the procedure number
                                          for aligning RN.
                                    c.    Step 29 page 25 first bullet:                      Valve 1-NM3A is not included.                    i
                              5.    EP/1/A/5000/1C High energy line break inside containment
                                'a.      Step 1, note: This note is actually a conditional step. It is
                                          required within step 1 prior to the actions called for in
                                          substep b.
                                    b.    Step 8, caution: This caution is actually an action step. It
                                          is required within step 8b RNO, which also requires a condition
                                          step beginning "IF PZR pressure is greater than 2315 PSIG."
                                    c.    Step 15, caution: This caution is an action step related to the
                                          completion of step 15.
                                    d.    Step 18c: This step is not a substep required to accomplish
                                          high level step 18. It constitutes an additional high level
                                          step in this procedure.
                                    e.    Step 23c: The "CLOSE/ RESET" pushbutton on ISM-1 is a dual
                                          purpose pushbutton used both to close the MSIVs as well as reset
                                          the MSIV bypass valves. If the pushbutton is used while the
                                          MSIVs are open, the MSIVs will close. This system holds consid-
                                          erable risk of inadvertent closure of an MSIV, and this accident
                                          has occurred in the past. Single purpose controls are required
                                          to eliminate this problem.
                                    f.    Step 23d, note: This note is a caution identifying a potential
                                          hazard for increased of fsite radiation release when dumping
                                          steam from the S/Gs.
- - _ - - _ _ -                _ _.    _    -  __.  __            ._  _ _ _ _ _ - _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - -
 
                                            ._.                  .                    ._        -        .
                                    .
    ..                        .
  Uk ?                    -      e
                                      ,
                1
                                                                    '
                  s          o'
        *V              ..
                                                                            B-5
              t
                                        .
            .
                                        g.        Step 23d, RNO c: .The' desired NC pressure referenced .in this
                                                  step is indicatedLin Step i23e on the fol1owing page. The
                                                                                                    ~
  .                                              - definition of desired NC pressure is required prior to' Step 23d,-
..
                                                  RNO.c.
L'
L
                                        h.        Step 26a, RNO 1:    This step requires an additional caution to
                                                  identify the potential hazard related to de-energizing the.EHM
        '
                                                  system within 24 hours tfter actuation.
l                                      1..        Enclosure 1, section B: The information following the section
                                                  title "S/I Termination Criteria" is actually a note related to
          ,
                                                  execution of the entire section.
                                  6.    EP/1/A/5000/1C1 S/I Termination Following High Energy Line Break
                                      . Inside Containment
                                        a.        PSTG DEV Step 5: Phase A containment is reset in step 5'of the
                                                  E0P.' The equivalent step is not performed until . step 13 of the
                                                  PSTG.
                                        b.        PSTG DEV Step 3a RNO:      This step does not direct the operator
                                                  to the step " aligning charging. flow path" as does step 2 RNO of.
                                                  the PSTG.
                                        c.
                                                                                      ~
                                                  Step 4: There is no guidance on which indication toluse for
                                                  subcooling. There are three different -indications given on the
                                                  plasma. display,
                                        d.        Step 9a: There is no guidance defining " desired charging flow".
                                                  Transferring to auto with a large error signal' could cause- the
                                                  valve to fail,
                                        e.        Step 27: The usage of the 50 deg. F subcooling limit'is incon-
                                                  sistent with the ERG and the setpoint document.
                                  7.  . EP/1/A/5000/1C2 Post-loca cooldown and depressurization
                                        a.        Step.1, caution:    This caution statement is actually two notes
                                                  providing -supplemental information for the performance:of step
                                                  1.
                                        b.        Step 4, caution: This caution includes a conditional statement
                                                  that is actually the first substep of step 4.      It is required
                                                  prior to the action described in step 4a.                          l8
                                        c.        Step 9b, RNO: This conditional step is out of sequence. It is
                                                  required just prior to step 9d.
                                        d.        Step 9d, note:    This note is actually a caution related to the
                                                  performance of step 9d. It also contains a conditional sequence
                                                  required just prior to step 9dl.
                                                                                                                        .1
                                                                                                                          !
                                                                                                                        -
                    ___                        _-                                                                      ~
 
                              - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ -          _.      . _ _ _ _ _ .
                                      ..
                                                          ,
L                        '
                                      .
j                <.                                    .
1
(
                                                                                                  B-6
            i.
                                                              e.    . Step 12 b, RNO:      This conditional step is out of sequence.    It
                                                                      is required just prior to step 12f.
                                                              f.    Step 12d, caution: This caution statement is actually a note
                                                                      that provides supplemental information for the performance of
                                                                      the remainder of step 12.
                                                              g.    Step 12f, note:        This note is actually a caution related to
                                                                      the performance of step 12f. .It also contains a conditional.
                                                                      sequer.ce required just prior to step 12fl.
                                                              h.    Step 12f4:        The desired cooldown rate mentioned in this step
                                                                      is defined quantitatively in step 12d on the previous page.
                                                                      Quantitative definition of the cooldown rate is required in this
                                                                      step to reduce operator memory burden and eliminate a transition-
                                                                      backwards within the procedure.
                                                              1.    Step 17, note:          Both note statements are actually cautions
                                                                      related to the performance of step 17.          Identification of the
                                                                      potential hazards are required within these cautions.
                                                              J.    Step 20, caution: This caution contains an action step that is
                                                                      required prior to the performance of step 20c. Identification
  <
                                                                      of the potential hazard is required within this caution,
                                                              k.    Step 32, caution: This caution is actually a step related to
                                                                      the performance of step 32.
                                                              1.    Step 33, caution: This caution contains an action step related
                                                                      to the performance of step 33. Identification of the potential
                                                                      hazard is required within this caution.
                                                            8. EP/1/A/5000/1C3 Transfer to cold leg recirculation
                                                              a.    Step 1: The E0P and the PSTG, prior to this step, do not have a
                                                                      caution concerning taking manual actlon to restart safeguards
                                                                      equipment if offsite power is lost as does the ERG and no
                                                                      deviation is documented.
                                                              b.    Step 2: The E0P and the PSTG perform this step before S/I is
                                                                      reset vice after as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                                                              c.      PSTG DEV Step 6: The E0P does not contain the caution that if
                                                                      pressure increases above the NI pump shutoff head the NI pumps
                                                                      should be stopped.as does the PSTG.
                                                              d.      PSTG DEV Step 13b, RNO: This step does not refer to FR-Z.1
                                                                      " Response to high containment pressure", as does step 9c, RNO of
                                                                      the PSTG.
  - - _ _ - - - - _ _ _ - - _
 
- _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ _
                    .
                .                      .
      ...                  .                                                                                              i
                                                                                                                            l
                                                                                  B-7                                      l
                                                                                                                            l
                                                  9. EP/1/A/5000/1C4 Transfer to hot leg recirculation
                                                    a.  Step 1, caution: This caution is actually an action step          1
                                                          required at the beginning of the substeps to step 1.
                                                10. EP/1/A/5000/1C5 Loss of Emergency Coolant Recirculation
                                                    a.  Step 3c: This step does rot specify which subcooling indication
                                                          to use.
                                                                                                                            l
                                                    b.  Steps 3c and d: These steps instruct the. operator to start and
                                                          stop the NV and NI pumps, but do not provide pump duty cycle
                                                          restrictions.
                                                    c.  Step 5: This step and step 4 of 'the PSTG secure all NC pumps
                                                          unlike the ERG which leaves one running. No deviation is
                                                          documented.                                                      j
                                                    d.  Enclosure 3 and other comparable enclosures: These enclosures
                                                          do not provide the number of the key necessary to unlock the CLA
                                                          isolation valve electrical breakers. During the inspection, the
                                                          wrong key for operating the breaker was issued to the operator.
                                                    e.  Step 3d first bullet: This step does not use maintenance of      -
                                                          subcooling greater than or equal to zero as a criteria.
                                                                                                                              i
                                                    f.  Step 18 and 22:      There is no direction after these steps to
                                                          return to the procedure in effect.
                                                    g.  Step 19: There is no note warning the operator to monitor
                                                          containment sump level nor ND pump current.
                                                11. EP/1/A/5000/1C6 Loca outside containment                              1
                                                    a.  No comments.
                                                12. EP/1/A/5000/10 Steamline break outside containment
                                                    a.  Step 3: This step and step 3 of the PSTG do not verify S/G        l
                                                          blowdewn isolation of the faulted S/G(s) as does the ERG and no  1
                                                          deviation is documented. 3.
                                                    b.  PSTG DEV Step 8:      This step does not check intermediate range
                                                          flux prior to S/I termination as does step 7c of the PSTG.
                                                    c.  PSTG DEV Step 8b: This step checks " total feed flow" where as
                                                          step 7b of the PSTG checks "CA flow".                            i
                                                                                                                              i
                                                                                                                            1
                _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ -                      _ - - -        _                                      )
 
      _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ - ___                      _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . - _      _
                                                                                      _ _ - - -
            .
            .                .
  .                .
                                                                                                  B-8
                                  13. EP/1/A/5000/1D1 S/I . Termination Following Steam Line Break
                                      a.  Step 3: The preferential order of depressurization differs from
                                            the similar. step in other EPs.
                                      b.  Step 27b: The placement of the note obscures the step.
                                  14. EP/1/A/5000/IE Steam generator tube rupture
                                      a.  Step 3b RNO 2d: Since the PORV is known to be.open, " ensure" is
                                            incorrect.                      The appropriate action verb is close,
                                      b.  Step 3d RNO:                      As implied by the preceding caution, this step
                                            works well unless the CA turbine pump is running as the only
                                            pump; in that case it will shut the pump down. The RNO step
                                            should be expanded to provide an action sequence in the event
                                            the turbine pump is the only running pump.
                                      c.  Step 20b RNO la: The step directs that S/I pumps be started "to
                                            restore subcooling and PZR level". The step should be revised
                                            to ensure that' PZR level and subcooling are restored prior to
                                            continuing to the sub step which transfers back to step                                      1..
                                      d.  Step 30a and elsewhere in other S/G TR procedures: The table
                                            compares trends in pressurizer level and S/G level in an attempt
                                            to determine subsequent mitigation strategy. Since pressurizer
                                            level control is in automatic pressurizer level will remain
                                            constant, within broad limits, in spite of water transfer
                                            through the breat.                                  For this reason, the team concluded .that
                                            the table was not a suitable method of determining mitigation
                                            strategy.
                                      e.  Step 34: The step does not direct periodic sampling of the
                                            turbine buildina sump.
                                      f.  Enclosure 1, step F: The step does not place OAC point ID P0828
                                            on a trend recorder.
                                      g.  Enclosure 1, step B: The S/I termination criteria parmits S/I
                                            to be terminated prior to sufficient primary depressurization
                                            following a S/G tube rupture.
                                  15. EP/1/A/5000/IE1 Post-S/G TR cooldown and depressurization
l-                                    a.  Step 10, table: As discussed under E0P EP IE comments in this
l                                          report, the table relating PZR and S/G level trends is not valid
                                            if PZR level control is in automatic.
l
l
\    -
                                .
                                          -      . --_                          _  .__- __              -- _    _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ -    ___ - -
 
                                                                                    _          _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    _.,          .
  *.            .                                    >
                                                                                                                  1
                                                      B-9                                                        l
                                                                                                                  !
                    16. EP/1/A/5000/IE2 S/G TR alternate cooldown using backfill
                        a.  The SPD value is 150 ppm for backfill margin, not 170 as shown
                            in the E0P. The latter is correct. This value is recalculated
                            for each fuel cycle.    Rather than change the SPD each time, a
                            controlled document calculation. Sheet is issued to provide
                            updated backfill margin.      The team considered this practice
                            acceptable-
                        b.  Step 1, caution:    The second bulleted caution is actually an
                            action step that is required for performance' of this procedure.
                            The third bulleted caution is actually a note along with an
                            action step that is required for the performance of this
                            procedure.
                        c.  Step _5,  caution: This caution is structured as an action and
                            fails to identify the related potential hazard.
                        d.  Step 12, caution: This caution is actually a note. However it
                            has no relation to the remaining steps in this procedure.      The
                            actions it addresses are included in the procedure referenced in
                            step 13, and that procedure contains the necessary information.
                    17. EP/1/A/5000/IE3- S/G TR with continuous NC leakage: subcooled recovery
                        a.  Step 28b RNO: Typo; the reader should be referred to steps
                            33-35, not 32-35.
                        b.  Caution before step 34: This discusses rack out of NI or NV
                            pumps; it should discuss rack out of pump breakers.
                        c.  Step 37. There is no requirement listed for periodic HP
                            sampling of the Turbine Building sump.
                    18. EP1/A/5000/IE4 S/G TR with continuous NC system leakage: saturated
                        recovery
                        a.  Step IES:    Typo; change NV to NC.
                        b.  Step 38:    The Turbine Building sump should be sampled periodi-
                            cally.
                    19. EP/1/A/5000/IE6 S/G TR cooldown using ND
                        a.  When the ERGS place decay heat removal in service with S/G TR,
                            the process is listed within each ERG. The licensee chose to                        j
                            create IE6 as a single procedure which covers all decay heat
                            removal with S/G TR via a transition to IE6. The team evaluated                        !
                            this as a positive addition to the CNS E0PS.                                        !
                                                                                                                  i
                                                                                                                  i
                                                                                                                  1
_      _ _ _ _
 
                                                                                                            -
    .  .
                                                                                                                      q
1:    <I                                                                                                              b
      .                                .
v. ..            ..
I                                                                          B-10
                                        g.
                                              b.  ' Step 7:  Th'is step secures the running D/Gs. They have been
                                                    running since recognition of the S/G TR. Since no load opera-
                                                    tions are harmful, this step should oe placed earlier in the S/G
                                                    TR procedures.
                                          20. EP/1/A/5000/02 Critical safety function status trees
                                              a.  The instructions to the operator concerning transition from one
                                                    CSF red path recovery procedure to a higher red path recovery
                                                    procedure require clarification.    The current rule is for the
                                                    user to stop at the current action point and to go to the new-
                                                    procedure. This could for example result in shifting procedures
                                                    with the PZR PORV open.
                                              b.    Step 1: The procedure directs the use of the CSF trees as
                                                    displayed on the OAC (tech spec computer). The operator is not
                                                    required or encouraged to cross check the OAC CSF trees against
                                                    1E board instrumentation as time permits. (NUREG-0800, SRP
                                                    18.2, paragraph 5.1.3.3.a)
                                              c.    CSF 2B:' The ERG background document directs use of thermo-
                                                  : couples located at the core geometric center and one each at
                                                    the center of each quadrant.    Both the OAC and' plasma display
                                                    auctioneer the highest 5 after evaluation to discard bad thermo-
                                                    couples. No deviation documentation exists.
                                              d.    CSF 28:  The logic .uses Reactor vessel level >43% which the
                                                    setpoint document describes as fuel mid plane level with zero
                                                    void fraction. The ERG requires this value to be 3.5 ft above
                                                    the bottom of active fuel with zero void fraction. The conflict
                                                    between the ERG 3.5 ft requirement and the CNS use of mid plane
                                                    is not a documented deviation. However, this difference from
                                                    the ERG was documented in a Duke letter of August 29, 1984 to
                                                    the NRC (Tucker /Denton).
                                              e.    CSF 2C: The CNS provides feed flow only to intact generators;
                                                    the ERG does not limit flow to only intact generators. No
                                                    deviation exists.
                                              f.    CSF 2D: When compared to the ERG, the changes made to the CNS
                                                    CSF integrity tree were significant enhancements which were
                                                    supported by valid deviations. In the opinion of the team, the
                                                    CNS treatment of the coolant integrity tree was excellent,
                                                    particularly with reference to cold overpressure protection.
                                              g.    PSTG DEV CSF 2E: The PSTG and the E0P logic use a containment
                                                    sump design flood level of 13 ft.    The number in the SPD is
                                                    17 ft.
-        _ _ - - - - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ .                      -
 
  -_ _ - _ - .                                                                              --_
        .c
        .                                        ,1
AL                            .
                                                                                                                                B-11
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            ,
                                                                              21.              EP/1A/5000/2A?. Nuclear Power Generation /ATWS
                                                                                                a.  Step 4f RNO: The step directs opening of all PORVs and does not
                                                                                                      allow for use of just one PORV.
                                                                              22.              EP/1/A/5000/2A2 Loss of Core Shutdown
                                                                                                a.  Nc comment
                                                                              23.              ED/1/ /5000/2B1 Inadequate Core Cooling-
                                                                                                a.  Step 24: This . step does not specify the minimum procedural
                                                                                                      criteria for sta ting and running an NC pump.
                                                                                                b.  Step 27: This step specifies' operator action based on a meter
                                                                                                      reading of 195 psig; a value which can not be read. The meter
                                                                                                    .has a range of 0 to 3000 psig and is graduated in 50 psig
                                                                                                      increments.
                                                                                                c,  Step 31:      This step ' cannot be reached from any point in the
                                                                                                      procedure.
                                                                                24.              EP/1/A/5000/2B2 Degraded Core Cooling
                                                                                                a.  Step 17b: Step 17b list the D/P for two conditions (Train A
                                                                                                      and Train _B) Steps 17c and 17d only ask for D/P. There is no
                                                                                                      guidarre to the operator if, due to operating conditions, the
                                                                                                      D/Ps were.different between train A and train B.
                                                                                                b.  Step 24: There is no way to enter step 24. Step 23 is a GO T0
                                                                                                      statement.
                                                                                25.              EP/1/A/5000/283 Saturated Core Cooling Conditions
                                                                                                a.  No comment
                                                                                                                                                                                                                              l
                                                                                26.              EP/1/A/5000/2C1 Loss of secondary heat sink
                                                                                                a.  Step 7: This step establishes CA flow to "at least one" S/G
                                                                                                      which means ficw could be restored to all four S/Gs. Since the
                                                                                                      S/Gs are " dry", CA flow should be established to the minimum
                                                                                                      number of S/Gs required ta restore the heat sink to avoid
                                                                                                      unnecessary thermal shock.
                                                                                                b.  Step 8 and elsewhere in this and other procedures: The logic is
                                                                                                      based upon total CA flow. No total CA flow meter exists. The
                                                                                                      operator is required to sum flows from individual S/G sensors.
          - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ - _ . _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _                                          . _ _ _ - _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ -
 
        __ __
    j
              .  .
  I
      e        4
,
                                                      B-12
                        c.  Step 12 and elsewhere:      The feed regulator bypass valves are
                              about 37 ft above the floor level.      Since the valves have
                              vertical rising stems, it would be difficult to install chain
                              operators.    Interference limits the potential for use of a
                            . ladder; no ladder long enough to reach the valves could be
                              found.  No emergency lighting was available in the vicinity.
                        d.  Str7 17 RNO 2:    Typo; change "ro" to "no",
                        e.  Steps 23bic & 23b2b: One step uses "C/L", the other "C-Leg" to
                              designate cold leg.
                        f.  The spare annunciators on the MD panels are either black faced
                              or blank. A standi i convention has not been followed.
                        g.  Step 37 RNO a, second alternative:      The operator should be
                              required to ensure the head vents are closed prior to the
                              transfer to EP IC.
                        h.  Encl  2: The procedure does not include a requirement to report
                              action complete to the Control hoom.
                    '27. EP/1/A/5000/2C2 S/G overpressure
                        a.  Step 10, caution: This caution fails to identify the potential
                              nazard as required by the writers guide.
                    28. EP/1/A/5000/2C3 S/G high level
                        a.  Step 10: The RNO directs action to be taken if the verifica-
                              tions in either step 10a or step 10b are not met. However, with
                              the existing step format the RNO only applies to step 10a.
                    29. EP/1/A/5000/2C4 Loss of normal steam release capabilities
                        a.  Step 1, caution: This caution fails to identify the potential
                              hazard.
                    30. EP/1/A/5000/2C5 S/G low level
                        a.  No comments
                    31. EP/1/A/5000/2D1    Imminent pressurized thermal shock condition
                        a.  Step Id1 RNO: Typo, the step is supposed to read "NC" tempera-
                              ture, not "NV" temperature.
                        b.  Enclosure 4: The enclosure is illegible.
 
                                                                    _                  _
                                                                                                  _ _ _ _ _
            .g'
            .            .
        -t-          . .
                                                          B-13
                          32. EP/1/A/5000/2D2 Anticipated pressurized thermal shock,
                              a.  Enclosure 3: The enclosure is illegible.
                          33. EP/1/A/5000/2D3 High pressurizer pressure
                              a.  Step 3:  The if/then step may require initiation of NV aux
                                    spray. The method is not specified. Use of NV aux spray is
                                    infrequent. In the AOPs, when NV aux spray is required, the
                                    method is specified.
                              b.  Step 21: Use of the word maintain is incorrect. Boron addition
                                    establishes a new concentration.
                              c.  PSTG DEV Caution: The PSTG FR-P.3 initial caution concerning
                                    restoration of pressurizer pressure control was not included in
                                    the E0P. Procedore step 5 addresses the same subject but an
                                    action step cannot fully accomplish the intent of a caution.
                              d.  PSTG DEV E0P step 23 requirement to ensure adequate shutdown
                                    margin before returning to the procedure in effect does not
                                    appear in the PSTG. This is a valid addition to the E0Ps which
                                    is not currently in the PSTG.
                          34. EP/1/A/5000/2E1 High con,ainment pressure
                              a.  Step 2, note: This note is actually a caution. It requires
                                    identification of the related potential hazard. In addition, an
                                    action step is included in the note that is required prior to
                                    performance of step 2a.
                              b.  Step 3, caution: This caution statement is actually a condi-
                                    tional step that applies throughout the procedure.        It is
                                    appropriately placed on a foldout page for this procedure,
                              c.  Step 3, note: This note is actually a conditional step that is
                                    required within the procedure prior to the actions included in
                                    step 3.
                              d.  Step 5, caution: This caution fails to identify the related
                                    hazard. In addition, it is incorrectly structured as an action,
                                    rather than as an alert to personnel about potential damage or
                                    injury.
                              e.  Step 7b, RNO: This step is overly complex, with multiple
                                    possible meanings due to the combined use of the logic terms AND
                                    and OR.
                                                                                                            i
a------        _ - - . _
 
                                                                                                                            _ _ _
                .
            ..
            '
                    ..                                                                                                            3
          ;t      .                                                                                                              i
                                                                                  B-14
I
E                                              f.    Step 11, note: The first bulleted item in this note is unneces-
                                                    sary. This concern is a basic training issue, and need not
                                                    be included as a note here. The second bulleted item is a
                                                    conditional step. It is required within the procedure prior to
                                                    the actions included in step 11.
                                              g.    Enclosure 4, step 2c: The bulleted items within this step are
                                                    actually conditional sequences and are not in accordance with
                                                    the format for logic statements found in the writer's guide.
                                          35. EP/1/A/5000/2E2 High containment sump level
                                              a.    Step 2a:        The sequencing of containment isolation valves within
                                                    this step is awkward ' and inconsistent with the placement of
                                                    valve switches on the control boards.
                                          36. EP/1/A/5000/2E3 High containment radiation level
                                              a.    No comment
                                          37. EP/1/5000/2F1        Pressurizer flooding
                                              a.    Step 2: From the definitions in the writer's guide, the use of
                                                    -verify followed by ensure is incorrect. Verify does not permit
                                                    a status change; ensure requires a status change if not as
                                                    listed.
                                          38. EP/1/A/5000/2F2 Low NC system inventory
                                              a.    No comments.
                                          39. EP/1/A/5000/2F3 Voids in reactor vessel
                                              a.    Step 1:    There is no caution prior to this step nor step 1 of
                                                    the PSTG warning against use of this procedure if a controlled
                                                    cooldown is in progress and a void in the head is expected, a:
                                                    does the ERG and no deviation is dacumented.
                                              b.    Step 4, RNO b(2): This step does not give guidance defining
                                                    " minimum charging".
                                              c.    Step 14:        This step and step 9 of the PSTG are not preceded by
                                                    a caution alerting the operator to evaluate the status of any
                                                    reactor coolant pump prior to starting it if seal cooling
                                                    had previously been lost as does the ERG and no deviation is
                                                    documented.
                                              d.    Step 14: This step and step 9 of the PSTG are not preceded by a
                                                    note informing the operator of the priority for starting reactor
                                                    coolant pumps as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
.
______ -.              - _ ____ _ _ ____ -                      - _ - -    - -_  . _ _ _ _
 
                                                            ..              - .- _    _  _                  . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .                                .
.
.
      .                                              .                                                                                                            4
  4.                                .
                                                                                              B-15
                                                                e.  PSTG DEV Step 17:    This step does not direct the closing of
                                                                    both valves in a vent line with a failed valve as does step 12
                                                                    of the PSTG.
                                                                f.  Step 20d: This step sends an operator inside containment with
                                                                    up to 6% hydrogen concentration present,
                                                                g.  PSTG DEV Step 26: This step does not direct the closing of
                                                                    both valves in a vent line with a failed valve as does step 20
                                                                    of the PSTG.
                                                        40.    EP/1/A/5000/03 Loss of all ac power
                                                                a.  PSTG DEV This procedure does not list entry conditions at the
                                                                    beginnini of the procedure as does the PSTG. The E0P as written
                                                                    contains symptoms at the beginning of the procedure. However,
                                                                    these are not clear enough to prevent inadvertent entry into the
                                                                    procedure.
                                                                b.  Step 3, RNO: The valves in this step which are ensured to be
                                                                    open will not have power available to their control board
                                                                    indications during a loss of all ac power.
                                                                c.  Step'3: The E0P and the PSTG, in this and subsequent steps do
                                                                    not list " Verify NC System isolation" and " Ensure CA flow to
                                                                    S/G(s)" as immediate actions as required in the ERG. The PSTG
                                                                    does not specify any immediate actions for any procedures
                                                                    contrary to the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                                                                d.  Step 7: The E0P and the PSTG do not contain a caution prior to
                                                                    this step alerting the operator to reset an S/I signal to permit
                                                                    manual loading of equipment as does the ERG and no deviation is
                                                                    documented.
                                                                e.  Step 7: The E0P and the PSTG do not contain a step prior to
                                                                    this step to ensure that CST inventory is conserved for makeup
                                                                    to the steam generators as does the ERG and no deviation is
                                                                    documented.
                                                                f.  Step 7: This step and step 12 of the PSTG check steam generator
                                                                    isolation but do not address feedwater isolation as does the ERG
                                                                    and no deviation is documented.
                                                                g.  Step 10: This step and step 15 of the PSTG direct maintaining
                                                                    steam generator levels at no-load level instead of maintaining
                                                                    them within the band established in the ERG and no deviation is
                                                                    documented.
                                                                h.  Step 11a: This step and step 16a of the PSTG do not contain
                                                                    adverse containment values for steam generator narrow range
                                                                    level a* Joes the ERG and no deviation is documented.
    - - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _                . _ _  _ _ _ _ _                  ___ _                  ._. _ _ . _ . . _ - _ _ _ _ _ _
 
                                                                                                                                            _    . _ _ . - - _ . __
k      -
p        ..
  ?      .. ~
                .
    *.        .
                        f
                                                              '
I
(                                                          B-16
i
L
                      i    . Step 11b:  This step directs an operator to unlock valves.
                            These valves do not have locks on them and are not designated as
l.-                        locked valves on the print.
                      J.    Step 12b: This step directs an operator to ensure that ICA-6 is
                            closed. This valve can not be operated locally with ladders
                            provided.
                      k.    Step 12d: This step checks hotwell level < 6 inches. The
                            required meter is graduated in feet.
                      1.    PSTG DEV Step 12e:            This step does not isolate the CA pump
                            suction from condensate grac'e sources as does step 17e of the
                            PSTG.
                      m.    Step 16e: This step references figure 6.10 of the curve book.
                            The correct figure is 6.9.
                      n.    PSTG DEV Step 16e: This step maintains S/G pressure at a value
                            based on NC criticality temperature limic.                                                                        The PSTG directs
                            maintaining S/G pressure at 10f psig.
                      o.    Step 18: This step and step 23 of the PSTG do not address
                            checking source range instrumentation to verify reactor shutdown
                            as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                      p.    Step 27: This step and step 32 of the PSTG are not preceded by
                            a caution against exceeding the capacity of the power source as
                            does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                  41. EP/1/A/5000/3A Loss of all ac power recovery without S/I required
                      a.    PSTG DEV Step Sh:            This step ensures only %e 4V pump is
                            running whereas step 4e of the PSTG directs star + mg all avail-
                            able NV pumps.
                      b.    Step 7e: This step directs establishing " desired charging flow"
                            and does not define it as a value comparable to normal NI pump
                            miniflow as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                      c.    Step 10: The E0P and PSTG do not contain a note prior to this
                            step to prevent inadvertent start of the motor drlven auxiliary'
                            feedwater pumps as does the ERG and no deviatien is dccumented.
                      d.    PSTG DEV Step 15: This step does not start an additional NV
                            pumn as does step 14a of the PSTG.
                      e.    Step 16: This step and step 15b of the PSTG do not check let-
                            down in service n,or direct use of auxiliary spray to control NC
                            system pressure as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                                          -_    . _ - _ .          - _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - - - - _ - _ - - _ - - - - - _ _ - -
 
                                                                          -____ _ ___ - - - -
    .
          .
  t-  .
'
                                                B-17
              42.  EP/1/A/5000/3B Loss of all ac power recovery with S/I required
                    a.  Step 8: The E0P and the PSTG do not contain a step prior to
                          this step which places the containment spray pump switches in
                          standby as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                    b.  Step 8: The E0P and PSTG do not contain a note prior to this
                          step to prevent inadvertent start of the motor driven auxiliary
                          feedwater pumps as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.
                    c.  Step 11: This step and step 10 of the PSTG direct transition to
                          E-0, " Reactor trip or safety injection" instead of E-1, " Loss of
                          reactor or secondary coolant" as does the ERG and no deviation      '
                          is documented.
        III. AP portion of the E0P comments:
                1.  AP/0/A/5500/20 Loss of nuclear service water
                    a.  Paragraph A, purpose: On line two, after " loss of RN train or"
                          some wording has been omitted. The remainder of the sentence
                          does not make sense.
                2.  AP/0/A/5500/22 Loss of instrument air
                    a.  Page 1:    The enclosure listing and the actual enclosures are
                          untitled.  This makes selection of the proper enclosure diffi-
                          cult.
                    b.  Pg. 1, step B: Use of "and/or" is prohibited by the writer's
                          guide,
                    c.  Pg.5, step 6:  Neither the procedure nor enclosure 3 note that
                          realignment of the turbine aux feed pump to S/G A or C requires
                          operation of CA38A or CA668,
                    d.  Encl. 1, pg. 15: Contrary to most CNS drawings, drawings            j
                          CN1594-1.2, CN1594-1.3, CN2594-1.2 and CN 2594-1.3 do not the
                                                                                              '
                          list fail position for air operated valves.
                    e.  Encl. 1, pgs. 20 & 21: The fail positions for IKC-122 and
                          2KC-122 are open, not closed as shown.
                    f.  Encl. 1, pgs. 24 & 26:    Valves 1NV-309 and 2NV-309 are missing
                          from the list.
                    g.  Encl. 2, step 3: This step requires the IAEs to install port-
                          able air bottles and open some letdown valves. IAE personnel
                          are not trained on the A0Ps. No IAE procedure reference is
                          provided.
            -
 
                _-            ._    . _ _ .
      .
      e.-                s,
  *
    .                  .
                                                                    B-18                                      I
t
                                                                                                              i
                                  h.        Encl. 2, step 4:    The order of the two "or" gated substeps
                                              appears to be reversed since opening the 45 gpm letdown orifice
                                              would allow the control room to control inventory with NV-11A.
                                                                                                              i
                                  1.        Encl. 3,  step 2:  It is not clear in this step whether the
                                              " check'' and "IF" statements apply to at least one, more than
                                              one, all, etc. S/Gs?
                            3.    AP/0/A/5500/34 Secondary chemistry out of specification
                                  a.        No comments.
                            4.    AP/1/A/5500/02 Turbine generator trip
                                  a.        Step Cla: The step does not give the expected P-9 light status
                                              or panel location.
                                  b.        Step Did: Typo, Should be "D.3" not "d.3".
                                  c.        Step D1 RNO: Typo, Should be "D.2" not "d.2".
                                  d.        Step 05 Note: The note is unclear in that it- does not specify
                                              " Transformer" cooling banks.
                                  e.        Step D7 RNO first bullet: There are two switches with the same
                                              name. Currently the operator cannot distinguish the difference
                                              in switches.
                                  f.        Step D7 RNO second bullet: There are two switches with the
                                              same name. The operator neads to be able to distinguish the
                                              difference in switches.
                                  g.        Step D13:  The step does not provide an RNO if the steam dumps
                                              are not available.
                                  h.        Step D2e: The procedure does not address the method of rod
                                              control below 15% power.
                            5.    AP/1/A/5500/03 Load Rejection
                                  a.        Step D4 note: There is no operator guidance given as to where to
                                              read the 3 deg. delta Tave-Tref,
                                  b.        Step D10 Note:  See 4.d above,
                                  c.        Step D14c RNO third bullet: There are two switches with the
                                              same name. The operator needs to be able to distinguish the
                                              difference in switches.
      _ _ _ - - _ __. _
 
        - _. _                    _                                                                                            _
                .
        4                      e
'
  ' ?. :                      .
                                                                                                                                    }
                                                                                      d-19
                                                                                                                                    1
                                                        d.  . Step D14c- RNO second bullet: There are two switches with the
                                                              same name. The operator needs to be able to distinguish the
                                                              difference in switches.
                                                        e.  Step D15 the second bullet: The graduation of the meter is such
                                                              that an. operator can not determine + or      .1 KV .
                                                        .f.  Steps D16c rnd d: The steps contain six separate actions and
                                                              they are written in two steps.
                                                        g.  Steps D16f and g: The steps contain six separate actions and
                                                              they are written in two steps.
                                                        h.  Step D18: The temperature given for the PRT action point is
                                                              inconsistent'with the temperature given in the E0P.
                                  6.                    AP/1/A/5500/04 Loss of reactor coolant pump
                                                        a.  No comments
                                  7.                    AP/1/A/5500/05 ECCS actuation during plant shutdown
                                                        a.    Step 15c: The list of OAC point identifiers is inconsistent and
                                                              not in accordance with the placement of these points on the
                                                              computer screens. However, all of the information provided on
                                                              these computer points is available on the graphics 25 computer
                                                              screen.
                                                        b.  Step 15d: The information provided by' all of the listed 0AC
                                                              computer points is available .on the graphics 25 screen, along
                                                              with the information required in step 15c.
                                                        c.  Step 16, note: This note is actually a caution related    to the
                                                              performance of step 16. It lacks identification of the    poten-
                                                              tial hazard of seal failure.                                        !
                                                        d.    Step 17:  This step fails to identify the operating procedure
                                                              required to accomplish the actions listed. An alternative to
                                                              referencing the operating procedure is to specify the required      i
                                                              number of chillers to pumps for these actions.
                                                        e.    Step 19: This step includes reference to the NR system. This
                                                              system is not in service at CNS and is not intended for any
                                                              future use.
                                                        f.    Step 25a, RNO: This step includes an overly complex layering of
                                                              logic sequences.
                                                        g.    Step 32, caution:    This caution is actually an action step
                                                              required within the procedure prior to performance of step 32.
-                _ - _ _ _ _ _      -__ _ . _ - - _ -
 
                                                                                                    _ __- _ _
        .
      .      .
  '
  .      ..
                                                          B-20
                      h.          Step 32u: The list of valves included in this step is awkward
                                  and inconsistent with the placement of the ' valve switches on the
                                . control boards.
                      1.          Step 33, caution: This caution is actually an action step
                                  required within the procedure prior to performance of step 33.
                  8.  AP/1/A/5500/06 Loss of S/G feedwater
                      a.          No comments
                  9. AP/1/A/5500/07 Loss of normal power
                      a.          No comments
                10.  AP/1/A/5500/08 Malfunction of reactor coolant pumps
                      a.          Case II, step 6e: This step does not give guidance defining
                                  " normal" for " lwr brg temp".
                11.  AP/1/A/5500/10 Reactor coolant leak-
                      a.          Step    1, caution:    This caution lacks identification of the
                                  potential hazard and incorrectly includes use of the logic term
                                  WHEN.
                      b.          Step 5, note: This note is actually a conditional step required
                                  within the procedure prior to performance of step 5.
                      c.          Step 8: The first bulleted item in the step incorrectly refer-
                                  ences OP/1/A/6200/02 with the title to OP/1/A/6100/02. The
                                  title is correct, however, the correct procedure number is the
                                  latter.
                      d.          Enclosure 2, note 1:      This note is actually an- action step
                                  required prior to performance of this enclosure,
                      e.          Enclosure 2,      page 13, caution:    This caution incorrectly
                                  contains a directive to the operator.
                      f.          Enclosure 2, page 16, step 6a:          This step references
                                  OP/2/6250/07A, Enclosure 4.3. A 35 foot extension ladder
                                  necessary to perform the procedural actions is dedicated for NE0
                                  use at E33, TB-568. This ladder may be required for performance
                                  of the procedure enclosure. During the inspection walkthrough,
                                  the wrong type of ladder (12 foot step ladder) was found at the
                                  dedicated ladder location.
                      g.          Enclosure 2, page 16, step 6al: This step fails to identify the
                                  required operating procedure enclosure number.
L__----_-----------_-  - - - - -
 
                                                            -
                                                                                              y
                                                                                                  :
        ..
      t'    4,
.
    f      .
                                                                                                  I
1'                                                                                                  l
,                                                  8-21                                          -
l
l
                                                                                                I
                        h.  Enclosure 2, page 16, step 6a2 This step fails    to identify the  l
                            required operating procedure enclosure number.
                        1.  Enclosure 2, page 19, step 1: "NC Pmp A (B,C,D) #2 Seal S-Pipe
                            Hi/Lo Lvl" annunciator lights are removed as temporary modifi-
                            cations during outages. However, these lights are referenced
                            in this enclosure with no indication that they may not be
                            available.
                12. AP/1/A/5500/11    Inadvertent NC system depressurization
                        a.  Case I, step C1, caution:    This caution is actually a condi-
                            tional step that applies during the performance of the entire
                            procedure. Correct placement would be on a foldout page to the      I
                            procedure.
                        b.  Case I, step 4, caution: This caution is actually a step that
                            is required within the procedure prior to the performance of
                            step 4.
                        c.  Case I, step 5, caution: This caution is actually a step that
                            is required within the procedure prior to the performance of
                            step 5.
                        d.  Case II, step C1, caution: This caution is actually a condi-
                            tional step that applies during the performance of the entire
                            procedure. Correct placement would be on a foldout page to the
                            procedure.
                        e.  Case III, step C1, caution: This caution is actually a condi-
                            tional step that applies during the performance of the entire
                            procedure. Correct placement would 'Je on a foldout page to the
                            procedure.
                13.    AP/1/A/5500/12 Loss of charging or letdown
                        a. Case I, step C1, caution:    See 11b above.
                        b.  Case I, step C3, caution: This caution fails to identify the
                            potential hazard. In addition, it.contains a conditional stop
                            that is required within the procedure prior to step 3.
                        c.  Case I, step 01:  See 7e above.
                        d.  Case I, step D2e, RNO: This step also requires a caution to
                            address the consequences of exceeding 1 degree F per minute
                            cooldown on any NV pump.
____                __
 
-_ -- -____ _ - -                        -
                      .
                    .              .
                                                                                                                    j
      u..
      .
                            1
                                                                          B-22
l
                                            e;    Case    I, step 6, caution:  The first bulleted item in this
                                                caution is actually a step that is required within the procedure
                                                  prior to performance of step 6. The second bulleted item is      a
                                                  caution, however, it fails to identify the potential hazard.
                                            f.    Case II, step C1, caution:    See 11b above.
                                            g.    Case II, step D1:    See 7e above.
                                      14.  AP/1/A/5500/13 Boron dilution
                                            a.    No comment
                                      15.  AP/1/A/5500/14 Control rod misaligned
                                            a.    No comment
                                      16.  AP/1/A/5500/15 Rod control malfunction
                                            a.    No comment
                                      17.  AP/1/A/5500/16 Malfunction of nuclear instrumentation system
                                            a.  Case I, step 3c: This step directs , ensuring adequate shutdown
                                                margin but does not reference the procedure which is Lsed to
                                                  accomplish this.
                                            b.  Case III, step C.1:    This step does not provide the setpoints
                                                  associated with the parameters to determine if a reactor trip is
                                                  required.
                                            c.  Case IV, step 2: This step directs monitoring nuclear instru-
                                                mentation but does not provide any actions to be taken if the
                                                  listed conditions are not met.
                                      18.  AP/1/A/5500/17 Loss of control room
                                            a.  Communications between unit ASPS will be lost if PBX battery
                                                depletion renders the station dial phone system inoperative.
                                                  Since the string phone circuits are unit unique and no radios
                                                  are repositioned at or carried to the ASPS, there are no
                                                  alternative communications options.
                                            b.  The procedure does not specify which of the two separate string
                                                  phone circuit; -tauld be used for communications within a unit
                                                when the ASP or the SSF is activated. The walkthrough operator
                                                was not certain which was correct.
                                                                                                                    i
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _              _      _
 
                                                                              __-__ ____-____ - _ __ -
      s
        .  .
  .* ,    .
                                          B-23
              c. Enclosure 1, step 1: During the walkthrough, the ASP operator
                  was unable to simulate completion of this step because he lacked
                  tools: to loosen the front panel bolts. Tools were available in
                  a locked tool box in the AFWPTCP room but the ASP operator did
                  not have the combination.
              d. Contrary to instructions posted on the unit one ASP A panel
                  access cover plate, the panel plate was unlocked, the cicsure
                  bolts were removed and the access was open.
              e. Enclosure 1, step 6 RN0: This step neglects the case where one
                  pump fails to start but the other is available.                  The problem
                  probably stems from the prohibited use of "and/or".
              f. Enclosure 1, step 10 RNO a5:      This double action statement
                  should be split into two elements.
              g. Enclosure 1, step 10 b2c:    The intent of this step is to reach
                  and maintain ~25% PZR level .    The RNO side accomplishes this.
                  Due to the lack of an AER action verb, if level is already ~25%
                  the operator will continue without instruction to maintain level
                  ~25%
              h. Enclosure 1, step 11a: The results of the AER and RNO sides are
                  different.    The RNO side adjusts pressure to ~2235 psig and
                  maintains it there. The AER side checks for pressure ~2235 psig
                  and if satisfied continues without instruction to maintain that
                  pressure.
              1. Enclosure 1, step 12: The use of " adequate normal" instead of
                  just " normal" is confusing and unnecessary.
              j. Enclosure 1, step 13 RNO 2:    Delete typo ":" on line 5.
              k. Enclosure 1, step 14: The team noted that the file of data book
                  excerpts maintained at the ASP did not include the cooldown
                  limits curve.
              1. Enclosure 1, ste, 29 and elsewhere within the E0Ps: Grammar;
                  the two EPIP prccedures listed concern classification and
                  notification, not just notification.
l              m. Enclosure 1,    step 23 and the preceding caution: The cooling
l                tower fans are no longer required beyond this step in the
!                procedure. This step and the caution may be replaced by an
                  action statement shutting down the fans.
                                                                                                                                    l
l
t
I
                                                          ..    . _ _ _ _ .          _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ -
 
        .-
      .                    .
    4      .
                                                                                B-24-
                                                  n.  Enclosure 3, step 3: Operation of the MODS under normal current
                                                        load would blow. up the breaker cabinet. Although there are
                                                        interlochs to prc<ent this and operators are trained on breaker /
                                                      MOD sequence of operation, the.EOP step is written with bullets
                                                        indicating that sequence is not important. The step should
                                                        provide a mandatory sequence and should be accompanied by an
                                                        appropriate caution,
                                                  o.  Enclosure 3, step 5: The reciprocating charging pump for unit I
                                                        has been tagged out of service awaiting repair since July 1988.
                                                      Two operators indicated that the positive displacement NV pumps
                                                        on both units have.been difficult to maintain. If this service
                                                      were typical for these pumps, their unavailability would ad-
                                                        veesely impact the E0Ps.      Licensee management assured the team
                                                        at the exit that the availability of these pumps is improving.
                                                  p.  Enclosure 7, step 4 RNO 1: Use of "out-of-specification" is
                                                        confusing since the specification is not directly identified nor
                                                        is it conventional to describe a containment 3 psig ESF signal
                                                        as containment "out-of-specification"
                                              19. AP/1/A/5500/18 High activity in reactor coolant
                                                  a.  No comments
                                              20. AP/1/A/5500/19 Loss of residual heat removal
                                                  a.  Case I, step C1, note 1: This note is overly detailed. It is
                                                        actually an action step that is required prior to step 01.
                                                  b.  Case I, step D8e, caution: This caution is actually a note, as
                                                      well as an action step that is required prior to performance of
                                                        step 08e.
                                                  c.  Case I, step D9, caution:    See 20b above.
                                                  d.  Case I, step D11f:    This step fails to identify the necessary
                                                        enclosure to the operating procedure referenced.      In addition,
                                                        only a limited number of the valves listed in the operating
                                                        procedure enclosure are applicable in this case,
                                                  e.  Case II, step C1, note 1:    See 20a above.
                                                  f.  Case II, step D3, caution: This caution is actually a note,
                                                        however, it does not apply to performance of step D3.
                                                  g.  Case III, step C1, note 1:      See 20a above,
                                                  h.  Faclosure 2, step A, caution: This caution contains an action
                                                        step that is required within the procedure prior to performance
                                                        of step C.
- -          _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - _ _ - _ _ __.                              ._            _ _ _ _ _ _ _              _    ._ _ - _ - _ _
 
                  --      _ _ _              _-                    = _ _ _      -    _                  _ _            -
                    l4                                      '
    <
                  x            x
        *+                ac
                                                                                          .B-25
                        '
                                                    i '.  Enclosure 5,fstep A, note: This note is actually an action step
                                                          that.is~ required prior to performance of step A.
                                                  ' j.    Enclosure 5, step A3, caution: .This caution fails to identify
                                                        'the potential. hazard. In addition, it contains an action step
                                                                                                                ~
                                                          required within the procedure prior to performance ~ of step. A3.
                                    21.            AP/1/A/5500/21 Loss of component cooling
                                                    a.    Step 3, RNO a.2: The valves required to be shut by this step do
                                                          not have locations listed. Due to the fact that these valves
                                                          are not located in proximity to the equipment being isolated an
                                                          operator would have difficulty closing these -valves' in a timely
                                                          manner.
                                    22.            AP/1/A/5500/23 Loss of condenser vacuum
                                                    a.    No comment
                                  . 23.          AP/1/A/5500/24 Loss of containment integrity
                                                  - a.    -Section B,' case II: This section has multiple possible meanings
                                                          between the second and third bulleted items due to the combined
                                                          use of logic terms AND and OR.
                                                    b.    Case I,. step D2a: The four hour time frame indicated in .this -
                                                          step is in conflict with Tech. Spec. 3.6.1.1 LCO which indicates-
                                                          that containment integrity must be restored within one hour. A
                                                          justification for the basis of this conflict is required.
                                    24.          - AP/1/A/5500/25 Damaged spent fuel
                                                    a.    Case 1, step'c2-4:              This equipment is infrequently operated
                                                          and the walkthrough NE0 had difficulty locating it.                It's
                                                          location is not specified.
                                                    b.    Case 1, step d3 and elsewhere'in other procedures: This step
                                                          requires ensuring containment integrity; the technical specifi-
                                                          cation reference applies to all penetrations. The walkthrough
                                                          operators were uncertain of which of several alternative methods
                                                          of ensuring integrity applied.
                                    25.            AP/1/A/5500/26 Loss of refueling canal or spent fuel pool level
                                                    a.      Incident to the walkthrough, the team inspected alarm response
                                                          procedure IAD-13 E2 which listed minimum fuel pool level as 36.6
                                                          ft., the alarm setpoint, and referenced technical specification
                                                          3.9.10.            The tech spet requires a minimum of 23 ft. of water
                                                          above the top of the fuel. This equates to a level of 36.923 ft.
                                                                                                                                    .
u-mmm_-_u_m_u.__m-_m                    _m_._m          _    __m__m
 
- - .                                                                  ..                                                        _ _ - - _ -
                      ,
                          e
                        *      .
              . . .
                . .        ...
                                                                                          B-26
                                                                    T;,e licensee indicated that tha cror had been identified
                                                                    previously and that procedure and alarm setpoint changes were
                                                                    being held in abeyance pending results of a study concerning
                                                                    tech spec applicability and compliance in the event of a
                                                                    damaged, jammed or cocked assembly in the pool.    The daily
                                                                    surveillance procedure minimum level was 37.6 ft.
-
,
  m.,---___--.-__.---            - - . . - - - - - - . - - - - ---
 
- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
                          ..
                          .      .
                *-
                .          ..
                                                                    APPENDIX C
                                                              WRITER'S GUIDE COMMENTS
                                This appendix contains writer's guide and human factors comments, observations
                                and suggestions for E0P improvements made by the team. Unless specifically
                                stated, these comments are not regulatory requirements. However, the licensee
                                agreed in each case to evaluate the comment and take appropriate ection.
                                These items will be reviewed during a future ' NRC inspection as notea ir.
                                paragraph 3.c.
                                  I. Deviations from the Writer's Guide
                                      A sample of the E0Ps and AOPs were evaluated for deviations from the
                                      Catawba writer's guide. Types of deviations noted are characterized in
                                      this section and accompanied by a list of examples of the specific devia-
                                      tions.  Note that some steps contain more than one example.
                                      1.    The following steps violate writer's guide directions for the
                                            structure of logic statements:
                                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C                5 RNO
                                                                                8 RNO
                                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C2                33
                                                  EP/1/A/5000/1E2                2
                                                                                6
                                                                                6 RNO
                                                  EP/1/A/5000/2C2                10
                                                  EP/1/A/5000/2E1                5
                                                  EP/1/A/5000/2E2                3
                                                  AP/1/A/5500/05                D4
                                                                                07
                                                                                D7 RNO
                                                                                D12
                                                                                013
                                                                                D22 RNO
                                                                                D25 RNO
                                                                                D34
                                                                                D30
                                                                                D35 RNO
                                                  AP/1/A/5500/10                D4
l                                                                                D8
l
                                                  AP/1/A/5500/12                Case I    C3 RNO
                                                                                          02 RNO
                                                                                          D6
                                                                                Case II  D2 RNO
                                                                                          D4 RNO
                                                                                                                ;
\
 
r
: :
            *
1
          .      .
              .-
    .. <
                                                  C-2
                            AP/1/A/5500/19              Case I    D7
                                                                  D10
                                                                  D]1 RNO
                                                                  D14
                                                                  D14 RNO
                                                        Case II    D2
                                                                  D2 RNO                              1
                                                                                                        l
                                                                  D6
                                                                  D8
                                                        Case III D15 RNO
                            AP/1/A/5500/24              Section B Case I
                                                                  Case II
                                                        Case I    D1
                                                                  D2
                                                                  D3
                                                        Case II    C1
                      The team reviewed 10 A0Ps for compliance to the writer's guide.
                      Generally, in the AOPs reviewed where the conjunctions "and" and
                      "or" were used, they were f.ormatted as if they were being used as
                      logic terms.
                  2. The - following steps violate writer's guide directions for the
                      structure of transition steps:
                            EP/1/A/5000/1C              14
                                                        26
                            EP/1/A/5000/1C2            18 RNO
                                                        25 RNO
                                                        33 RNO
                            EP/1/A/5000/2E1            13
                            AP/1/A/5500/05              C1 RNO
                                                        D1                                              i
                                                        D2 RNO
                                                        D5 RNO
                                                        D7 RNO
                                                        D13
                                                        D20 RNO
                                                        D23 RNO                                        I
                                                        D25 RNO                                        >
                                                        D27
                                                        D27 RNO
                                                        D28 RNO
                                                        DhD
                                                        D31
                                                        D32
                                                        D34
                                                        D35
                                                        D35 RNO
                                                                                    . _ - _ _ _ _ _ _-
 
,                  -                    - _ - _ - _ . -    .. _  _    __ _ _ . .    _ _
              .
            .                    .
1
          4.    .
                                                                          C-3
                                                        - AP/1/A/5500/10          01 RNO
                                                                                  D3 RNO
                                                                                  D4
                                                                                  D5 RNO
                                                                                  D6
                                                                                  D6 RNO
                                                                                  D7
                                                                                  D8
                                                          AP/1/A/5500/1.1        Case '    D6
                                                                                  Case III D5
                                                        .AP/1/A/5500/12          Case I    C3 RNO
                                                                                            D5 RNO
                                                                                            07
                                                                                            D8
                                                                                            D9
                                                                                  Case II  D2 RNO
                                                                                            D4 RNO
                                                                                            D5 RNO
                                                                                            D7
                                                                                            D9
                                                                                            DIO
                                                                                            D11
                                                          AP/1/A/5500/19          Case I    D1
                                                                                            D4 RNO
                                                                                            D5
                                                                                            D7
                                                                                            D8
                                                                                            D8 RNO
                                                                                            09
                                                                                            D11
                                                                                            D11 RNO
                                                                                            D12
                                                                                            013
                                                                                            D14 RNO
                                                                                  Case II  D2 RNO
                                                                                            D3 RNO
                                                                                            D4
                                                                                            05
                                                                                  Case III D1 RNO  -
                                                                                            D2 RNO
                                                                                            D4
                                                                                            D5
                                                                                            D7
                                                                                            D11 RNO
                                                                                            D12
                                                                                            D13
                                                                                            D14
                                                                                            D15
- - _ _ _            . - _ _ _ _. _ _ _
 
    - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _                  .  _ _ - _-__ _ _ _                ._ ._ __ ___                    - _ - -
              .
          ,            .
  *
  .
                                                                                        C-4
i
                                                            AP/1/A/5500/24                  Section B Case I-
                                                                                            Case I    D1
                                                                                                      D2
                                                                                                      D4 RNO
                                                                                            Case II  D1
                                                                                                      02
                                    3.  The many deviations from the writer's guide in the structure of and
                                          use of cautions and notes is described in appendix B of this report.
                                    4.  The writer's guide defines a format for presenting plant expected
                                          responses. The following steps do not use the defined format for
                                          expected responses:
                                                            EP/1/A/5000/1C                  3
                                                                                            4
                                                                                            8
                                                                                            10
                                                                                            20
                                                                                            20 RNO
                                                                                            21
                                                            EP/1/A/5000/1C2                11
                                                                                            12
                                                                                            20
                                                                                            31
                                                            EP/1/A/5000/2E1                10
                                                            EP/1/A/5000/2F2                1
                                          The team reviewed 10 AOPs for compliance to the writer's guide.
                                          Almost every expected response listed in the .AOPs reviewed was
                                          formatted incorrectly.
                                    5.  The writer's guide states that common English grammar should be
                                          applied within the procedures and that the verb is the most important
                                          word in an action step. The following steps lack a verb:
                                                            EP/1/A/5000/1C                  1
                                                                                            2
                                                                                            4 RNO
                                                                                            5 RNO
                                                                                            7
                                                                                            9
                                                                                            9 RNO
                                                                                            12
                                                                                            15 RNO
                                                                                            23
                                                                                            23 RNO
                                                                                            24
                                                                                            27 RNO
-                  ..  - - - _ _ -
 
                                                                        _        _ _ - .. - . _ -
      .,
        -
      3.:
    .'e                                  e-
.'.,                        . . .
                                                              C-5
                                              EP/1/A/5000/102      4
                                                                  5
                                                                  5 RNO
                                                                  8
                                                                  9 RNO
                                                                  12
                                                                  12.RNO
                                                                  19
                                                                  30-
                                              EP/1/A/5000/IE2      5 RNO
                                                                  9 RNO
                                                                  10
                                              EP/1/A/5000/2C2      9
                                              EP/1/A/5000/2C4      3
                                              EP/1/A/5000/2E1      1
                                                                  8 RNO
                                              AP/1/A/5500/05      C2 RNO
                                                                  D2
                                                                  03
                                                                  D5
                                                                  D6
                                                                  'D7
                                                                  DIO
                                                                  D15
                                                                  D23 RNO
                                                                  D24
                                                                  D25
                                                                  D28
                                                                  D34
                                                                  D35
                                                                  D35 RNO
                                              AP/1/A/5500/10      D1 RNO
                                                                  D2 RNO                        i
                                                                  D5 RNO
                                                                  D8'
                                                                                                  I
                                              AP/1/A/5500/11      Case I    D1 RNO
                                                                              D3
                                                                              D6
                                                                  Case II    C1 RNO
                                                                              D1 RNO
                                                                  Case III C1 RNO                l
                                                                              D1 RNO                l
                                                                              D3 RNO
          __ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ .
 
    _                                    _    _                    _      _    _ . _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ -
                                                                                                      _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
                        .
"                  ,,-        .
          *
            .                ,
                                                                C-6
l'                                          AP/1/A/5500/12              Case I      D2
                                                                                    D2 RNO
                                                                                    D3 RNO
                                                                        Case II    C2
                                                                                    D1
                                                                                    D4
l
                                            AP/1/A/5500/19              Case I      D6
                                                                                    D8
                                                                                      08 RNO
,
'
                                                                        Case III D8
                                                                                      D11
                                                                                      D12
                                            AP/1/5500/24                Case I      D1
                                                                        Case II      C1
                                  6. The following steps lack a subject:
                                            EP/1/A/5000/1C              2 RNO
                                            EP/1/A/5000/102              34
                                            AP/1/A/5500/05              D15 RNO
                                                                        D22 RNO
                                            AP/1/A/5500/12              Case II      D2 RNO
                                  7. Location information for annunciator lights was missing or incomplete
                                    in a number of procedures. The following examples lack either panel
                                    number or grid location number:
                                            EP/1/A/5000/1C              22
                                            EP/1/A/5000/2C4              3
                                                                        3 RNO
                                            AP/1/A/5500/02              D1
                                            AP/1/A/5500/02              C1
                                                                        DS
                                            AP/1/A/5500/11              A
                                                                                                                                  ;
                                                                                                                                    l
                                                                                                                                  ]
                                                                                                                                  1
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
 
                                            . _ _ _ .  __ ._ -.          __ _ _ _  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
                                                                                                          _- _ _ .      _
                                                                                                                          - _ _
          .
        * ~'            a
  6 .            - .$ '
                                                              C-7
                          8.  The writer's guide. indicates that procedure nomenclature that exactly.
                                replicate; plant labels'should be set off by quotation marks.                      The.
                                following steps use quotation marks for nomenclature that does not
                                exactly match that in the control room and plant:
                                      EP/1/A/5000/1C                2
                                                                    4
                                                      -
                                                                    6
                                                                    7
                                                                    10
                                                                    17
                                                                    20
                                                                    22                                                          ,
                                                                    23
                                                                    23 RNO
                                      EP/1/A/5000/IC2                1
                                                                    6
                                                                    7
                                                                    30
                                                                    33
                                      EP/1/A/5000/IC4                2
                                      EP/1/A/5000/2C4                2
                                                                    3
                                      EP/1/A/5000/2E1                8
                          9.  The following steps contain lists of valves that'are not arranged in
                                an order consistent with their placement on the control board:
                                      EP/1/A/5000/2E2                2
                                      AP/1/A/5500/05                3
                          10. Appendix 5 to .the writer's guide states that a colon should be used
                                to indicate substeps or that a list follows.                        The following
                                procedure steps lacked use of a colon in this manner:
                                      EP/1/A/5000/1C                  1
                                                                    4
                                                                      5 RNO
                                                                    7'
                                                                    8
                                                                      9
                                                                      14                                                        1
                                                                      15
l                                                                    17
'
                                                                    20 RNO                                                        ;
                                                                                                                                  l
                                                                      22
      _ - _ - _ _
 
                                                                . . _ _ . - _ _ . - - _ _
        .
-
                : ,; .
                  .
                      .      .
              $-      ....
              ',                                      C-8
' '
                                                          .
s                                                          24
                                                            26
                                1                          27
                                  EP/1/A/5000/ ICE        1-
                                                            2
                                                            4
                                                    '
                                                            5
                                                            6 RNO
                                                            7
                                                            9
                                                            10
                                                            11
                                                            12
                                                            14
                                                            15
                                                            17
                                                            18
                                                            20
                                                            21
                                                            22
                                                            23
                                                            2A
                                                            25
                                                            26
                                                            27
                                                            28
                                                            29
                                                            31
                                                            33
                              '
                                  EP/1/A/5000/104          1
                                                            2
                                  EP/1/A/5000/1C6          1
'
                                                            2
                                                            3
                                                            4
                                  EP/1/A/5000/IE2          3
                                                            4
                                                            5
                                                            6
                                                            9
                                                            10
                                  EP/1/A/5000/2C2          3
                                                            6
                                                            7
                                                            8
                                                            9
                                                                                          l
                                                                                          l
                                                                                          l
_ - _ _ - _ .
 
_        _ _ _                                                              _          _              _.    ._.  . _ _ . . _
                                                                                                                                  _ _ _ _
        .
        .                                .
  ..            ..
                                                                                              C-9
                                                                    EP/1/A/5000/2C4                2
                                                                                                    3
                                                                    EP/1/A/5000/2E1                3
                                                                                                    7
                                                                                                    10
                                                                                                    11
                                                                    EP/1/A/5000/2E2                2
                                                                    EP/1/A/5000/2F2                2
                                                                                                    3
                                                                                                    4
                                                                                                    5
                                                                    AP/1/A/5500/05                  D7
                                                                                                    D8
                                                                                                    D24
                                                                                                    D29
                                                                    AP/1/A/5500/19                  Case I  D4
                                                                                                    Case II  D2
                                                                                                            D3
                                                                                                            D4
                                                                                                    Case III D3
                                                                                                            D6
                                                                                                            D10
                                                                                                            D11
                                                                                                            D12
                                                        11. The writer's guide states that all steps should be written in active
                                                              voice. The following steps are written in passive voice:
                                                                    EP/1/A/5000/1C                  4c RNO
                                                                                                    28
                                                II.-Inadequacies in the Writer's Guide
                                                        In order to assure consistency within and between procedures and to retain
                                                        that consistency over time and through personnel changes, the writer's
                                                        guide must thoroughly address each aspect of the procedures and must
                                                        define restrictively the methods designated for use.
1
                                                        The Catawba writer's guide contains a number of areas where lack of
                                                        restrictive or thorough guidance has led to problems and inconsistencies
                                                        in the E0Ps and AOPs. These weaknesses are as follows:
1:                                                      1.    The writer's guide describes a structure for consequential steps
l                                                            that combines a transition forward and a "WHEN condition X, THEN
l
                                                              transition backward in the procedure." This system is overly com-
                                                              plex. It is difficult to perform and provides no method of reminding
                                                              the operator to transition backward to the original step.
      -        _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ .                -_ __                _
 
                                                    __              . _ _ _ _ _ .                      - - - - - - . _ _ _ - _ . - - _                                --_
6
            4'
              .                  ..
    M                        :.
A                                '
                                                                                                                                  C-10
;s"                .
                  '
                                      '2,  The guidance on preparation of notes and cautions improperly allows-
                                          .the use,of logic-sequences in these statements.
                                      3.  The instructions for use of "and" and "or" asi conjunctions directs -
  a                                        use of these terms when unnecessary, thereby contributing to confus-                                                        -
                                            ing and overly complex action steps.
                                      .4.  The writer's guide allows. the use of the logic term "if" as part of
                                            other sentences (for example, " check if"Jand " determine . if"). These
                                            forms dilute the usefulness of logic' statement structure and could                              .
                                            lead to confusion.
                                      5.'  The~ description of procedure substep numbering, bulleting and inden--
                                            tation described in the writer's guide does not provide adequate
                                            guidance. As -a result, the procedures contain numerous examples of
                                            duplicate step numbering and steps where the relationship between a
                                            step and.its RNO step is not clear.
                                      6.  'The guidance on structure of subs'teps does not adequately define the
                                            difference between substeps as action steps and substeps. as lists.
                                          ~ It allows inconsistent use of complete sentences and incomplete
                                            sentences.
                                      7.  The peacekeeping space system defined by the writer's guide provides
                                            checkoff' spaces at high level steps and in sequences of'four or more
                                                                  -
                                          . bulleted substeps. When a step includes several pages of substeps,
                                            this method does not provide ahquate peacekeeping and it requires
                                            operators to turn- backwards in the procedure to find the checkoff
                                          -mark.      The ' system also also. lacks sufficient peacekeeping for lists
                                            of controls.
                                      8.  The writer's guide states that procedure steps should have one ' main
                                            action and that multiple actions with a step are to be avoided.
                                            However, numerous examples of multiple actions with steps were found.
                                      9.  .The writer's guide does not adequately address nor require some
                                            method 'of reminder to operators of steps that may be performed
                                            at some time in the future (e.g. , "WHEN condition, THEN action"
                                            sequences).
                                      10.  The writer's guide allows the listing of partial valve numbers in a
                                            horizontal list following one complete valve number. This method is
    s                                      unsatisfactory. It circumvents the writer's guide method for place-
                                            keeping and increases the possibility of error or confusion.
                                      11.  The writer's guide defines the transition tern '' REFER T0" as indi-
                                            cating that an operator will leave his place in the procedure to
                                            go elsewhere, and then later return. This is in contrast to the PSTG
                                            definition and the common definition of " REFER T0" as indicating
                                            concurrent execution of steps.
      _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _                        _ _ _ _ _ _                _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _                                - _  _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ -
 
--      _
            -      -_      -        --                  _. -    _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ - . _ _ _ _ _ - _ .
      *
  ,.
    . '.* .
                                                C-11
              12.  The ' dictionary of acronyms and abbreviations in the writer's ' guide
                    lists a number of abbreviations for which there are two definitions
                  and a number of definitions for which there are two acronyms or
                  abbreviations.      Elimination of all dual use or dual definition
                  entries is necessary.
              13.  The constrained language list in the writer's guide contains a number
                    of words that have the same meaning and others that ciffer only
                  -slightly in meaning.      Elimination of multiple approved vocabulary
                    having the same meaning will increase ease of procedure comprehension
                    and clarify distinctions between those words that are similar but
                  different.
              14.  The writer's guide fails to describe a method for indicating possible
                    plural status. For example, as in the step " check faulted S/Gs."
              15.  Enclosures to procedures must be subject to defined structure in the
                  writer's guide. The Catawba writer's guide dismisses enclosures from
                    the restrictions used'in procedures.
              16.  The use of the symbol for "approximately" is allowed by the writer's
                    guide.    Directions that prohibit use of this symbol and require the
                    use of bounded tnierances whenever possible are not included in the
                    writer's guide.
1
!                                                                                                                        !
l'                                                                                                      ___ ______________j
 
          ,_.                -          _ - _ . -
    '
              .
              .-                ..
        *s          ,
                                                                    APPENDIX D-
                                                                    NOMENCLATURE
                        : This appendix contains team observations of cases where E0P and panel
                              nomenclature differ The licensee agreed in each case to evaluate the
                            difference and make the appropriate change. These items will be reviewed during
                              a future.NRC inspection as noted in paragraph 3.c.
                            Procedure              Step /pg.  E0P Nomenclature      Component Nomenclature
                              EP/1/A/5000/1A          5.a.7    "S/V BEFORE SEAT      "S/V BEFORE SEAT DR"
                                                                DRN CLOSE"            "C LOS E''
                              EP/1/A/5000/1A          11.2      VCT                    FWST
                              EP/1/A/5000/1B          29/25    1-RF457                1-RF457B
                              EP/1/A/5000/1C          24/15    -1NI-178B (ND Hdr IB To ND HEADER 18 TO NC
                                                                Cold Legs A & B)      COLD LEG LOOPS C&D
                                                                                      VALVE INI-178B
                                                                INI-173 (ND Hdr IA To  ND HEADER 1A TO NC
                                                                Cold Legs C & D)      COLD LEG LOOPS A&B
                                                                                      VALVE INI-173A
                                                      4/4      INI-334B (NI Pump Suct SAFETY ING. PUMP
                                                                X-0VER From ND)        SUCT X0VER FROM
                              EP/1/A/5000/103        4        1EDE-F01F              No label
                              EP/1/A/5000/2A
                              Enclosure 1            1        1CA-185                LETTER SIZE IS SMALLER
                                                                                      THAN THE REST OF THE
                                                                                      LABELS
                        -EP/1/A/5000/2C4            3/3      1CDB-F0IC              ICDB (nc breaker
                                                                                      cubicle label)
                                                                ICDA-F08H              ICDA (no breaker
                                                                                      cubicle label)
                              EP/1/A/5000/2C5        2        IBB69                  No label
                              EP/1/A/5000/2d3        14/7      multiple "... T/V SS    ... T/V Ss RESET ...  ,
                                                                RESET"
                              AP/1/A/5500/02          C4a2 RNO STM PRESS              PRESS
                                                      D2        CF HDR PRESS          S/G INLT HDR PRESS
:)
- - _ _          _ - _ .. - -
 
                                                                                      . _ - _ _ _ ____- __ -
  .r.  ,
    yg.    .
              =
                                                                                                            1
                                                            D-2
              Procedure              ' Step /pg.  E0P Nomenclature      Component Nomenclature
              AP/1/A/5500/03              C1,2 RNO CF HDR PRESS            S/G INLT HDR PRESS
                                          D17      R-L                    RAISE-LCYER                      I
                                                                                                            I
                                          D19d      SWITCH                NOT ON THE CONTROL                j
                                                                          BOARD                            {
              AP/1/A/5500/04              2a        Temp defeat            Delta temp defeat
              AP/1/A/5500/08              II,D.1    1AD-17                1AD-7
                                          II,0.4b  Chg Hdr Flow          Chg Ln Flow
              AP/1/A/5500/13              C2 & RNO CONTROL R00 BANK        IS THE WRONG NAME FOR
                                                    LO-LO LIMIT            FOR COMPUTER POINT
                                                                          D4409
                                          C2c.      BORIC ACID XFR PMP    B/A XFER PMP
              AP/1/A/5500/17
                  Encl. 1-              b2/11    Chemical letdown ...  xNVP5531 LETDN ...
l
'
                                          13/14.    Blackout accident      B/0 SEQ activated
                                                    sequencer activated
                  Encl. 6                4/2      ISGR-D-1, -3          Does not exist
1
                                          4RN0/2    ISGR-D-2, -4          Does not exist
                  Encl. 7                4/3      Containment pressure  Applicable meters have
                                                                          inst. ids and noun;
                                                                          latter do not include
                                                                          any ref. to containment
                                                                          pressure.
i            AP/1/A/5500/25              3e/1      Refueling bridge      Reactor b1dg refueling
                                          3b/1      reactor bldg ...      bridge
                                          &
                                          cl/2
                                          d1/3      vp trn a upr cent vlvs ... pushbutton ...
                                                    enable switch ...
l                                                  'vp trn b upr cont vlvs ... pushbutton ...
!                                                  enable switch
l
l
1
!
L__    _ ___ = -  _      - - - - _
 
  ..      _.    _ _ .    . _ _  -        -        __
                                                            _ _ _ - _ _ _  _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
..
          *
        ..      ..                                                                                                                                ,
      *u      ..
                                                        D-3
                Procedure.      Step /pg.    E0P Nomenclature          Component Nomenclature
                AP/1/A/5500/26      b/1      IEMF-15 refueling          spent fuel bldg
                                              bridge spent fuel bldg    refueling bridge ...
                AP/1/A/5500/26      d1/3      vp trn a upr ... cont      ... P/B ...
                                              vivs enable switch        ... block ...
                                              "close"
                                              ... lwr cont vivs switch ... key switch ...
                                              "close"                    . . . b1 k cl sd . . .
                                                .. vp tr a enable        ... keyswitch ...
                                              pushbutton "close"        ... block ...
                                              vp tr b upr cont vivs      ... P/B ...
                                              enable switch "close"      ... block ...
                                              vp tr b lwr cont enable    ... key switch ...
                                              switch "close"            ... bik cisd ...
                OP/1/A/6450/10      2/3      -1ELCP0025                  IELCP0251
e__________-____--
 
  _      __ .
                          -
1
                a
                . . .  ,
        sl            9
h                                                                APPENDIX E
l                                                        LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
1
                            AC            Alternating current
                            AER            Actions / expected response
                            A0            Auxiliary operator
                            A0P            Abnormal operating procedure
                            AP            Administrative procedure
                            ASP            Auxiliary Shutdown Panel
                            CA            Auxiliary Feedwater System
                            CFR            Code of Federal Regulations.
                            CLA            Cold leg accumulator
                            CMD'          Construction and modifications division
                            CN            Catawba Nuclear
                            CNS            Catawba Nuclear Station
                            CNSD          Catawba Nuclear Station Directive
                            CSF            Critical Safety Function
                            CST            Condensate Storage Tank
                            DPCPDPR        Duke Power Company Procedure Discrepancy Process Record
                            D/G            Uiesel generator
                            DHP            Dynamic head pressure
                            D/P.          Differential pressure
                            DRS            Division of Reactor Safety
                            ECA            Emergency contingency action
                            ECCS          Emergency Core Cooling System
                            E0P            Emergency operating procedure
l                          EPIP          Emergency plan implementing procedures
                            EPRI          Electric Power Research Institute
                            ERG            Westinghouse emergency response guidelines
                            ESF            Engineering Safety Features
                            ETQS          Employee training and qualification system
                            FSAR          Final Safety Analysis Report
                            FWST          Fueling Water Storage Tank
                            GPM            Gallons per minute
                            GTG            Generic technical guidelines
                            HP            Health physics
                            IAE            Instrument and electrical
                            IEEE          Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
                            IEN            Inspection and Enforcement Notice
                            IFI            Inspector Follow-up Item
                            IN            Information Notice
                            INPO          Institute for Nuclear Power Operations
                            KC            Component Cooling Water System
                            KF            Spent Fuel Coeling System
                            LCO            Limiting Condition for Operation
                            LER            Licensee Event Aeport
                            LOCA          Loss of Coolant Accident
                            MOD            Motor operated disconnects
                            MSIV          Main steam isolation valve
                            MWR            Maintenance Work Request
                                                                                                                              !
.
.  _ .              -          . _ _ _ _    _. . _ - _    =- .          _ - _ _ - _____ -___--_-_-_._____ _ ___ ___- - - - _
 
          - _ ,                                                  -
    '
      .,
      a[s                                                                          A'
                '
              'e
          .
                                                                                                                                                                                                      E-2:
  ,
                                                                                      NE0                                                                                        Nuclear equipment operator
                                                                                      NI                                                                                          Nuclear Instruments
                                                                                      NRC                                                                                        Nuclear Regulatory Commission
                                                                                      NS                                                                                        . Containment Spray System
                                                                                      NSM_                                                                                        Nuclear Station Modification
                                                                                        NSMM'                                                                                      Nuclear Station Modification Manual
                                                                                        NUREG                                                                                      Nuclear Regulatory Commission
                                                                                        NV                                                                                          Chemical Volume and Control System
                                                                                      OAC                                                                                        Operator aid computer
                                                                                      OP                                                                                          Operating procedure
<                                                                                      0STI                                                                                        Operational Safety Team Inspection
                                                                                        PGP                                                                                        Procedure generation package
                                                                                        PIR                                                                                        Problem Identification Report
                                                                                        PM                                                                                          Preventative maintenance
                                                                                        PORV.                                                                                      Power operated relief valve
                                                                                        PPM                                                                                        Parts per millfon
                                                                                        PRT                                                                                        Pressurizer relief tank
                                                                                        PSIG                                                                                      Pounds per square itich gage
                                                                                        PSTG                                                                                        Plant specific technical guidelines
                                                                                        PT                                                                                        Performance test
                                                                                        PWR                                                                                        Pressurized Water Reactor
                                                                                        PZR                                                                                        Pressurizer
                                                                                        QA                                                                                          Quality assurance
                                                                                        RCS                                                                                        Reactor Coolant System
                                                                                        RN                                                                                        Nuclear Service Water System
                                                                                        RNO                                                                                        Response not obtained
                                                                                        R0                                                                                        Reactor operator
                                                                                        R&R                                                                                        Removal and restoration
                                                                                        SALP                                                                                      Systematic Assessment of Licensee Performance
                                                                                        SER                                                                                        Safety evaluation report
                                                                                        S/G                                                                                        Steam generator
                                                                                        S/G TR                                                                                    Steam generator tube rupture
                                                                                        S/I                                                                                        Safety injection
                                                                                        SME                                                                                        Safe Margin Earthquake
                                                                                        SNSWP                                                                                      Station Nuclear Service Water Pond
                                                                                          SPD                                                                                    .Setpoint document
                                                                                        SRO                                                                                        Senior reactor operator
                                                                                        SS                                                                                        Shift supervisor
                                                                                        SSE                                                                                        Safe Shutdown Earthquake
                                                                                        SSF                                                                                        Safe shutdown facility
                                                                                          SWR                                                                                      Standing work request
                                                                                        TS                                                                                        Technical Specifications
                                                                                        TSM                                                                                        Temporary Station Modification
                                                                                        UST                                                                                        Upper Storage Tank
                                                                                        VAC                                                                                        Volts alternating current
                                                                                        VCT                                                                                        Volume Control Tank
                                                                                        V&V                                                                                        Validation and verification
                                                                                        WR                                                                                          Work request
-                _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ - - _ _ _ _ - - ___-_ ___-- _____ ________ _-__ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ .
}}

Latest revision as of 19:56, 31 January 2022

Insp Repts 50-413/89-09 & 50-414/89-09 on 890410-0505. Violations Noted.Major Areas Inspected:Various Plant Groups Including Operations,Maint,Qa,Engineering & Training in Support of Safe Plant Operations
ML20246P732
Person / Time
Site: Catawba  Duke Energy icon.png
Issue date: 07/10/1989
From: Russell Gibbs, Lawyer L
NRC OFFICE OF INSPECTION & ENFORCEMENT (IE REGION II)
To:
Shared Package
ML20246P695 List:
References
50-413-89-09, 50-413-89-9, 50-414-89-09, 50-414-89-9, NUDOCS 8907200297
Download: ML20246P732 (86)


See also: IR 05000413/1989009

Text

-- - ... - - - - _.- . _ _ . - _ _ -- --

4J yg Miho UNITED STATES

  • J. J- 'o - NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION

_ g* J ' ' ' .- '* W : ggagou gg

101 MARtETTA STREET,N.W,'

h

  • e' ATLANTA, oEORGI A 30323

%y

- *** +

[

L . Report Nos.: 50-413/89-09:and 50-414/89-09

' Licensee: Duke Power Company

422 South Church Street-

i. Charlotte, NC.28242

Docket No.: 50-413 and 50-414 License Nos.: NPF-35 and NPF-52

Facility Name: Catawb'a 1 and 2

Inspection Conducted: April 10-May 5,1989, Exit Conducted: May 16, 1989.

4

Inspectors- [

p . Mbbs;. Team Leader

R

Yl, 7 i ti rd)

Datp'Sitned

, ifh -'

M . Lawyer, Team Leader (EOPs)

W)v tn Yi

Datp S t'gned

Team Members- R. Bernhard

G. Bryan, Jr.

M. Ernstes

G. Maxwel'

R. Musser

S. Ninh

C. Pau',k'

G. Cn yers.

R. Schin

A. Sutthoff

Accompanying Personnel: Arie de Joode, Ministry of Social Affairs

_ d7Em ment, Nuclear Department, The

eth nds.

/

Approved by: '

- dm/ /0,/9 W

W P."Kellogg, Chief .-

/ . /Date 'Signec

Operational Programs 4 tion

Operations Branch

Division of Reactor Safety

. SUMMARY

Scope: This was a special announced Operational Safety Team Inspection

(OSTI). The OSTI evaluated the licensee's current level of perform-

ance in the area of plant operations. The inspection included an

evaluation .of the effectiveness of various plant groups including

Operations, Maintenance, Quality Assurance, Engineering, and Training

in support of safe plant operations. Plant management's awareness

of, involvement in, and support of safe plant operation were also

evaluated.

8907200297 890710

PDR .ADOCK 05000413 PDC

g y

_- . . __ _ _ - __- _ _ _ - - _ _ _ .___ __

_-__

f

II*'

g #

s

2'

.

i

The inspection.was divided into three major areas including Opera-

tions, Support of Operations, ' and Emergency Operating Procedures.

The. team placed emphasis on interviews -of ' personnel at all levels,

observations of plant' activities and meetings, extensive . control room

observations, and system walkdowns. The team also reviewed plant

deviation' reports, LERs for the. current SAlp evaluation period, and'

evaluated the effectiveness of the licensee's root cause identifica-

tion; short term and programmatic corrective actions, and repttitive ~

failure. trending and related corrective actions.

Results: The 'overall assessment concluded that the site is well-managed. The

Emergency 0perating Procedures were determined to adequately cover the

broad range of- accidents and equipment failures necessary. for safe

shutdown of the plant. Only minor problems were found by the team. A

. summary of the weak areas and strong areas observed by the. team are as

follows:

Weaknesses:

-

Management used verbal instructions to modify safety related proce-

dures for cold leg accumulators instead of . issuing a comprehensive

written procedure. (paragraph 2.a.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-02)

-

Controis on-the thermal power computer and its inputs are weak. This

computer' is used for normal determination of plant power level and

for. adjusting the gain on the nuclear instruments. (paragraph 2.b.)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-03)

i-

-

0ne '10 CFR 50.59 evaluation was weak concerning a modification to

the nuclear service water pit strainer instrumentation. Annuncia-

tors' described in the FSAR were disabled for about 30 days with no

written . consideration of compensatory action. (paragraph 2.c.)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-04)

--

.Many of the site's safety related pump rooms are contaminated, which'

l inhibits operator and management surveillance. (paragraph 2.e.)'

(IFI 413,414/89-09-05)

-

Auxiliary operators on rounds failed to frisk immediately after

exiting contaminated areas. (paragraph 2.e.) (VIO 413,414/89-09-01)

-

Control of doors was weak, as indicated by the three open fire or

security doors found by the team. (paragraph 2.g.)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-06)

-

In the Independent Verification and Safety Tag procedures, three I

items for potential improvement are identified. (paragraph 2.1.)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-07)

-

Valve 1-KC-9 (component cooling water pump 1A2 dischars e valve) which

is required to be locked by site procedures was found not locked

during system walkdown. (paragraph 2.k.) (VIO 413,414/89-09-01)

l . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _

_ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ __ _ _ _ . _.

. _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . - _ - _ -

.

I 1S

..- ,

3

l

-

Several deficiencies were noted during observation of a performance

test on one of the containment spray pumps. (paragraph 2.m.)-

(IFI 413,414/89-09-08)

-

Scaffolding procedures do not address seismic considerations and

resultant inoperability of safety equipment. (paragraph 2.r.)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-09)

-

I&E maintenance does not use portable equipment to facilitate timely

locating of de ground faults. (paragraph 2.s.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-10)

-

There are many significant deviations between the E0Ps and the PSTGs

(Plant Specific Technical Guidelines) where there should be none.

This is primarily due to changes being made in the E0Ps before being

made in the guidance document (PSTG). (paragraph 3 and Appendix B)

(IFI 413,414,/89-09-11)

-

There are many technical and human factors discrepancies that were

identif:ed in the E0Ps. Each one is listed. (paragraph 3.b. and

Appendix B) (IFI 413,414/89-09-12)

-

Many labeling discrepancies between E0Ps and panel indication were

identified. Each one is listed. (paragraph 3.c. and Appendix D)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-13)

-

There is a discrepancy between the E0Ps and the S/G pressure meter

in the control room. (paragraph 3.c.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-14)

-

Many writer's guide discrepancies were identified in the E0Ps. Each

one is listed. (paragraph 3.c. and Appendix C) (IFI 413,414/89-09-15)

-

Noise level in the control room during auto-start of both ventila-

tion trains during S/I response is excessive. (paragraph 3.c)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-16)

-

Deficiencies were identified in simulator effectiveness in training

on E0Ps (paragraph 3.d) (IFI 413,414/89-09-17)

-

There were weaknesses noted in the site's ETQS program. (paragraph

4.a.) (IFI 413,414/89-09-18)

-

There are approximately 131 temporary modifications in effect on

site. Some date back as far as 3 or 4 years. (paragraph 4.c.)

(IFI 413,414/89-09-19)

-

The separate reporting authority and duplication of support functions I

for the Transmission Group is considered a weakness. (paragraph 4.j.) l

(IFI 413,414/89-09-20) l

!

l

l

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -

_. ._.

__ _

. _ _ _ __ ___ __ _ _ _ . _ _ -

.

.

i

g

%: '

~.., c ..

  • h >.

'

4

.

, Strengths:

--

Shift turnovers were efficient and effective.- (paragraph 2.d.)-

-

Centrol' room decorum was good, with orderly appearance and proper

' beha vi o r.' (paragraph 2.d.)

-

.0perators displayed a professional attitude toward their responsibi-

11 ties. (paragraph 2.d.)

-

Operator control of access to the control room was good. (paragraph

2.d.)

-

. Housekeeping in general was very good, but there were. some excep-

tions. (paragraphs 2.e. and 2.h.)

-

Inside ' and outside auxiliary operator rounds were very thorough.

(paragraphs 2.e. and 2.h.)

-

Labeling overall ' was very good, with the exceptions of ' auxiliary

building doors and instrument root valves. (paragraphs 2.e., 2.j.,

and 2,k.)

i:

-

On theiriown intitiative, the licensee is upgrading the seismic-

l safety margin of. the diesel generator batteries. (paragraph 2.f.)'

-

There was good feedback from site personnel on management involvement

f <

in solving. problems. (paragraph 4.a 4.e and 4.k)

-

Operations has a daily input into the MWR backlog for prioritizing

work items. (paragraph 4.g)-

-

-The planners inspection of the worksite prior to initiation of the

MWR package is considered a strength. (paragraph 4 h). .

.

Rotation of .,ork shifts together provides for a smoother flow of

work. (paragraph 4.h)

"

-

The practice of. working items by train or division in a weekly

rotation helps limit problems of having 2 trains inoperable at the

same time. (paragraph 4.h)

-

Plant meetings were brief, to the point, and provided adequate plant

status to involved management personnel. (paragraph 4.1)

-

The new 10 CFR 50.59 training for site personnel is thorough and

meaningful. (paragraph 4.1)

l

e

. . - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ -- -

_ _ - _ _ _ - . _ _ - -- _ _ - _ _ . _ _ - . _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -

'

.

.- .

Sk a

5

- '

Changes to the Catawba Critical Safety Function integrity tree are

considered to be significant enhancements which are supported by

valid deviations from the ERG. Catawba treatment of the coolant

integrity tree ' was excellent, particularly with ' respect to cold

overpressure protection. (Appendix B)

_ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

- _ _ _ _ _ _ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ - - . .- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ __- --_-_-

V .. .

a s 2

?A' .s

REPORT DETAILS ~

,

l

1. Persons. Contacted

Licensee employees

K. Alcorn, Reactor Operator

J. Barbour, QA Director Operations

H. Barron, Superintendent Operations

W. Barron, Director of Operations Training

T. Beadle, Procedures Engineer-

',

W. Bradly, QA Verification Manager

. R. Casler, Shift Operations Manager

  • - J. Cox, Production Support

T. Crawford, Superintendent Intergrated Scheduling

M. Criminger, QA Verification Specialist II

R. Edmund, Reactor Operator

p J. Effinger, QA' Verification Specialist II- Audit

J. Frye, QA Verification Manager -Audit

R. Gill, Corporate Compliance Manager-

J. Glen, Production Engineer

M. Glover, Compliance Manager

C. Graves, Operations,~ General Office

T. Harrall, Sr. Project Engineer, Design Engineering

D. Jenkins,' Design Engineer

R. Kimray, Senior Instructor

V. King, Production Engineer

J. Knuti, Operations Support Manager

M. Lee, Nuclear Control Operator

P.. LeRoy, Compliance, General Office

W. McCollum, Superintendent Maintenance

K. Munk, Reactor Operator

C. ' O' Dell, Shift Supervisor

T. 0 wen, Station Manager  ;

G. Rhyne, Nuclear Equipment Operator

M. Sanders, Nuclear Equipment Operator

L. Saunders, Reactor Operator

K. Seasely, Procedures Engineer

G. Swindlehurst, Engineering Supervisor

-D. Thompson, Senior Reactor Operator

G.'Winkel, Simulator Instructor

Other Licensee employees contacted included instructors, engineers,

mechanics, technicians, operators, and office personnel.

NRC Representatives

E. Merschoff, Deputy Director, DRS, Region II

W. Orders, Senior Resident Inspector

M. Lesser, Resident Inspector

B. Bonser, Project Engineer, Region II

-

_---_u_oxa-_-----___a--____ _ - _ _ , _ __ _ _ . _ _ - - . _ _ - _ - - - - - -

_ - _ _ _ - _ - -

4

, .

< ,

2

l

NRR Representative

  • K. Jabbour, Project Manager
  • Attended exit interview

Acronyms used throughout this report are listed in Appendix E.

' 2. Operations (41400, 41707, 61700, 71707, 93802)

Many of the positive attributes of operational safety can be directly

observed in the control room. These attributes include such things as

adequate shift manning, delegation of Shift Supervisor (SS) non safety

related duties, Reactor Operator (RO) and Senior Reactor Operator (SRO)

system knowledge, relief turnover procedures, etc. Adequate shift

manning assures: qualified plant personnel to man the operational

shifts are readily available and that excessive overtime need not be

utilized; delegation of nonsafety-related duties assures the SS attention

to the command function will not be diverted to nonsafety-related duties;

and accurate diagnosis and response to plant transients, minor and major,

require detailed operator systems knowledge, etc.

Other operational safety attributes can be better assessed through plant

tours and system walkdowns. These include material condition; conformance

to approved procedures; attentiveness to duties; and return to service of

. equipment important to safety, including correct system alignments.

Finally, interviews with personnel holding a variety of positions on the

plant staff together with some review of records is necessary to provide

indirect indicators of operational safety and to corroborate preliminary

assessments.

To assess the operational safety of the facility, the team performed

extended observations of control room activities, including back shifts,

with the units in modes 1, 5, and 6. Also, the team conducted system

walkdowns and plant tours. In addition, they interviewed operators during

these observations, walkdowns, and tours, observed shift turnovers, and

reviewed operator logs. The team also reviewed records used for indica-

tion or control of plant status for adequacy and verified operator aware-

ness of their contents. These included the LCO Log, configuration contisi

records, Danger Tag Log, and Increased Surveillance Log.

Tha team monitored operator performance, control room decorum, awareness

of plant status, response to alarms, and use of procedures. The team

conducted interviews or plant tours with the Operations Superintendent,

System Engineers, and operators. The team also reviewed engineering

evaluations, training, and maintenance as related to questions that arose

from observations in the plant.

.

- _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ -

, _ __

_ . _ - _ _ . _ - - _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -_ _ _-_-

-

-. .

'. . . ,

s: .

i-

3

.i

'

' a.. Cold Leg Accumulators

When the team first entered the control room at about- 9:00 a.m. ,

'

on April 11, Unit I was at 100%, power and .was in two TS LCO action

statements for cold leg accumulator A:

(1) Boron concentration was below the required range, a 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />

action statement, and

- (2) Level was below the required range, a one hour action statement.

The operators were in the process of partially draining the "A"

cold leg accumulator and then refilling it from the FWST to restore-

boron concentration to the required range. They were performing the

evolution for the second time that day. The first drain' and fill

evolution had been initiated in response to boron concentration

decreasing to 1918 ppm, just above the minimum TS requirement 'of

1900 ppm. After the first drain and. fill, sampling had. indicated

that boron concentration in the "A" accumulator had decreased to 1848

ppm. This reduction in boron had occurred in spite of the fact that

refilling was done from the FWST, which contained a boron concentra-

tion of 2026 ppm. The team asked the operators to explain why the.

. boron ' concentration went down after the first drain and fill. They

- had a theory based.on stratification in the accumulator, coupled with

inleakage from the RCS through or bypassing the check valves and

entering the bottom of the accumulator, then the draining from the

bottom followed by filling near the top, and finally sampling from

the bottom. The operators were able to use system piping diagrams

- to show this theory to the team and .to demonstrate a good level of

knowledge of the . systems. They were also able to explain why they

believed the 1918,1848, and 2026 ppm' ample results were reliable

numbers.

The licensee had entered the accumulator "A" level TS action state-

ment at 7:08 AM. This action statement required that level be

restored to the specified range within one hour or be in hot standby

within the next six hours and in hot shutdown within the following

six hours. The team asked the operators about their plans for

restoring level to within the TS specified range, and how they were

complying with the requirement to be in hot standby withii, the next

six hours. The operators stated that they planned to have level

restored by about 10:00 AM, which would leave them about four hours

in which to shut down the unit to hot standby in the unlikely event

that unforeseen problems prevented the restoration of level. They

stated that a normal shutdown to hot standby would take about three

to four hours. The operators understood that the intention of the

action statement was not to allow seven hours to restore level, but

instead to require a shutdown to be started in time to allow a

normal shutdown to hot standby to be conducted and completed prior

to the one hour plus six hour time limit.

.

_____._____m_ _ _ _ _ . ____m .___.m_ _ . _ _ _

__-_____ _ __ - - - .

..

.

. ..

_

.

r a

4

i

7

The team reviewed procedures that were in use for the drain and j

fill evolution to increase boron concentration. Operators -were

'

using OP/1/A/6200/09, Cold leg- Accumulator Operation, Change 26. .

Draining was done per Enclosure .4.5, Decreasing Accumulator. Level, l

and filling was done per Enclosure 4.4, Increasing Accumulator

level. The operators stated that there was no overall procedure for

increasing boron concentration. The operators had given themselves

about three hours to restore level, and based or, that had decided

they could drain for about two and one- half hours. With the FWST

boron concentration at 2026 ppm and not greatly more than the boron

concentration in the accumulator, they would need to maximize the

amount of liquid exchanged to effectively increase boron concentra-

tion in the accumulator. A major consideration'was that a substan-

tial portion of the piping used for draining was also used for

filling. Thus some of the same liquid that was drained would be

added back during filling. After draining for about one hour and 20

minutes, the accumulator level dropped below the indicating range.

The operators then drained for an equal amount of-time, with no level

indication. By using a chart showing accumulator levels, gallons in

the accumulator, and level indicating range, the operators were able

to estimate the total quantity that they would be draining and the

quantity of liquid remaining in the accumulator. The accumulator

was on line during this evolution, with its isolation valve open and

power removed. The team noted that the written procedure in use did

not address being out of the level indicating range. It also did

not address time constraints of being in a TS action statement. The

procedure' simply stated: "Open the corresponding valve to decrease

level in the desired accumulator", then "When the accumulator is at

the desired level, close the corresponding valve."

The team questioned whether the evolution being conducted had

received appropriate management review and approval. The Operations

Superintendent stated that verbal review and approval had been done,

by the same management people who were authorized to give written-

approval for procedure changes or new procedures. Still, the team

considered that a written procedure covering the entire evolution of

increasing boron concentration in an accumulator would have been

more appropriate. The team considered management's use of verbal

instructions to modify written safety related procedures, including

draining below the level indicating range and related cautions, as

an area of weakness.

The team noted tha". the first step of the " Decreasing Accumulator

Level" enclosure states: " Review the Limits and Precautions." Under

limits and precautions, located in front of the procedure for cold

leg accumulator operation, step 2.7 states: "Do not use Enclosure

4.5 (Decreasing Accumulator Level) for draining an accumulator beyond

the limits of provided level instrumentation." However, this step

had been lined out by hand and deleted by Change 26 to the procedure,

which was dated April 10, 1989. The team reviewed Change 26 and its

10 CFR 50.59 safety evaluation. The forms were complete and the

-. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ._ __________ _ _ _ _______- - -__ ____- _______-

. . .. .. .. .. - . . ,. ---- -

1

... . .

-

4 .

5

required preparation, review, and approval signatures were :all

present, and all were' dated April 10, 1989. The safety evaluation

. stated that the purpose of the precaution that was being deleted was

to prevent over pressurization of the FWST with nitrogen. It stated

that further evaluation has determined _this precaution to be unneces-

sary,' based on the small size of the drain line to'the FWST and the

much larger size of the vents on the FWST. The team then reviewed

the Justification Document for this procedure, which lists reasons,

restrictions, and commitments associated with each step of the

procedure. .The Justification Document stated that the reason for

step 2.7 was to prevent over pressurization of the FWST with nitrogen

if draining below the fill connection. It further stated that the level

instrument only covers the top 13 inches of the tank, and 'the fill

connection is midway up on the tank. Overall, the team identified

no deficiencies with the records for Change 26.

The operators restored the accumulator level to the TS required range

by about 10:30 AM, and by about 11:30 sampling results showed the

new boron concentration to be 1925 ppm. Overall on this day, the

licensee had operated the unit in a.one hour TS action statement

for a total of over six hours to gain a net increase-in boron con-

. centration of 7 ppm (from 1918 to 1925). The team judged that the

licensee would need to increase boron concentration again in the i

near -future,: and asked the licensee if there might not be a better l

way'to do it. The team suggested checking with a " sister plant",  !

McGuire. lThe licensee found that McGuire had a written procedure

for increasing boron concentration in a cold leg accumulator that

did not require entering any TS action statements or going below the

level indicating range. The licensee then wrote their own similar

procedure, and used it successfully during the second week of this i

inspection.

The team subsequently reviewed the results of the licensee's previous

leak rate testing of the Unit I cold leg accumulator check valves,

and identified no deficiencies with them. The team also looked at

the current quantity of " unidentified leakage" from the reactor

coolant system, and identified no problems with it.

All concerns relating to accumulator boron concentration discussed

in the preceeding paragraphs were followed up under IFI 50-413,

414/89-09-02 during this inspection. This IFI is closed.

b. Thermal Power Computer

After the "A" co'd leg accumulator was restored to operable, the

team noted that the unit one computer screen indicated that total

power from each of the four nuclear instrument channels was about

100.5 percent. At the same time, each upper detector indicated

about 104 percent and each lower detector indicated about 103

! percent. Thermal power of the unit was indicated to be about 99.8

percent. The team asked the operators to explain what was the

.

E .

...

.

.3 ..

e i

n [-

6

I maximum allowed power _ for.the unit and how'it was controlled. The

operators stated that maximum allowed power was 3411 megawatts .

thermal, as ' stated in the operating license. They were instructed

by management .to -implement this by maintaining eight hour average

power at 100 percent or less, as indicated by .the thermal power

computer.

The operators showed the team a station technical specification

interpretation, which stated the eight hour average thermal power

limit. It also gave short term limits on being above= 100 percent

thermal power, up to.a maximum of 102 percent for 15 minutes. The

operators stated . that the thermal power computer continuously

calculated average' power for the previous eight hours. .They used.

the thermal' power computer for normal steady state operation of the

unit, but they were also to keep each power range NI total power

reading within two percent of the current thermal power number. The

computer was programmed to give an alarm whenever there was a two

percent difference between the computed thermal power and a power

range NI. A daily check of power range NIs versus the_ thermal power.

was done, and~if this check or an alarm indicated more that a two

. percent difference, then the gain of the. NI would be adjusted in

accordance with' station procedures. One thermal power computer

generates one thermal power number, using inputs from many secondary

plant instruments. ,The . team asked the operators about the possi-

bility of all NIs being adjusted in a nonconservative. direction

based on a thermal power number 'that was erroneous because one of ;

its inputs had gone bad without being detected. -The operators

stated that this was possible and in fact had' happened just last

year. They saia the situation had been detected when an operator

realized that the unit was generating substantially more megawatts

than ever before. An LER had been written on this event.

The team reviewed the licensee's controls on the thermal power

computer and its inputs with a system' engineer independent of the

previous LER. As a result of this review, the licensee stated that

two changes would be made to improve the controls on the thermal

power computer:

(1) Periodic calibration testing of the unit 1 thermal power

computer inputs will be added to the Computerized Periodic

Test Program, to provide formal scheduling control. This had

previously been done manually on an informal basis for Unit 1.

The Unit 2 thermal power computer inputs had been in the

Computerized Periodic Test Program.

(2) Out of calibration notification forms will be sent fr.om the

instrumentation technicians to the performance system expert, j

This is important, because the performance system expert trends l

historical readings on the inputs to the thermal power computer.

These trends are used for one of the most important controls on

the thermal power computer: prior to adjusting the gain on a

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ -- - )

--_ _ - _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ . _ - _ - -

.

, ,

w ,

7

nuclear instrument, the performance system engineer checks the

values in the computer for reasonableness. This is done by

comparisons with other values in the plant, and by reviewing

historic'al trends.

Overall, the licensee's control of tF Nrmal power computer was

considered to be an area of weakness. In. ' tem will be followed up

ur. der IFI 50-413,414/89-09-03.

c. Nuclear Service Water Annunciators.

.The team reviewed all lit or disabled annunciators in the control

room. of unit I with the operators, while the unit was operating at

100% power. Only eight of the annunciators were lit or disabled,

out of a total of about 450. The team hdged that this was a

relatively small number of lit or disabled annunciators, and that

the operators were adequately knowledgeable about the conditions

indicated by each.

Two of the lit annunciators were actually lit continuously (disabled)

due to plant modification work in progress. These two, RN Pit "A"

Screen Hi D/P and RN Pit "B" Screen Hi D/P, were designed to indicate

fouling of the trash screens on the suction side of the nuclear

service water pumps. The team asked the operators what compensatory

measures were being taken while these annunciators were disabled.

The operators showed the team an Increased Surveillance Log book,

that was used to record all increased surveillance in effect. The

team found this book to be well organized and an effective operator

aid. However, it indicated that no increased surveillance was in

effect for.the nuclear service water suction pit screens.

The team looked in the FSAR and found that these annunciators were

described therein. They then asked for the 10 CFR 50.59 safety

evaluation for disabling the annunciators. The licensee had a 50.59

evaluation, which identified three instruments that would be disabled

during modification installation: the two annunciators in question

and also tne control room indicator for Standby Nuclear Service

Water Pond Level. The evaluation stated that operators would have

to use compensatory measures to monitor the level of the SNSWP to

comply with TS 3/4.7.5. The team confirmed that SNSWP level was

being monitored daily by operators, as required by the TS. This i

was done by physical inspection of a level stick in the SNSWP by an  ;

auxiliary operator, who then phoned the level information to the

control room.

The fact that operators would not have indication of differential

pressure across the screens in either pit for about 30 days was

stated in the safety evaluation. But the fact that tiie RN Pit Screen

Hi D/P annunciators were described in the FSAR was not specifically

stated, nor was there any mention of compensatory measures to be

taken while these annunciators were disabled. The licensee stated

_ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _

_. . _ _ _ - . - _ - - -.

,

(  :..

.

l

e >

8

that unwritten consideration of compensatory measures had been done, )

and that they had decided that none were needed. The team identified j

the lack of written consideration of compensatory measures as a

weakness in the 10CFR50.59 evaluation. This -item will be followed

up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-04. i

d. Shift Turnover and Control Room Decorum

The team observed two morning shif t turnovers. Operators conducted

both turnovers efficiently and effectively. Prior to turnover, the 1

off going shift assembled a thorough compilation of the scheduled

'

surveillance sheets, technical memorandums, a special interest items

list, and an inoperable equipment list. They then informed the

on-coming shift about previous and planned plant activities. The

interface and exchange of information occurred between each of the

control room operators, the auxiliary operators, and the shift

supervisors. In. addition, the shift supervisor conducted a verbal

briefing of all auxiliary operators.

During the turnover, the oncoming shift completed and signed turnover

checklists, as required by Operations Procedure 2-22, Shift Turnover,

Revision 24. During and following turnovers, several annunciator

alarms occurred. The operators promptly acknowledged these alarms

and took the appropriate corrective actions.

Throughout the team evaluation the operators displayed a professional

attitude concerning the plant equipment and their responsibilities

as operators. The onshift operations personnel appeared to be

sufficiently rested, awake, and alert to safely perform plant

manipulations. Operator control of access to the control room was

good. Control room entry gates and 'at the controls area' markings

were in place, and operators were aware of who was in the control

room. Operators were attentive to their panels. Overall control

room decorum was good. Operators maintained an orderly appearance

and proper behavior in the room.

The team noted that a number of persons in the control room (pri-

marily maintenance or performance personnel) wore hardhats while

standing over main control boards. The team discussed this practice

with operators and management, who acknowledged that it is routinely

allowed. They reviewed the potential hazard of a hard hat falling

on a control parel and causing an uncontrolled equipment actuation, ,

'

and the fact that many other plants do not allow hard hats to be

worn in the control room.

e. Plant Rounds

The team accompanied auxiliary plant operators on daily auxiliary

building rounds for units 1 and 2. The operators used Daily

Auxiliary Building Rounds sheets in the performance of the rounds.

They examined each area specified by the rounds sheet, ensuring that

_ - _ _ - _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ - _ ___ _ . _ _ _ .

,

_ - - .- _

o

E .. .

Cb *

9

each parameter was within its required range. During the rounds,

the unit 1 operator had to enter four contaminated pump rooms and

the unit 2 operator had to enter six contaminated pump rooms for the

purpose of examining equipment as required. Each of these areas

required full dress in protective clothing. The process of multiple

suiting and unsuiting was time consuming, and may be a deterrent to

operator and management surveillance of the contaminated pump rooms.

Having the large number of contaminated rooms which require routine

access for proper surveillance is considered to be an area of weak-

ness. This item will be followed up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-05.

The team observed that the operators did not frisk when exiting each

contaminated area. Portable friskers were not located at any of

the contaminated pump rooms. A few portable friskers were located

throughout the auxiliary buildino, and generally one was within about

50 to 200 feet of each contaminated pump room. However, operators

stated that they were not required to use these portable friskers,

but instead were to complete their rounds, walking throughout much

of the auxiliary building, and then use the whole body radiation

monitors. The team reviewed Station Directive 3.8.3 (T.S.), Contami-

nation Prevention, Control, and Decontamination Responsibilities,

' Revision 24. It states that exiting a contaminated area requires a

whole body frisk: "a whole body frisk shall be performed at the first

available frisker to prevent the spread of contamination." The team

reviewed this with health physics supervisors, who stated that they

had no problem with the observed practices of the operators, did not

have a problem of inadvertent spreading of contamination, and did not

intend to place more friskers in the auxiliary building. The team

also reviewed this matter with the operations superintendent, who

stated that the observed practices would be continued and the station

directive would be changed. Discussion of this item at the final exit

with plant management resulted in a commitment from the licensee to

re-review the resolution to this practice. The failure of operators

to frisk when exiting contaminated areas, as required by the station

directive, is identified as an example of violation 50-413/89-09-01.

Areas and equipment examined during the rounds were all levels of

the auxiliary building, including portions of the following systems:

containment spray, residual heat removal, high pressure injection,

safety injection, component cooling, auxiliary feedwater, ventilation

and air conditioning, eler u cal switchgear, spent fuel pool, diesel

generators, and various valve galleries. The team found labeling

to be overall very good, with the exception of doors and instrument

root valves. The operators exhibited a good " hands on" approach to

the rounds, and initiated corrective actions for a number of mino-

deficiencies that they observed. They demonstrated an adequate

knowledge of the equipment and existing conditions. Overall,

operator rounds were very thorough.

- _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ -

- _ _ _ _ _ _ _

'

t

..

. ...

.. .

10 t

i

l

-

1

The , team found that housekeeping in general was very good. The team . .

identified two areas in which an improvement could be made: the 522'

elevation in: the auxiliary building had various-items of protective

clothing on-the floor, and the 1A charging pump room contained trash.

f. Diesel Generator Batteries

During plant rounds, the team observed' that the batteries for

each of the- four emergency diesel generators did not appear to _ be

seismically mounted. ' Cell motion restraints were' lacking. ;There

.

-

were no separators between the cells and not all end cells were

braced as required by current IEEE standards. In a seismic' event,

the cells could move and' impact with each other as well as with the

steel battery rack. When questioned about this, the licensee stated

>

that these battery installations were seismically qualified, and

that they had been seismically tested.

The team reviewed the battery seismic test results and identified no

deficiencies with them. The batteries had demonstrated operability

before and af ter being shaken at a minimum directional acceleration

of 0.2 g. The testing had been done in 1984 by Southwest Research

Institute in San Antonio, Texas. The FSAR states that the Safe-

Shutdown .Ea'rthquake maximum ground acceleration for this site is

0.15 g. The' team confirmed that the battery cells and rack that

were tested were the same as those installed in the plant. The team

also found that the licensee had not committed to current IEEE

standards that require cell separators and bracing.

The licensee stated that other people had questioned the seismic

design of these battery installations, and that a modification was

scheduled to be completed next year that would upgrade the diesel

batteries by adding cell separators and bracing. This upgrading

was being done in response to an EPRI initiative called Safe Margin

Earthquake. .The SME is calculated differently than the SSE, and the

licensee stated that for this site the SME had a maximum acceleration

of 0.3 g as compared to the SSE at 0.15 g. A licensee SME review of

the site had determined that, from a seismic standpoint, the diesel

batteries were the safety equipment that was most susceptible

to failure. The licensee stated that, for the site to meet SME

standards, basically only the diesel batteries and auxiliary feed

pumps needed to be upgraded.

On further investigation, the team found that this EPRI initiative

had begun after the NRC had found that SSE calculations for another

site were inadequate. A review of the design calculations that

determined the SSE for this site to be 0.15 g of ground acceleration

was beyond the scope of this inspection and was not done. Overall

on this issue, the team evaluated the licensee's initiative toward

upgrading the seismic safety margin of the units as commendable.

-__L______-_-- _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - - - - _ _ - -- - - _ _ _ - - -_

L

.

1 . .

u .

<

11-

g. - Fire 'and: Security Doors

While touring the: plant, -the team observed that the door. to the 1A

'

diesel generator room (fire door AX-302) did not close fully or

l

latch by' itself. The team closed the door, and subsequently found

that procedure PT/0/A/4200/48, Periodic Inspection of Fire Barriers

and Related Structures, change 0 requires that fire . doors "shall

h latch in the closed position. automatica11y' (no external force

l

. applied) when released from the open position." The team promptly

reported the fact. that . door AX-302' did not close automatically to ~l

the fire ' door coordinator, who checked the door and declared it-

inoperable that same day. The team verified that an hourly fire

watch had. been initiated on the door. The team also verified that

. the door had passed its last scheduled inspecti.on. The licensee

followed established procedures with respect to this fire door, and

when a problem with the door was identified to them, they did take

prompt' corrective action.

The team'also observed two other fire doors open because they. failed

to close automatically. One was the unit I control room door (fire

door 501), which the team found wide open and with no personnel in

sight. This door 'is not only a fire door, but also is a vital

security- door. The team promptly reported the open door to the

. shift supervisor, who assisted in closing it. ,This door, which is

very heavy, had rubbed on the floor and jammed open. The team

waited for a security guard, who arrived within two minutes. The

licensee. stated that a modification was planned to install a lighter

door. The control room security door problem has been referred to

NRC security personnel for followup.

.The team subsequently observed the fire door to the IAE engineers'

office area wedged open with its doorknob, which had apparently

fallen off. IAE. personnel were notified, and they closed the door.

As a result of finding three fire or . security doors open during

'the inspection, the team concluded that the licensee's control of

doors is an area of weakness. This item will be followed up under

IFI 50-413, 414/89-09-06.

h. Outside Rounds

The team accompanied an auxiliary operator on the daily outside

rounds, which covered both units. The operator examined each area

and component as specified by the Daily Outside Rounds Sheet. In.

the nuclear service water pump house, housekeeping needed improve- i

ment. Various loose items were in that area, including a seven foot

length of three inch pipe, a ladder, a fire extinguisher, a chair,

and some wood. In the intake and pump area for the conventional low

pressure service water pumps, the operator identified a deficiency

(water inside a pump flow gauge) which he properly documented via

the discrepancy reporting system. In addition, he initiated a work

.

request and hung an orange tag as required by plant work request

i

_ _ - _ - _ - - _ - _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ - - . - - _ _ _ _ _

_ ___ __

_

. .

.,- ,

12

'

procedures. The cooling towers and their fan control rooms were

inspected, where the operator replaced a few burned out light bulbs.

The electrical switchyard was toured, with' no ' discrepancies noted.

Overall, the team considered' that the outside rounds were performed-

.iri a thorough and professional manner.

i. Configuration Control.and Independent Verification )

The team evaluated the methods utilized by.the licensee for control-

. ling the configuration of safety systems, particularly the alignment

1 of valves and breakers, to reduce the possibility of an. occurrence

which could. result in or contribute to an accident. .The evaluation

included a selective review of completed system alignment verifica-

tion checklists; system walkdowns; a review of Station Directive

4.2.2, Independent ' Verification Requirements, revision 1 and

Operations Management Procedure 1-5, Independent Verification,

revision 11; and interviews of several plant operations personnel.

The ' team also reviewed Station Directive 3.1.1, Safety Tags and

Delineation Tags, revision 21. The team identified no deficiencies

with.the operators' knowledge of independent verification. procedures

or with the completed system alignment verification checklists.

The team did identify three items for potential improvement in the  ;

1

licensee's procedures: These items will be followed up under IFI

50-413,414/89-09-07.

(-1) The procedures allow both operators who are checking and

verifying the position of a valve or breaker to go together,

and the team observed this to be the practice of the operators.

Past experiences at other sites have shown that two operators - I

together are not totally independent, as there is a tendency  ;

for' both to make the same mistake. A more effective' practice I

is for both to go separately.

(2) The procedures allow both operators to use the same remote

indicator to verify the position of a valve. This allows

iinporUnt valves, which are remotely operated from the control '

room, to be aligned for plant startup without being physically l

inspected for deficiencies. The inspection of equipment for j

significant material conditions should be included in a good 1

system alignment verification process. l

1

(3) The procedures for restoration of a system during removal of a

tagout do not address alignment or independent verification of

valves inside the tagout boundary, such as a valve on which l

maintenance was performed. Operators that were interviewed  !

stated that they were trained to list such valves on the tagout l

l

restoration checklist, even though this was not specified in

the plant procedures.

'

i

l

_ _ _ __ _________________ _ .----___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . _ _ ___ . - - - - - _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -____________a

. . . _ _ _ . . __ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . ._. - . __ __ _ - _ - _ _ _

.

- -

, . I.

13

j. System Walkdowns: AC Power and Nitrogen

The team conducted a partial walkdown for two safety related systems;

one electrical and the other mechanical / piping. The electrical

walkdown verification checked the condition and position of the

power supply breakers for portions of the unit 2 4160 and 600VAC

switchgear. The other walkdown checked the valves and piping

which supply the nitrogen to the unit 1 passive safety injection

accumulators.

The team accompanied an auxiliary operator while conducting the

electrical walkdown verification for the unit 2 4160 and 600VAC

switchgear. During the walkdown PT-2A-4350-03, Electrical Power

Source Verification Checklist, change 14 was utilized for assuring

proper breaker positions. The team compared the as found positions

of the electreal circuit breaker with the positions shown on the

checkli st. No deficiencies were identified.

While conducting the walkdown for portions of the nitrogen system

for unit 1 passive safety injection accumulators, the team refer-

enced site drawings CN-1562-1.1, Safety Injection NI, revision 6;

CN-1602-1.0, nitrogen system, revision 13; the control room completed

copy of OP-1A-6200-09, Accumulator Valve Checklist Enclosure 4.2,

retype 6; and the applicable Independent Verification Checklist

Enclosure 4.2. , retype 6. The walkdown verified valve positions

as compared to the above referenced valve checklists. Each valve

was found to have attached valve identification tags which clearly

identified the appropriate valve number. All pipe caps were

installed as shown on site drawings. The team did not identify any

unsatisfactory conditions while conducting these walkdowns.

k. System Walkdown: Component Cooling Water

The team also performed a partial walkdown of the unit 1 component

cooling water system with the assistance of the system engineer.

The system operating procedure OP/1/A/6400/05, Component Cooling

Water, change 45, and system flow diagrams CN-1573-1.0, Rev. 16

and CN-1573-1,1, rev. 11, were utilized by the team during the

walkdown. The majority of the walkdown was conducted in the

Auxiliary Building on levels 560' and 577' . The team traced out

various portions of the system checking for proper labeling of

components, material condition of the system, proper labeling of

components compared to procedural requirements, and the status of

locked valves.

The team observed system valve and component labeling to be good.

All valves and components examined were labeled with large black

tags with white letters that were readily readable from a distance

and allowed for easy identification of equipment. The team con-

sidered the overall material condition to be adequate. The only

- - _ _

- _ _ - .

.

. . .

. .

14

discrepancies noted were a few slightly leaking valves which had

been previously identified by the licensee. These valves were

tagged with the licensee's orange deficiency ID tags' and had cable

funnels installed beneath them.

The team verified that all valves observed during the walkdown were j

in the correct position as required by the operating procedure, t

However, valve 1KC-9, the component cooling pump 1A2 discharge

valve, was found open in lieu of locked open as required by the

system operating procedure and system flow diagram. The valve was

.not locked open due to the chained handwheel being separated from

the valve stem. The licensee has been previously issued notices of

violation for failure to lock other valves: Violation 414/86-18-01

dated June 3, 1986 and Violation 413/87-30-03 dated October 14, 1987. I.

This valve not being locked as required is identified as an example g

of Violation 50-413/89-09-01.

After the licensee had re-attached the 1KC-9 handwheel, the team

checked all of the unit 1 and 2 component cooling pump suction and

discharge valves. During this walkdown, the team noted that the

handwheels on unit I valves IKC-4,1KC-9, IKC-7 and 1KC-10 were not

fully seated on the valve stems. The team also found that all of

the unit 2 pump suction and discharge valve handwheels were more

positively attached with a stem bolt and washer, while none of the

unit I valve handwheels were attached in this manner. This may have

contributed to the valve problem noted. (These valves are IKC-4,

IKC-6, 1KC-7, 1KC-9, 1KC-10, 1KC-12, 1KC-13, AND 1KC-15). The final

item identified by the team during the walkdown was that the valve

positions of valves IKC-16 and 1KC-17 could not be determined without

the use of an extension mirror due to the close proximity of the

valves to a wall . The team did not note any such implement in the

area of the valves. - -

1

1. Auxiliary Feedwater Surveillance

On April 12, the team observed the performance of portions of the 1B

Auxiliary Feed (CA) Pump Surveillance in accordance with procedure

PT/1/A/4250/06, Enclosure 13.4, CA Pump Head and Valve Verification,

change 28. The team accompanied a licensed operator and auxiliary

plant operator for the local performance of the surveillance. The

purpose of the surveillance was to ensure that the auxiliary feed-

l water pump head and flow were within the technical specification

'

allowable limits. During the accomplishment of the test, the opera-

l tors followed the written instructions specified in the procedure.

At the completion of each step requiring a sign-off, work was stopped

and the operators made the required signatures. The operators kept -

control room personnel well aware of the status of the test and

informed them of any problems as they were encountered.

,

e

.

. _ . -_ - - - .- __- _ - - _

.

. _

a 7 .s

, ..
s- .. ,

15-

1 The- results of7 the surveillance (as observed by the. team)' were

unsatisfactory. The requirement that the . pump achieve - an dynamic

head ~ pressure -(DHP) (DHP = pump discharge . pressureminus pump

.

- suction. pressure) of.1521 psig was not' satisfied. . Calculations

revealed.the result'to be approximately 1507 psig. At this time, the

licensee had already entered a 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> T.S. - Action . Statement due to

removal of, the pump from service for t? sting.

The following day, the team inquired about the operability status of

the' 18 auxiliary feedwater pump. The team was informed that the pump-

had passed its operability run and had subsequently been declared ~

. operable by-the licensee. The team reviewed the surveillance records'.

This data was accompanied by a Duke Power Company, Procedure Discrepancies-

Process Record (DPCPDPR) which recognized the discrepancy'. The problem

resolution as'specified on the DPCPDPR and an accompanying calculation

on enclosure 13.4' of procedure PT/1/A/4250/13B was to ' compensate for'-

-the temperature difference in the suction source for the pump (the UST).

The UST temperature had been found to be approximately 140 degrees F,

which was higher.than the tank's normal temperature of 90 degrees F.

Additionally,. .the licensee had determined . that the temperature

difference in the UST had been caused by failure of a steam regulator

in' the steam supply for the tank. This regulator was subsequently

-

repaired /r9placed by the licensee.

On May 1, the team observed the performance of the 1A auxiliary feed-

water pump surveillance in accordance with procedure PT/1/A/4250/06,

Enclosure'13.3, CA Pump Head and Valve Verification, change 29. The

team observed the local performance of the test by .two auxiliary-

operators. -The test was performed as specified by the procedure,- i

and'the results were satisfactory.

m.' Test Observation

The team observed performance of the INS-1B pump performance test,

PT/1/A/4200/04C, Change 0 to 27 incorporated, dated 4/30/86. Review

of the procedure and observation of the PT resulted in the following.

comments (Note: The pump satisfactorily past the performance PT): {

1. Section 2.0, References, should include the KF drawing showing

the location of 1KF101B, which is listed on Enclosure 13.5,

Valve Checklist.

2. Step 6.8 refers to minimum and maximum flows for pump operation.  !

Step 12.8 and step 12.10 start the pump and throttle flow. No j

cautions or warnings are included immediately prior to these

steps to reinforce the limits of pump operation. During the

performance of the PT, the pump was run below the minimum flow

i

value until the throttle valve could be properly adjusted.

I Starting the pump with the throttie valve set to allow minimum

flow could possibly eliminate this problem.

L

I

.

i

_ _ - _ _ - _ _ -

.

. .

. ,

16

3. The required values in the procedure have many times the

accuracy indicated in their significant figures than can be

obtained through the measurement instrumentation used. For

example, step 12.10 states, ".. . obtain a flow of 620.3 gpm

(613.8 to 626.7 gpm) by observing INSPG5120. . ." . The flow

instrument is a 0 to 700 gpm Barton with 10 gpm divisions.

Readings are possible to the nearest 5 gpm, if the needle is

stable. The instrumentation used in the test were subject tc

considerable bounce.

4. Communications between the remote location of the throttle

valve and the meter that reads the flow was difficult during

performance of the PT. One person reading the flow gauge

walked about 40 feet to a location that could be seen by

another technician in a doorway. This person then walked to a

position that could be seen by the operator manipulating the

throttle valve. The operator changed the valve position, and

the process started again, until the proper flow was indicated.

Improved communications should be worked out.

5. In the pump room, instrument number 1NSTH5010 was broken,

and its laminate tag was wrong. In addition, the motor covers

on NS pump 1B were loose or missing.

These deficiencies will be followed up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-08.

n. Safety Tags

The site has two procedures which focus on the control and issuance

of safety and delineation tags. These procedures are Station

Directive 3.1.1 (0P), Safety Tags and Delineation Tags, revision 21;

and Operations Management Procedures 2-1, Audit Of Safety Tags and

Tagout (R&R)'s, revision 11. The first of these two provides for

the issue, placement, recall, transfer, and removal of red personnel

safety tags, white equipment safety tags, and yellow " HOLD" safety

tags. The audit procedure is implemented vigorously by operations

management personnel to make sure that none of the listed tags are

missing or inappropriately applied. 3

1

The team selected several safety tags which were fastened to the

unit 2 4160 VAC switchgear. The tags were checked against the

l appropriate tagout (R&R) record sheets and were found to be active

and properly indexed. The tags and the tagout records were com-

pleted, signed, dated, and applied as required by the controlling

station directive. The tagout (R&R) records sheets which have been

outstanding for an extended period were evaluated. Two of the

sheets, one for each plant, indicate that in 1987 the diesel

generator engine fuel oil booster pumps had tags applied to their

power supply switches. The plant operations supervisor stated that 3

!

l

!

,

l

_ - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ - - _ - _ . _ - _ _ - - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _- _ _ . _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . ___._____ a

_ _ _

_ _ _ -

{ '

. - -

lo .

L 17

these tags are necessary due to the incomplete status of the instal-

lation of these booster pumps. He further revealed that prior to

installing these pumps more guidance must be provided . by design

engineering.

A Unit I tagout sheet indicated that several condensate flow orifice

bypass valves have had tags applied to them since 1986. The opera- ,

tors stated that this is an acceptable site practice authori.ed i

by the condensate system controlling procedure. The procedure

allows the tags to be temporarily lifted as required to manipulate

the valves. Upon completion of the valve operation the valves are

returned to the properly tagged position and then the tags are

reapplied.

A similar tagout sheet has remained outstanding since 1984 for two

alternate power supply breakers in unit 1. These two breaker 3 are

normally " RED" tagged in the off position. But when the need arises

the breakers could be put into service and operated, as allowed by i

procedure. Upon completion of use, the breakers would be returned

to the tagged positions and the " RED" tags would be reapplied.

The team found that there are a limited number of other instances

similar to the above. Allowing certain tagouts to remain active for

extended periods and allowing the tags to be temporarily lifted has

been authorized by site procedures. The team considered that

leaving red tags in place for years and routine temporary lifting of

red tags potentially dilute the importance of the red tag system.

o. Operator Access

The auxiliary operators are issued key rings which contain all of

the required keys for routine access to areas which are administra-

tively controlled. In the event that the normal security door locks

improperly function, provisions have been made which will allow

these doors to be opened by the operators. Keys for other personnel

who may need them for access to administrative 1y controlled areas

may be obtained from the shift foreman. The team observed operations

personnel using the system and when questioned each of those

interviewed were familiar with the key control process and its

importance. The system utilized for key controls seems to be working

satisfactorily,

p. Required Reading

The shift foreman's administrative staff is responsible for assuring

that the various plant operators complete their required reading.

The required reading material may consist of procedures which have

been recently revised and other material which management feels that

the operators should be familiar with. The tehm verified that the

operators have been reading the required material and that they are '

familiar with what they read. The administrative staff requires

!

- _ - _ _ _ _

- _ - _ - _

.

'. ..

,- .

18

that each of the operators complete reading the material within the

established time period. Upon completion, the operators sign or

initial the required reading notebook as proof that they reviewed

the material,

q. Overtime

The team verified that the licansee has in place controls and .

procedures for use of overtime. Station Directive 3.3.0 (SS),

Control of Overtime Hours, revision 2 provides guidance to help

assure that the licensee maintains the staff overtime and work hours

within the limits of T.S. Section 6.2.2,f. The team evaluated the

overtime hours which were worked by the plant operators for the

months of January, Februa ry , and March 1989. The team concluded

that the operations staff does frequently work overtime hours.

However, after evaluating the records and interviewing several

operations personnel, the team concluded that overtime hours are

being worked within limits of the TS.

The team also observed operators dividing up available overtime days i

among themselves. They were adhering to a plant administrative

limit of 60 work hours in any 7 consecutive days. This 60 hour6.944444e-4 days <br />0.0167 hours <br />9.920635e-5 weeks <br />2.283e-5 months <br />

limit is substantially below the TS limit of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in 7 days. i

The operators stated that these administrative overtime limits are

in force during outages as well as when a unit is operating.

r. Scaffolding Controls

While walking through the plant, the team observed scaffolding that

was not tied down and had no kickboards. For example, scaffolding

in the 1A diesel generator room had a work platform that was

approximately six feet above the floor and had no kickboards. In

addition, this scaffolding was not tied down to prevent movement.

The team subsequently reviewed scaffolding controls with the

licensee. The licensee statad that the scaffolding control program

was recognized to be weak, and that an improvement effort was under-  ;

way. Personnel safety items such as tiedowns and kickboards were to

'

be addressed in a forthcoming rewrite of scaffolding procedures. i

<

The team inquired about scaffolding controls as related to potential

impact on operability of safety equipment. Three specific concerns

were discussed: additional loads placed on safety equipment,

physical interference with safety equipment, and seismic considera- 4

tions. The licensee has a program in place for evaluation of placing

additional loads (such as scaffolding) onto safety piping. This

program is implemented by Station Directive 3.8.17, Installation of

Temporary Loads, revision 4. The licensee also tas procedures that

address physical interference with safety equipment (ie. by obstruct-

ing a travelling valve stem): Station Directive 3.8.12 and also

Station Directive 2.11.6, General Scaffold Guidelines, revision 3.

In addition, the licensee stated that the crews of scaffolding

1

I

L_____ .._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

- - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ .. _-_ - _ _ _ .

__-_-

.

. .

. .

l

1

19

l builders are aware of equipment operability concerns and have demon-

strated the knowledge needed to be able to build scaffolds without

affecting the operation of equipment.

The potential seismic impact of scaffolding on the operability of

safety ' equipment was not addressed in the licensee's procedures.

l Since the scaffolding is not seismically qualified, the concern here

is that scaffolding erected over or near safety equipment could, in

a seismic event, reduce the functioning of the safety equipment.

This concern is addressed in NRC Regulatory Guide 1.29, to which the

licensee has committed. The failure of the licensee's procedures to

address seismic impact of scaffolding on operability of safety

equipment is considered to be a weakness. This item will be followed

up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-09.

s. DC Electrical Ground Faults

In the control room, the team observed a unit 2 lit annunciator,

"125 V ESS PWR Channel A Trouble", that indicated an existing vital

de system electrical ground fault. The licensee was aware of the

ground fault and had recently initiated an MWR to locate and repair

it. The team then discussed vital de ground faults in general with

licensed operators, cognizant I&E engineers, and the cognizant I&E

foreman, Discussions covered safety significance, IEN 88-86,

frequency and duration of ground fault occurrences, policy and

procedures, methods of detecting and locating, annunciator setpoint

and calibration, types and sensitivity of ground locating equipment,

and IEN 88-86 Supplement 1. The licensee had procedures in place to

identify and correct ground faults. However the procedures and

practices did not include the use of any portable ground locating

equipment, such as is used by other plants, including the licensee's

sister plant, McGuire. The use of this equipment would enable ground

faults to be located and isolated much more expeditiously. The

licensee stated that vital dc ground faults are likely to take a

week or more to locate, due to waiting for operations to open

breakers. Use of portable equipment would not require opening

breakers and would enable ground faults to be located and repaired

within one or two days. The team considered the use of portable de

ground fault locating equipment as a much needed improvement, with

direct safety importance. This item will be followed up under IFI

50-413,414/89-09-10.

t. Safety Rtview Group

The team observed a meeting of the Safety Review Group. The subject

of the meeting was a review of draft LER 413/89-011, titled "Techni-

cal Specification Viciation for Lower Containment Compensatory Action

Not Being Performed due to Failure to Notify Appropriate Personnel".

This event centers around a large number of :ontainment fire detector

failing. In two samples, 37% and 50% were found to be out of cali-

bration. Design Engineering had sent a letter to Compliance stating

- - - - - _ _ _ _ _ -

7

.

Nh:~.

. .

s .c >

~20' ,

th'at both- unit 1 and unit 2 lower containment fire detectors should ,

be considered inoperable; _ Compliance-then sent a Technical Specifi-

cation Operability Notification Sheet to unit. 2 operators. but not

unit 1. As a result, unit 2 operators conducted the 'TS required

hourly temperature monitoring in lower -' containment but: unit 1

operators did not. ' The failure of . Compliance to notify unit l'

operators 'was identified and discussed' as the only root. cause of

this event.

.The failed : detectors were Hochiki model SIF-24F. Ionization Smoke

Detectors, which .had been installed throughout the Containment

Buildings. Turbine Building, Auxiliary Building, and. Service-

F

Building in 1987.

'l

In' January 1989, a high failure rate of the detectors located _in the

Containment Buildings was recognized. In February 1989, Hochiki

Electroni.cs determined the.cause of the failures to be a high level

of radiation. The licensee plans to replace the Hochiki ionization.

detectors in the containments with more reliable photoe'lectric type

~ detectors, as recommended by the manufacturer.

The team observed the discussion- among the Safety Review Group

members to. be lively, open, and focused on the details and wording

of. the LER. However, the team noted that a significant root cause

of this event had been overlooked - the purchase of the. Hochiki

detectors for use in containment. Had the purchase order correctly

specified the environmental conditions ' (including radiation) in

-

which these detectors were to be operated? Are incorrect purchase

order: specifications for safety. equipment a recurring problem?. The.

team considered that the identification of all contributory causes

i of. a event and accomplishment _ of complete corrective actions to

prevent recurrence are the most safety significant parts of an LER.

The Safety Review Group stated that they would investigate the

purchasing of these detectors.

The team reviewed approximately- two hundred licensee LERs, and found .

them generally to be well written and complete. Only one other

case of overlooking a major root cause and corrective action was

identified. The team judged that this instance of incomplete identi-

fication of root cause and needed corrective action was an isolated

case.

!

'

In the area of Operations, . one violation (paragraph. 2.k) and no devia-

tions were identified.

3. Emergency Operating Procedures (42700, 2515/92)

a. E0P/GTG Comparison

The team reviewed the relationship between the Catawba E0Ps and the

plant specific technical guidelines (PSTG). The Catawba PSTG was

l I

f

i .

- - J

.

. .

. .

21

'

developed from Revision 1 of'the ERG by the safety analysis group at

the Duke' Power general office. The PSTG incorporates a number of

additions to, deletions from, and restructuring of the ERG resulting

from:

  • plant-specific design differences

preference for some elements of ERG Revision 0

engineering evaluations

operating philosophy

operating experience

experience with other vendor guidelines

verification and validation activities

Those changes determined by the safety analysis group to be safety

significant were justified in two deviation documents, dated June

and July 1984 In addition, plant specific setpoints were developed

by the safety analysis group for use in converting the ERG into the

Catawba PSTG. However, the document, " Emergency Procedure Guideline

Setpoints," was not approved until May 1986. Duke Power identified

one incorrect setpoint, pressurizer level, in the original revision

of the Catawba E0Ps, and the E0Ps were subsequently corrected.

Production of the upgraded Catawba E0Ps from the PSTG was conducted

by the document development group of the Catawba operations section

in parallel with PS1G development. E0Ps were produced by application

of the principles in the Catawba writer's guide to the technical

information in the PSTG. Following completion of the E0Ps in January

1984, verification and validation of the procedures began, with

implementation of the procedures on Unit 1 in May 1984.

A description of the PSTG was submitted for NRC approval as part

of the PGP in February 1983. Upon the request of the NRC, the

deviations document was provided for review. Subsequently, the NRC

required that the deviations document be revised to be based upon

Revision 0 of the ERG. In this version, some deviations were

included by Duke Power due to preference for the Revision 1 ERG

approach. Several requests for additional information were made by

the NRC. In SER Supplement 6, dated May 1986, the NRC concluded

that all information received on the PSTG was complete and adequate

at that time.

The team con. pared the Catawba E0Ps to the ERG to verify that the

L accident mitigation sequence of the ERG was represented in the E0Ps.

The E0Ps were determined to adequately cover the broad range of

accidents and equipment failures addressed in the ERG.

The role of Duke QA in the development of the PSTG and upgraded

E0Ps was reviewed. There was no documented QA involvement in the

development of the Catawba PSTG. The QA departacnt at Duke General

Office reports performing an overview of the McGuire PSTG, which was

reported to be a similar process, but has no record of any direct

I

l'

_ - _ _ . . _ _

e

..

. =..

k ..

j 22

L

n

involvement in the? Catawba PSTG - development. ' However,. the team

found that adequate management controls ~ (general office safety

analysis group oversight, Catawba- document development group) had

been applied in' lieu of QA involvement.

The ' team compared ' the E0Ps to the Catawba PSTG .and found many,

p differences, where there should be none. These differences are

L 11dentified by the designation "PSTG DEV" in apper. dix B. The. team

i. did not - consider the numerous instances of a single PSTG step which -

had been broken out to multiple steps ir the E0P. as constituting - ,

' di f ferc.nce s . An assessment of this comparison will be performed

during a future inspection under IFI- 50-413,414/89-09-11.

The' current: Catawba writer's guide applies to both E0Ps and A0Ps.

- Review = of the E0Ps. against- the requirements of the writer's guide

identified a variety of deviations. The_. most significant and

. consistent .of these ' is the . improper structure. and applic3.an of

cautions and notes (paragraph 3.b). This weakness 1 suggests a lack

of verification against the writer's. guide.

'.The relationship . of procedure nomenclature to the control room.

. labeling was found'to be clear-and consistent.

The.AOPs contained many.more deviations from the writer's guide than-

did the E0Ps.- Every aspect of the A0Ps contained examples of lack

of conformance to guidance, as well as, inconsistencies within and

between the AUPs.. The Catawba staff stated that the- A0Ps had neither

been rewritten nor verified to correspond to' the writer's guide and

-

-that the schedule for upgrading the AOPs has been receatedly~ delayed

due'to reprioritization. The team finds this delay undesirable.

b. -Independent technical adequacy review of the E0Ps

The team. reviewed the procedures listed in Appendix A and found that

generally the vendor recommended accident mitigation strategy was

followed. However, the team identified many instances where the

vendor recommended action sequence was not followed. Although some

of these action sequence variations were cited in the deviation

document, many of these variations were not - documented. Another

variation from the vendor guidance was the lack of entry conditions

contained in the E0Ps. The two entry pointy were E-0 and ECA 0.0.

These procedures listed symptoms which would require implementation

of the procedures but did not have definitive entry conditions as in

the ERG and the PSTG. Some of these variations are identified in

appendix B and will be resolved under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-12.

Cautions and notes were consistently incorrect in application of the

writers guide. In'some cases cautions were actually notes or action '

steps required in the step sequence. Notes were at times actually

cautions or procedure steps. Some notes and cautions that were  !

appropriately . labeled as such lacked conformance to the writer's J

l

l

_ _ - i

.

, ,

.o .

23

guide. For example, cautions were generally found lacking identifi-

cation of the potential hazard to equipment or personnel as required

by t'e writer's _ guide, and both notes and cautions were written

containing action steps -or conditional steps also contrary to the

writer's guide. Specific examples are delineated in Appendix B.

Peacekeeping deficiencies were identified during the simulator

inspection. of the E0Ps and are discussed in paragraph 3.d. No

deficiencies in the control room usage of peacekeeping aids were

identified.

The degree of adherence to the guidance in the ERG was found to be

generally acceptable although, as documented in Appendix B, many

undocumented deviations existed.

Operator action setpoint values were contained in the Catawba set-

point document and associated engineering calculation sheets. These

values were used in the E0Ps except for the few instances noted in

the appendices.

Control room drawings were inspected to verify that E0P specified

components were accurately typified.

The team found that the safety significant deviations identified by

the licensee had been reported to the NRC. Safety Evaluations for

these deviations were not inspected.

c. Review of the E0Ps by inplant and Control Room walkthroughs

Inplant and Control Room walkthroughs of the emergency and abnormal

procedures listed in appendix A were conducted. Generally, the

nomenclature appeared to be consistent between the procedures and

the instrumentation and labeling on the control board. The discrep-

ancies noted were enumerated in appendix D. The licensee committed

to review these and make changes as appropriate. Resolution of this

issue is identified as IFI 50-413,414/89-09-13.

Indications, annunciators and controls referenced in the E0Ps were

found to be available to the operators. One set of emergency and

abnormal procedures was maintained in the Control Room at all times

for each unit. These procedures were verified to be the latest

revision. A discrepancy between step C.4, RNO, of procedure

EP/1/A/5000/01, Reactor Trip of Safety Injection and the S/G pressure

meter in the Control Room was found during the walkthrough. This

1 item had previously been identified co the licensee in August 1987  :

l but had not been resolved. Resolution of this issue wil' be identi-

L fied as IFI 50-413,414/89-09-14.

l

l

l

, ___ ___ _ _ _ _ _

_, _ __

. -.

- ., - , ,

jc . .

i--

e '24

m

While the: results of the walkthroughs were generally' positive, some

discrepancies ; in the' areas of technical adequacy, writer's guide,-

adherence and human factors were noted. Technical and human factors

discrepancies are noted in appendix B while. writer's guide discrep-

ancies 'are noted in appendix C. .The licensee has committed' to

consider 'the. discrepanc-les identified in the -aforementioned

,: appendices. Appendix C discrepancies will' be' identified as' IFI-

50-413,414/89-09-15. <

Operators' stated that the level of noise in the Control Room caused -

by auto-start .'of both.. ventilation trains during S/I response ~ is

.

cxcessive and requires shouting _ for audible communications between

personnel. Problem Investigation Report serial number;0-C-89-0145

dated April 12,. 1989, had been' submitted to Duke Power design-

engineering L for evaluation and correction. The design engineering

staff reported that a sound survey during use of both trains of

' control room ventilation _ is currently being scheduled and that

necessary action:will be based on analysis of sound survey findings.

This item will be' identified as IFI' 50-413,414/89-09-16.

Due to time constraints, many of the aspects of thE validation and

verification program that were applied to the development of the

E0Ps were not inspected in' depth. Deficiencies in ' connection with

the licensee's ongoing evaluation of the E0Ps are identified in

paragraph 3.e.

d. Simulator Observations

The -team observed a crew performing the following five scenarios on-

~

the Catawba simulator:

(1) Steamline break outside containment

(2) Loss of all ac power

(3) S/G tube leak

(4) S/G tube rupture with a steam line break.

(5) Natural circulation cooldown with a void in the reactor head

The procedures provided operators with sufficient guidance to fulfill

their responsibilities and . required actions during the emergencies,

both individually and as a team.

The procedt.res did not cause the operators to physically interfere

with each other while performing the E0Ps and AOPs. However, the

concurrent use of several AOPs resulted in operators responding to

'

, the directions of more than one person at a time.

The procedures did not duplicate operator actions unless required

(e.g. , for independent verification).

_ - _ _ . -_ ____- _ ___ _ ______ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - _ - _ - _ _--__ -

p

e .

. ...

t .

25

When a transition from one E0P to another E0P or other procedure was

required, precautions were taken to ensure that all necessary steps,

prerequisites, initial conditions, etc. were met. However, the

method of filing procedures made it possible for an operator to

select the wrong procedure from the filing cabinet in the simulator

'

Control Room. Operators were found to be knowledgeable about where

to enter and exit the procedures.

1

'

It was observed that the entry symptoms contained in the E0Ps were

not sufficiently clear to preclude an operator from inadvertent

implementation of certain procedures. An inconsistency between the

plant and simulator existed in that peacekeeping used in the plant

for E0Ps and required by the PSTG was not used in the simulator.

Deficiencies in 1) concurrent use of several AOPs, 2) procedure

filing and 3) clarity of entry conditions will be identified as IFI

50-413,414/89-09-17.

Activities that should occur outside the control room were initiated

by the operators and proper confirmation of their completion was

given. These actions were inspected during in plant walkthroughs of

the procedures. However, one deficiency was noted in that the

simulator was unable to simulate the local closing of NV-295 on

malfunction of NV-294. This deficiency prevented the proper

completion of the planned scenario.

e. The team reviewed audit cccumentation and conducted interviews to

determine the quality assurance measures taken to assure that the

emergency procedures were adequate and that they met the require-

ments of the Procedure Generation Package (PGP). The team found

that the QA organization conducts audits at periodic intervals. The

adequacy of these audits was not examined in detail.

The team verified that the PSTG and the set point document are

controlled documents. Station master files, retain E0P retypes and

V & V associated with the E0Ps.

f. E0P user interviews

The team conducted interviews with six licensed operators. The

operators felt that the E0Ps had been improved with the recent revi-

sion. Those interviewed expressed their belief that the level of

detail.in the E0Ps was adequate for and compatible with the level of

knowledge of the typical operator. Overall, the operators had confi-

dence in the ability of the E0Ps to perform their intended function.

The operators noted that the A0Ps are not at the same useability

level as the E0Ps. Those interviewed felt that an upgrade to the

AOPs similar to that which the E0Ps received would be beneficial.

In the area of Emergency Operating Procedures there were no violations or

deviations noted.

____ _

. _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _

.

. .

,..

4 e

26

-4. Support of Plant Operations (62700,42700,37700)

a. Maintenance interviews

Interviews were conducted with mechanics, IAE technicians, . and

maintenance supervisors and managers. The interviews concentrated

on maintenance training and retraining, overtime, supervision,

operations / maintenance interface, and staffing. Some strengths and

weaknesses were identified during these interviews and are discussed

below.

Interviews with four mechanics and four IAE ' technicians indicated

that there is a good working relationship between the various plant

work groups (i.e. operations, maintenance, health physics, and

engineering). All who were interviewed conveyed a " team effort"

attitude. All felt that they worked together well to operate and-

maintain the plant. This attitude was determined by the team to be

a strength and overall performance should improve as the groups

continue to work together.

The mechanics and technicians stated that they feel that plant

management has taken measures to emphasize procedural compliance and

independent verification. Maintenance personnel were provided

training sessions on these topics, and discussions are periodically

conducted at the daily crew meetings.

During an interview with an IAE supervisor, an incident was used to

demonstrate management's commitment to ensure compliance with the

independent verification program. In this incident, two technicians

were found to have violated the independent verification program and

were given written reprimands that were placed in their personnel

files. This action by management impressed upon plant personne) ,

that management was serious about compliance with the independent '

verification program, as well as, procedural compliance. This was

seen by the team as a strength. '

Discussions with the mechanics and technicians revealed differing

attitudes with regard to overtime. Management has taken steps to

reduce the amount of overtime for plant personnel as a result' of

discussions with the NRC Resident Inspector. Prior to taking action

to reduce the emount of overtime, there were instances of personnel

exceeding the T.S. limits on overtime. As a result of management's

actions, some of the mechanics and technicians enjoy the reduction

in overtime, while others feel there is not enough. The first line ,

i

supervisors expressed the feeling that they had sufficient staffing

to handle the day to day maintenance requirements, but that increased

staffing would be needed for outages in order to comply with the

requirements on overtime and to perform the outage work on schedule. 1

!

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . ._ _

i

a: y j

. .

g ...

j 27

~

The mechanics and technicians expressed. dissatisfaction with the

manner in which the training and . qualification program (ETQS) was

being implemented. They did state that they felt that the objective j

of the program was good and that once the bugs get worked out, it

will be beneficial. They stated that they . did, not ' feel- that the

.

'

time requirements for completing. the program were fair This was

because .they felt that certain requirements could not be - met in a

. two year period. Additionally, they expressed. concern that they may

lose positional status or promotional opportunity if they did not ,

meet the time restraints.

Discussions with the supervisors of these men indicated that the

mechanics and technicians did not fully understand the program '4

and its requirements. Some of the concern expressed by them was-

unjustified, according to the supervisors. The supervisors stated -

that some of concerns were due to the program changing several-

, times in order to improve it. Other concerns were due to the plant

personnel. responding to the personnel that were brought in from'CMD.

When the CMD personnel were informed of the program they apparently-

misunderstood how the program was to work. The CMD personnel then

discussed. their understanding of the program with the. permanent

pl. ant personnel and the problem grew. The. supervisors stated that

had management communicated the intents and requirements of the

program better, there would not have been- as much adversity. The

supervisors also stated that no one would lose positional status or

promotional opportunity by not . completing the program within the

requirnd time frame. They said that this was another case of

misunderstanding what was promulgated by management.

Discussions with the Maintenance Manager indicated that the licensee

was already aware of the problem and was taking steps to correct it.

The-weakness was in the Employee Training and Qualification System

(ETQS) and was due, according to the Maintenance . Manager, to the

program being in a state of flux as a result of reevaluation of the

system. Management is attempting to improve the system by making

the requirements for completing the tasks more consistent and

relative to job performance. Additionally, management is evaluating

'the time requirements for completing the qualification program and

how to deal with those that are delinquent in their qualifications.

The ETQS for IAE is scheduled to be implemented by June, 1989, while

that for mechanical W ntenance is scheduled for January, 1990.

There is a possibility that the implementation of the IAE system

wi? ' be delayed to January,1990, but no decision had been reached

at the time of the inspection.

Every mechanic and technician expressed a feeling that their first

line supervisor was the best possible. All were supportive of the

first line supervisors, but expressed some dissatisfaction with

upper management. This dissatisfaction was concentrated in two main

_-- _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ - - - - _ _ _ - _ _ _ -

p. -

.

.... .

l' .-

28

,

areas. One was the ETQS discussed above, and the other was the

change of ' shift assignments and shift schedule for: the current

outage.

The IAE ' technicians stated that they were dissatisfied with manage-

ment's- decision to alter the shift schedule and assignments. The

supervisors of these technicians stated that it'was only a perception

that the technicians would lose some overtime. _ The supervisors also

stated that- the problem could have been avoided if there had been

better communications among those involved in making the decisions

and those that the decisions affected.

The first 'lin'e supervisors, in general, felt that their supervision

was supportive, but felt that first line supervisors were not .

included enough in some decision making processes. They felt .that

if they were included more, they could help correct problems .that

arose due to misunderstanding the intent of what was to be _imple-

mented. This feeling apparently was also due to poor communications

. because their supervisor, when interviewed, stated that 'the first.

line supervisors were included in the process but may rot be aware-

of it.

The interviews 1 indicated that upper management may not have a working

l' . feedback loop .in the communication path to ensure that the: communi-

cated ' idea was received and understood properly. Discussions with

'

the Mechanical and IAE Supervisors and the Maintenance Manager

identified this as a ' potential problem. They agreed that the

communication path may have a missing link and that.it was a weakness

that would be investigated and resolved.

Following are the strengths identified during. the interviews and

observations. There is an attitude of being on the same team and

everyone working together to achieve a common . goal . Management

. tries to take an active role in the daily operation of the plant.

Management .is serious' about enforcing procedural compliance and

independent verification. And, lastly, management is trying to

improve the qualification program for mechanics and technicians.

Only two weaknesses were identified during the interviews and

observations. These were the present state of the qualification

program, and the problems with communications. These issues will be

'

followed up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-18.

b. Nuclear Station Modifications

As of April 11, 1989, there were 141 active NSMs for the Catawba

project. Of these,17 safety related . isms were " Design Complete -

Not Ready to Work", and 34 safety related NSMs were " Design Complete

- Not Installed", for a total of 51. active safety related NSMs. The

team reviewed two NSMs for compliance with the requirements of the

Nuclear Station Modification Manual (NSMM) and Catawba Nuclear

!-

-- _ - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . _ _ - _

- - _ _ _ - _ - _ - - . _ - _ - _ _ . __ _ _ _ _ _

_- -_ _ - - -

.. .

A ,

'

29

,

Station Directive (CNSD). The NSMs were: NSM #CN-11042, Rev. O,

Replace Valves IKC50A and 1KC53B with 20" Possiseal Valves; and, NSM

  1. CN-11159, Rev. O, Replace Reactor Vessel Nonle Inspection Hatch

' Covers.

Engi.neering Safety Evaluations for the NSM were thorough, addressing

the potential affect on the FSAR and Technical Specifications

as well as unreviewed safety questions. . The NSMs contained the -

neces sary . documentation and were normally completed . as required

by the procedures. There was one example, NSM #CN-11159, which

was completed on November 29, 1988, and the -affected procedure,

MP/1/A/750/42 had not been revised as of April 28, 1989. This is

considered to be an isolated case and the team concluded -that the

NSM program was satisfactory.

c. Temporary Station Modifications (TSMs)

As of April 11, 1989, there were 131 active TSMs, of which 33 were

. safety related. Of the 131 active TSMs, 68 were older than 16

months, with 7 being safety related. CNSD 4.4.5, Rev. O, Temporary

Station Modifications, dated July 5, 1988, states that temporary

modifications should not be installed for more than 12 months for

those not requiring -an outage, or. the next refueling outage for

those that do require an outage for removal. The licensee stated

that the intent was to apply the directive to all new TSMsj and-

to work at reducing the number of existing TSMs. A meeting was

scheduled for May 24, 1989, to discuss reducing the number of active

NSMs and TSMs. The high number of TSMs and the duration of time

some are open is considered a weakness. This issue will be followed

up under IFI 50-413,414/89-09-19.

Two TSMs were randcmly selected to determine the effectiveness of

the control and documentation of TSMs. The modifications selected

were WR# 007121, Replace SSF Diesel Water Jacket Heater Model

  1. 3P5-0600 with Model #C5033-050; and, WR# 009389, Replace VI Pressure

Regulator (PR-2) with Fairchild Model 80P. Both were found to be

adequate and documentation was completea as per CNSD 4.4.5 and NSMM

j Section 9.

Fifteen safety related TSMs were selected to review the affected

control room drawings. The drawings were reviewed to verify proper

reference to or red lining of the applicable TSM on the affected

,

drawing. No discrepancies were noted during this check. A complete

! review of control room drawings for the effects of all types of

f

'

plant modifications was not conducted by the team due to issues

in this area which had already ' oeen addressed by the resident

inspectors. The results of their review of the area is documented by

a violation in their April,1989 monthly inspection report.

- w__ __ - - _ - _ _ -

- . _ - _ _ _ . - - _ _ _ - __

._ _ . _ - _ __ . _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ __

.

. .

2: .

30

d. Licensee Event Reports and Potentially Reportable Events

The team examined the licensee's administrative control programs for

review, investigation, and reporting of non-routine events to assure

conformance with regulatory requirements and to assess its efficiency

in increasing equipment reliability through correct identification

of root causes and by initiating appropriate corrective actions. The

program was'being applied to a number of events which were the scope

of the team's evaluation. These events occurred between August 1,

1988, and April 24, 1989.

The number of events reported during the previous SALP period was

68. The number reported during the 9 month sample performed for

this inspection was 23. The percentage of personnel errors remained

constant at approximately 33%, however, the percentage of procedural

deficiencies increased from approximately 3% to approximately 17%.

The reduction of total LERs indicates that the licensee is making an

effort to reduce reportable events. However, the increase in

procedural deficiencies indicates that a review of procedures !s

warranted. The licensee had realized this also and was in the

process of performing the necessary reviews and procedural upgrades.

The area of potentially reportable events is covered by the Problem

Identification Report (PIR) program. This program is governed by

CNSD 2.8.1 which describes the problem identification ard assignment

of the responsible group to investigate the problem. The FIR program

serves as the basis for the processing, evaluating, and resolving of

any identified problem. The PIR program also includes provisions for

recognizing and reporting events covered by 10 CFR 50.73, as well as,

10 CFR 21 and other reporting requirements.

e. Preventive / Predictive Maintenance Programs

The team reviewed the licensee's preventive / predictive maintenance

programs in an effort to assess management initiatives to improve

the availability and reliability of equipment service. The team

determined that the licensee has well established maintenance

programs.

The Standing Work Request (SWR) program is used to schedule, track,

and document routinely performed preventive maintenance tasks.

Daily, an SWR report is generated that contains a complete listing

of all maintenance, pe.riodic testing, and scheduling records, as

well as, the associated schedule dates. The weekly periodic test

report contains the completion dates for all surveillance from

the previous week and/or surveillance requirements not previously

reported. An overdue report is run daily to identify any required

SWR item that has reached or exceeded the earliest date. As of

April 24, 1989, the team verified that there were no T.S. items

overdue, and only a few backlogged PM items.

- _ _ _ - _ _ - -

, __ __ _ _ _ _ _ . _ - _ _ _ _ _._______

_

II

e- e

I

$' 4

31

The licensee has. a ' computerized ' program to assist .in . scheduling PM

items.. The' program calculates the earliest. start date and the late

date, to ensure that the requirement does not exceed any T.S. limit.

This' includes the 3.25 times the periodicity for three consecutive

.. times. - Any requirements that have' been missed to date' have not been

the result of lack of scheduling, but due to other factors. (i.e.

personnel error, plant conditions, lack of parts).

The team discussed the predictive maintenance program with plant .

. personnel. .The goal of the program is to provide a structure for

monitoring and evaluating rotating' and. reciprocating equipment' in -

order to aid.in predicting equipment failure. ~

The predictive ' maintenance program consists- of oil analysis' and

vibration . analysi s . and trending. During 1988, ' performance trending

was conducted on. approximately 300.. components. The licensee has a'

plan' that will expand the program wo include more high maintenance

components in the vibration analysis database and to also purchate

additional diagnostic . equipment. Management has provided excellent

support:to this effort in order to insure its success.

f. Information Notices (ins)

Information Notices are useful in avoiding fmaking the same mistakes.

that others have made, as well as, providing for increased equipment-

availability. The team examWed the licensee's program for review,

response, and resolution of ins. A random selection of six notices

issued during the previous.18 months was performed and the applicable

notices were reviewed.

The following lists the ins selected.

IN 89-08 Pump Damage Caused by Low Flow Operation, January 26,

1989.

IN 88-86 Operating With Multiple Grounds in Direct Current

Distribution Systems, October 21, 1988.

IN 88-74 Potential Inadequate Performance of ECCS in PWRs

During Recirculation Operation Following a LOCA,

September 14, 1988.

IN 88-34 Nuclear Material Control and Accountability 'of

l Non-fuel Special Nuclear Material at Power Reactors,

May 31, 1988.

l

IN 87-60 Depressurization of Reactor Coolant System in PWRs,

e December 4, 1987.

IN 87-53 Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Trips Resulting from Low ,

Suction Pressure, October 20, 1987. l

_ _ _ - - - - _ _ _ _ - - - _ _ _ - _ -__. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ . _ .-_

_ _ _ _ _ - .. . . _ .

.

. .

% e

32

The team verified that the Nuclear Safety Section of the Nuclear

Safety Assurance Group at 'the General Office coordinates the

processing of ins. 'This requires inputs from various plant sections,

including Design / Technical Services Engineering Support, Production

Training Services, and . Regulatory C )mpliance. Applicable ins are

distributed to the appropriate station work group for information,

for additional input, or for corrective action if necessary.

The team determined that the licensee reviewed the subject ins in a

timely manner and any actions that were required were also performed

in a timely manner.

- g. Backlog Status of Maintenance Work Requests (MWRs)

The team reviewed the status of d- MWR backlog and the adequacy of

the assignment of priorities to MWRs. The status of outstanding MWRs

is published biweekly by the Integrated Scheduling Group. The MWRs

are categorized based on whether the work '+ Corrective Maintenance -

Non-outage, Corrective Maintenance - Outage, Preventive Maintenance,

or Modification. Although the number of MWRs outstanding appeared

large, Catawba is average compared to the INPO guidelines.

As of April 24, 1989, there were 5,332 outstanding MWRs. These can

be divided-into: 1,953 Corrective Non-outage; 1,994 Outage; 504 PM;

and 881 Modification. As of May 4, 1989, the Outage MWRs outstanding

had been reduced to 1,646, with many of those (approximately 600)

waiting for functional testing. The ratio of Non-outage MWRs greater

than 90 days to the total number of Non-outage MWRs has remained

approximately constant at approximately 45%, which is better than the !

INP0 guideline of 52%. Although the raw data is not encouraging '

(proper management of over 5000 items is very difficult), team review

of the details of this backlog determined that the licensee does have

control ever the backlog and is actively pursuing means to reduce it.

The I,tegrated Scheduling Group conducts a daily review df out-

standing MWRs by priority code and works with Operations and other

departments to determine which MWRs could be worked in conjunction

with plant availability. This was considered to be a strong point  ;

by the team. I

Priorities are established based on the classification of the

component and the nature of the work. Priority 1, 2 and 2X are

assigned to work requests of a critical nature and to safety related

equipment. Priority 3 is assigned to work that will improve plant ,

performance or is for preventive maintenance. Priority 4 or 5 are '

for non-critical work with Priority 5 being used to designate outage

related work. The team concluded that the licensee adequately

prioritized MWRs.

- _ _ - _ _ _ _ .

_ _ -_

l

l ,' .

s .

33

h. Work Requests

The work request system was reviewed to determine work flow from

origination of a work request at the time _of discovery of a problem

with plant equipment, through the actual repair. Maintenance

Management Procedure 1.0, Revision 25, dated January 13, 1989, " Work

Request Preparation", and Operations Management Procedure 2-3,

Revision 2, dated March 22, 1988, " Operations Work Req. ;ts", were

reviewed. Interviews were conducted with personnel from cperations,

the Shift Manager, the Unit Operations Manager, the Mechanical

Planners, Integrated Scheduling, and a maintenance crew was observed

working WRs. '

The WRs observed were 10274 SWR for cleaning and inspection of the

IVGHXB002 aftercooler tubes, and 503490PS for replacement of a

diaphragm on IVGCPB002 Diesel Air Start Compressors. The mechanics i

were knowledgeable of the equipment and the tasks. The mechanics l

familic.rity with the task led to performance of maintenance without i

removing the procedure from its bag or opening it. The team reviewed  ;

the procedure and determined all appropriate sign-offs had been made,

and no procedural errors had been committed.

Several strengths were noted in the WR process. The' hanging of

orange Work Request ID Tags on affected equipment helps alert others

using the equipment of its status and helps avoid duplication of

WRs. The planner's inspection of the defective equipment during the

job planning phase is a strength. The concept of working items by

train or division in a weekly rotation should help to limit problems

with two trains being inoperable at the same time. The trip list

concept is good, but could potentially be expanded to include system

inoperable work lists to take advantage of system outages, as well

as unit outages. The working groups rotating shifts together is a

strength, in that interpersonal relationships and a feelin; of

teamwork can be deve'noad.

The veakness noted in this area was the mechanical maintenance

meckonics use of procedures. Although no procedural errors were

discovered, the crews did not have the procedures open while the work

was being perfornied. Management needs to work harder to encourage

full utilization of procedures, and encourage the mechanics to pro-

vide feedback in case of inadequacies in the detail of procedures

for covering the assigned task.

1. Planning Meetings

The team observed several planning meetings. Among the meetings

observed were the daily planning meeting, the morning outage

meeting, and the operating units morning meeting. The meetings were

short, to the point, and effective. Participants were well prepared

for discussion of items, and kept comments focused.

_ - _ _ _ . _ _ -

-- _ _ _ - _ _ .-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- _

!

'

7 ]

,';.

1

.y .

i

-

34

.j. Transmission Group

.The . team inter. viewed the Transmission Group supervisor. ' Transmission

'does not have ' direct reporting to management. on the plant ' site,  ;

but is a separate corporate group'. The group provides maintenance

services for. components of greater than 600VAC!and the 1250C breaker.

control power co'aponents and relaying. The technicians work , both '

nuclear and non-nuclear facilities in the Duke . system. -Transmission-

has its own procedures, training program, -and equipment calibration

program. Changes to' the station Mechanical or IAE groups programs

may not be reflected in Transmission, due to 'its separate nature and ,

. reporting- authority. Transmission has a fraction of the resources 1

available for. procedure upgrades, training, or maintenance of test ,I

equipment- that is available to other onsite maintenance groups. 'I

j

The limited resources available to support these activit4s, which

are considered normal overhead for a nuclear - plants maintenance

group, will increase the need for monitoring 'to insure co.:pliance in

safety related activities the group performs. The separate reporting

authority. and duplication of support functions of Transmission  !

>

is considered a : weakness. This item will be ' followed - up under

IFI 50-413, 414/89-09-20.

.k. Management support of Engineering

Interviews conducted with Design Engineering, Performance Engineer-

ing, and Maintenance Engineering, showed plant management-to be very

supportive of these groups. Maintenance Engineering was encouraged

to develop a Predictive Maintenance program. Funding for equipment '

was provided, and the group .was allowed to dedicate engineering

staffing full time to the program. Maintenance Engineering was

reorganized by component type to allow component expertise to

develop..

Performance Engineering was provided support to fully implement a

system engineer or system expert program. These experts use system

requirements to evaluate equipment. In conjunction with the ]

component engineers from maintenance, this provides for a matrix for. <

the evaluation. of plant equipment. This will allow both component  ;

and system limitations to be considered in evaluations. )

l

Interviews with Design Engineering stowed plant management is

encouraging all groups onsite to work as a team in problem i

resolution.

/  !

After interviewing the engineering groups, the plant manager was

interviewed. He stressed a continuing concept of all the groups _ i

wor king together to support plant operations. Congruence of goals

in the different plant engineering groups with support of plant

management is a strength.

,

!

i

_ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -- -

.i

- _ - _ _ _ __ - _ _

..

. ,

, .

35

1. 10 CFR 50.59 training

The plant is currently developing a program for certification of

individuals to perform 10 CFR 50.59 evaluations. Knowledge of

requirements and methods of performing the evaluations are being

taught to individuals who, upon completion of training, will be

certified ' level III' evaluators. This program is seen as a

strength, as it will allow for more consistent evaluations.

In the area of Plant Support there were no violations or deviations

noted.

5. Action on Previous Inspection Findings (92701, 92702)

(Closed) DEV. 413,414/87-13-01, Failure to meet commitments of the

approved PGP. The licensee provided documentation which indicatad that

appropriate corrective actions had been taken.

(Closed) VIO. 413,414/87-13-02, Failure to provide adequate training on

calculation of subcooling margin. The licensee provided documentation

which indicated that appropriate corrective actions had been taken.

(Closed) IFI 413,414/87-21-01, Design and implementation of corrections

to identified human engineering deficiencies. The licensee provided

' documentation which indicated that appropril 3 corrective actions had

been taken.

6. Exit Interview (30703)

The inspection scope and findings for both the E0P and Operations / Support

portions of this inspection were summarized in separate pre-exit inter-

views during the inspection. The findings were again summarized with

those persons indicated in paragraph 1 at the formal exit on May 16,

1989. The NRC described the areas inspected and discussed in detail the

inspection . findings. Although proprietary material was reviewed during )

this inspection, no proprietary material is contained in this report. j

i

Item Number Status Description / Reference Paragraph

VIO 413/89-09-01 Open Valve 1-KC-9 found unlocked

(paragraph 2.k) and operators

not frisking immediately after

exiting contaminated areas l

(paragraph 2.e) l

IFI 413,414/89-09-02 Closed Cold Leg Accumulator Boron

concentration adjustment made

- with a weak written procedure

(paragraph 2.a)

I

l

C________________.__. _ _ __

j

-

.

. .

t

- .

'

36

l

Item Number Status Description / Reference paragraph

IFI 413,414/89-09-03 Open Thermal power computer calibration

inputs not tracked on computerized

tracking system (paragraph 2.b)

IFI 413,414/89-09-04 Open Weak 10 CFR 50.59 evaluation on

Nuclear Service Water Modification

(paragraph 2.c)

IFI 413,414/89-09-05 Oper. Many of the sites safety related

pump rooms are contaminated

(paragraph 2.e)

IFI 413,414/89-09-06 Open Weak control of fire doors

(paragraph 2.g)

IFI 413,414/89-09-07 Open Procedures for independent

verification need improvement

(paragraph 2.1)

IFI 413,414/89-09-08 Open Deficiencies noted during NS

PT (paragraph 2.m)

IFI 413,414/89-09-09 Open Control of scaffolding needs to

be improved (paragraph 2.r)  ;

IFI 413,414/89-09-10 Open Site does not have DC ground fault

locating equipment (paragraph 2.s)

IFI 413,414/89-09-11 Open There are many differences between

the E0Ps and the PSTG (paragraph

3.a)

IFI 413,414/89-09-12 Open Correction of technical discrep-

ancies contained in the E0Ps as

outlined Appendix B (paragraph

3.b)

IFI 413,414/89-09-13 Open Correction of labeling discrep-

ancies betwcen E0Ps and panel

indication as outlined in

Appendix D (paragraph 3.c)

IFI 413,414/89-09-14 Open Correction of S/G pressure meter

'

indications (paragraph 3.c)

IFI 413,414/89-09-15 Open Correction of writer's guide

discrepancies contained in E0Ps

as outlined in Appendix C

(paragraph 3.c)

l

g

..

. c- -

.

.u 6

L

<

37

, .

J

Item Number Status Description / Reference-Paragraph

IFI 413,414/89-09-16 Open Resolve control room noise level

(paragraph 3.c)

1

I FI . 413,414/89-09-17 Open Review simulator. effectiveness in

training on E0Ps (paragraph 3.d)

IFI 413,414/89-09-18 Open Weaknesses noted in the site's

ETQS program (paragraph 4.a)

IFI 413,414/89-09-19 ' Open There are a significant number of

TSMs on site, some ranging in , age

of from 3 to 4 years. (paragraph

4.c)

- IFI-413,414/89-09-20 Cpen The seperate_ reporting authority

and duplication. of ' support

functions for the transmission

group is considered a weakness

(paragraph 4.j)

The following is a list' of the commitments. made by licensee _-personnel

during this inspection:

-

Licensee personnel committed to add calibration of themal power.

computer inputs'to the computerized periodic Test Program for Unit 1

(see paragraph 2.b).

-

Licensee personnel committed to sending Out of Calibration Notifica-

tion Forms for the _ Unit 1 thermal power computer inputs to the

systems Engineer ,(see paragraph 2.b).

-

Plant management committed to review the procedures for and practices

of plant operators concerning frisking when exiting contaminated -

areas (see paragraph 2.e).

-

The SRG committed to investigate the purchase of Hochiki Detectors as

a part of LER 413/89-011 (see paragraph 2.t).

The lice ;<e cumm, Lo&d t: r.<;ew and correct (as appropriate) the

'

-

momemclature difficiencies in Appendix 0 (see paragraph 3.c and

Appendix D).

' -

The license committed to evaluate the discrepancies in Appendices B

and C (see paragraph 3.c and appendices B and C).

-

The licensee committed to resolve the conflict between EP/1/A/5000/01

and the markings on the S/G pressure meters (see Appendix B, para-

graph 1.g).

5

. _ _ , . - . _ - _ _ , - . , - - - _ _ - . _ - - - - , - _ , - - - - . _ _ . - - _ - , _ . . - _ - - - - - ---u-_---

_- ____ -

.

. .

.. .

APPENDIX A

PROCEDURES REVIEWED

AP/0/A/5500/20 LOSS OF NUCLEAR SERVICE WATER 10/29/87

AP/0/A/5500/22 LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR 06/02/88

AP/0/A/5500/31 ESTIMATE OF FAILED FUEL BASED ON I-131 02/19/88

CONCENTRATION

AP/0/A/5500/34 SECONDARY CHEMISTRY OUT OF SPECIFICATION 11/04/88

AP/1/A/5500/02 TURBINE GENERATOR TRIP 03/13/89

AP/1/A/5500/03 LOAD REJECTION 03/31/87

AP/1/A/5500/04 LOSS OF REACTOR COOLANT PUMP 10/20/86

AP/1/A/5500/05 ECCS ACTUATION DURING PLANT SHUTDOWN 06/18/87

AP/1/A/5500/06 LOSS OF S/G FEEDWATER 03/05/87 i

AP/1/A/5500/07 LOSS OF NORMAL POWER 06/06/88

AP/1/A/5500/08 MALFUNCTION OF REACTOR COOLANT PUMPS 08/18/86

AP/1/A/5500/10 REACTOR COOLANT LEAK 01/16/89

AP/1/A/5500/11 INADVERTENT NC SYSTEM DEPRESSURIZATION 03/13/89

AP/1/A/5500/12 LOSS OF CHARGING OR LETDOWN 04/02/86

AP/1/A/5500/13 BORON DILUTION 01/07/87

AP/1/A/5500/14 CONTROL ROD MISALIGNED 06/06/84

AP/1/A/5500/15 R00 CONTROL MALFUN TION 03/24/87

AP/1/A/5500/16 MALFUNCTION OF NUCL TR INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM 11/07/87

AP/1/A/5500/17 LOSS OF CONTROL ROOM 01/31/89

AP/1/A/5500/18 HIGH ACTIVITY IN REACTOR COOLANT 03/15/88

AP/1/A/5500/19 LOSS OF RESIDUAL HEAT REMOVAL SYSTEM 11/30/88

AP/1/A/5500/21- LOSS OF COMPONENT COOLING 12/22/87

AP/1/A/5500/23 LOSS OF CONDENSER VACUUM 11/13/86

AP/1/A/5500/24 LOSS OF CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY 01/08/87

AP/1/A/5500/25 DAMAGE 0 SPENT FUEL 09/10/87

AP/1/A/5500/26 LOSS OF REFUELING CANAL OR SPENT FUEL POOL LEVEL 05/29/86

EP/1/A/5000/1 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 03/13/89

EP/1/A/5000/1A REACTOR TRIP RESPONSES 03/13/89

EP/1/A/5000/1A1 NATURAL CIRCULATION C00LDOWN 03/13/89

EP/1/A/5000/1B S/I TERMINATION FOLLOWING SPURIOUS S/I 03/13/89

EP/1/A/5000/1C HIGH-ENERGY LINE BREAK INSIDE CONTAINMENT 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/1C1 S/I TERMINATION FOLLOWING HIGH-ENERGY LINE BREAK 08/01/88

IN CONTAINMENT

EP/1/A/5000/1C2 POST LOCA C00LDOWN AND DEPRESSURIZATION 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/1C3 TRANSFER TO COLD LEG RECIRCULATION 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/1C4 TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRCULATION 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/1C5 LOSS OF EMERGENCY COOLANT RECIRCULATION 08/01/88  !

EP/1/A/5000/1C6 LOCA OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT 08/01/88 l

EP/1/A/5000/10 STEAM LINE BREAK OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT 03/13/89

EP/1/A/5000/1D1 S/I TERMINATION FOLLOWING STEAM LINE BREAK 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/1E STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE 03/01/89 '

EP/1/A/5000/1El POST-S/G TR ALTERNATE C00LDOWN AND 03/13/89  ;

REPRESSURIZATION l

EP/1/A/5000/IE2 S/G TR ALTERNATE C00LDOWN USING BACKFILLING 03/13/89

EP/1/A/5000/1E3 S/G TR WITH CONTINUOUS NC SYSTEM LEAKAGE- 03/01/89 ,

SUBC00 LED REC 0VERY j

EP/1/A/5000/1E4 S/G TR WITH CONTINUOUS NC SYSTEM LEAKAGE- 03/01/89 i

SATURATED RECOVERY

I

- - - _ - - _ - _ _ _ _ _ __ _ b

- . _ - ._- -_ _ _ .-- - ..

..

. ..

4 ,

A-2

l

EP/1/A/5000/IE6 S/G TR C00LDOWN USING ND 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2 CRITICAL SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS TREES 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2A1 NUCLEAR POWER GENERATION /ATWS 03/01/89

.EP/1/A/5000/2A2 LOSS OF CORE SHUTDOWN 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2B1 INADEQUATE CORE COOLING 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2B2 DEGRADED CORE COOLING 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2B3 SATURATED CORE' COOLING CONDITIONS 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2C1 LOSS OF SECONDARY HEAT SINK 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2C2 S/G OVERPRESSURE 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/2C3 S/G HIGH LEVEL 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/2C4 LOSS OF NORMAL STEAM RELEASE CAPABILITIES 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2C5 S/G LOW LEVEL 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/201 IMMINENT PRESSURIZED THERMAL SHOCK CONDITIONS 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/2D2 ANTICIPATED PRESSURIZED THERMAL SH0CK CONDITIONS 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/2D3 HIGH PRESSURIZER PRESSURE 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/2E1 HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE 03/01/89

EP/1/A/5000/2E2 HIGH CONTAINMENT SUMP LEVEL 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2E3 HIGH CONTAINMENT RADIATION LEVEL 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2F1 PRESSURIZER FLOODING 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2F2 LOW NC SYSTEM INVENTORY 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/2F3 VOIDS IN REACTOR VESSEL 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/3 LOSS OF ALL AC POWER 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/3A LOSS OF ALL AC POWER RECOVERY w/o S/I REQUIRED 08/01/88

EP/1/A/5000/3B LOSS OF ALL AC POWER RECOVERY WITH S/I REQUIRED 08/01/88

PROCEDURES REFERRED TO BY E0P OR AOP THAT WERE REVIEWED (IN FULL OR IN PART)

OP/0/A/6200/08 ICE CONDENSER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

OP/0/8/6100/13 STANDBY SHUTDOWN FACILITY OPERATIONS

OP/1/A/6150/02A REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION

OP/1/A/6450/10 CONTAINMENT HYDROGEN CONTROL SYSTEM 02/12/86

OP/1/A/6700/01 UNIT ONE DATA BOOK

OP/1/B/6250/078 AUXILIARY ELECTRIC BOILER 09/09/86

OP/2/B/6250/07A AUXILIARY STEAM SYSTEM ALIGNMENT 01/04/89

DOCUMENTS UTILIZED DURING E0P REVIEW

EMERGENCY PROCEDURE GUIDELINE SETPOINTS 05/14/86

CATAWBA NUCLEAR STATION EMERGENCY PROCEDURE GUIDELINES (PSTG) SEP 1988

WESTINGHOUSE OWNERS GROUP EMERGENCY RESPONSE GUIDELINES: HP VERSION 09/0l/83

REVISION 1A

CATAWBA NUCLEAR STATION WRITER'S GUIDE FOR EMERGENCY AND ABNORMAL 03/09/88

PROCEDURES

\

l

_ _ _ -----__ _ _ __ _ _ ___ - - - - . - - - - _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ - - - - - _ - - - - - - - - _ - . - - _ - --------.------------.-----a

- - - - - - - --

- ----- --- _ -- ---- _ _ ___ _ -- _,

4

. .

$ .

APPENDIX B

TECHNICAL AND HUMAN FACTORS COMMENTS

This appendix contains technical and human factors comments, observations and

suggestions for E0P improvements made by the team. Unless specifically stated,

these comments are not regulatory requirements. However, the licensee agreed

in each case to evaluate the comment and take appropriate action. These items

will be reviewed during a future NRC inspection as noted in paragraph 3.b.

I. General comments:

1. The SPD provides operator action setpoints which are required b/ the

CNS E0Ps. There is no SPD to serve A0P unique requirements.

2. Operation of the SSF is conducted under an OP. Since the use of

the SSF presumes the control room and the alternate shutdown panel

have been abandoned, SSF operation is an abnormal condition. SSF

operation should be governed by. a procedure which has the added

control and review provided by E0Ps and AOPs.

3. AP/0/A/5500/34,- secondary chemistry out of specification, treats

out-of-specification actions by a three case analysis and corrective

response process, by operating mode. The process is an excellent

method of treating this type problem.

4. In the opinion of the team, EP/1/A/5500/203, high pressurizer

pressure, and the companion modification which added the pressurizer

pressure (2400 psig logic to the integrity critical safety function

tree in procedure EP/1/A/5000/2 were a significant improvement over

the ERG integrity treatment.

5. Many differences exist between the ERG and the PSTG. The majority

are ERG mitigation sequence differences. The licensee stated that

all differences were evaluated and that deviations were documented

for those differences found to be safety significant. Those which

were not safety significant were not documented. The team considers

all mitigation sequence differences as safety significant.

6. E0P changes can be originated by CNS or the general office. Since

the CNS staff does not use the PSTG during the E0P change development

process, the burden of ensuring that the E0Ps conform to the PSTG

falls entirely upon the general office staff. In view of. the

importance of maintaining conformance, the PSTG must be utilized

during the development of E0P changes.

7. PSTG DEV Only EP 01 and 03 contain entry conditions; the remaining

E0Ps do not. The licensee stated that entry conditions were not

required because entry is by transfer from either EP 01 or EP 03.

The team noted that the PSTG lists entry conditions for all E0Ps.

The team considers the absence of entry conditions in E0Ps as a

deviation from the PSTG and ERG.

- __ . _ _ .. . - _ - _ _ _ __ i

_- _

'1

,.

. .

'. .

B-2

II. EP portion of the E0P comments:

1. EP/1/A/5000/01 Reactor Trip Or Safety Injection i

a. Step 18: The E0P and the PSTG deviate from the sequence in the

ERG and no deviation has been provided. In the ERG, " Check If

RCS Is Intact" occurs before " Check If SGs Are Not Faulted."

b. Step 5-14: These E0P steps and PSTG steps are listed as subse-

quent actions, unlike the ERG which list them as immediate

actions and no deviation is documented.

c. PSTG DEV Step 6: Steps 6 and 7 in EP01 are in the reverse order

of the PSTG.

d. Steps 7 and 10: These steps require the operator to check the

monitor light panel for proper S/I alignment. The monitor

lights are arranged in group.s. Not all lights in a given group

are lit on receipt of an S/I signal. This makes it much more

difficult for the operator to verify proper S/I equipment

alignment. The licensee had previously i'lentified these

discrepancies. Examples of these discrepancies are:

(1) On the Ss panel, the actuation signal for windows D6, 07,

E6, and E7 has been changed and they are no longer actuated

by an Ss signal.

(2) On the St panel, windows A6, A7, B6, and B7 light on an Ss

signal. The rest of the St panel is off on an Ss signal.

(3) On the St panel, the actuation signal for windows L11 and

L12 has been' changed to an Sp signal, but they are still

located on the St panel. l

(4) On the St panel, windows F4, F5, and F12 remain da) K for

approximately 15 to 20 minutes after an St signal. The rest

of the panel is lit during this time.

e. PSTG DEV Step 1: This step contains a kick-out to an A0P

unlike the corresponding step in the PSTG.

f. Step 4: None of the status light panels in the Control Room

have alpha numeric demarcation necessary for ease of location.

g. Step I.4, RNO: This step requires the operator to check

whether S/I is required based on a S/G pressure of 725 psig.

The "S/G PRESS" meters in the control room have indicated in red

"SI" at 710 psig. This Item was previously identified in NRC

INSPECTION REPORT NOS. 50-413/87-13 AND 50-414/87-13, 7.0.2 page

20, dated August 6, 1987. This is a safety significant item

which the licensee has committed to resolve. Resolution of this

.

.

issue will be identified as IFI 50-413,414/69-09-17.

_ - - _ _ _

- _ - - _ - -

.-

. .

%- .

B-3

h. Step 6c.: This step specifies operator action based on a meter

reading of 195 psig; a value which can not be read. The meter

has a range of 0 to 3000 psig and is graduated in 50 psig

increments.

1. Step 6d.: This step requires operator action at 500 gpm ND

flow; a value which cannot be read.

j. Enclosure 3: In the first and second bullet, the pot setting

corresponding to a pressure of 1090 psig is not included.

k. Step 18: This step requires operator action at a containment

sump level of 0.5 ft or greater. The operator can not dependably

read this value on the meter. 0.5 ft is-the bottom of the' meter

scale. In addition, the meter erroneously read 0.75 ft with a

dry. sump at the time of the inspection.

1. Step 29: The values given for PRT pressure, level, and tempera-

ture in each of the three bullets do not agree with either the

alarm manual or the setpoint document.

2. EP/1/A/5000/1A Reactor Trip Response

a. PSTG DEV Step 1 thru 3: Steps 1 thru 3 are not contained in the-

PSTG or the ERG.

b. PSTG DEV Step 4: This step is conducted prior to the corre-

sponding steps 1-9 of the PSTG vice after it.

c. Step 17 fourth bullet: The' step states "Stop one CF pump." If

only one CF pump is running, all CF would be lost.

3. EP/1/A/5000/1A1 Natural circulation cooldown

a. PSTG DEV Step 9: There is no caution prior to this step

indicating that S/I will unblock if reactor coolant system

pressure increases above 1955 psig as there is in the PSTG.

b. Step 11: The E0P and the PSTG do not indicate that subcooling

should be based on core exit thermocouple as does the ERG and

no deviation is documented,

'~

c. PSTG DEV Step 13: This step does not contain a substep which

ensures letdown is in service, nor its associated RNO, as does

step 12c of the PSTG.

d. PSTG DEV Step 17: This step does not contain a substep which

ensures letdown is in service, nor its associated RNO, as does

step 17c of the PSTG.

_ _ _ - _

- _ _

..,

. .

,

.._. ..

B-4

e. PSTG DEV Step 31: The caution concerning depressurizing the

reactor coolant system is contained after this step vice before

as in the PSTG. Additionally, this caution does not include a

statement directing the maintaining of .the subcooling require-

ments of step 17 as in the PSTG.

f. The training department does not have an established scenario

for training operstors in how to control the reactor.with a void

in the head. .

I

4. EP/1/A/5000/1B S/I Termination Following Spurious S/I

.a. Step 13c1 RNO: The labeling on the reference instrument is

misleading and makes location difficult. The meter actually

indicates the RN to the KC HX outlet flow,

b. Step 13c2 RNO: The step does not reference the procedure number

for aligning RN.

c. Step 29 page 25 first bullet: Valve 1-NM3A is not included. i

5. EP/1/A/5000/1C High energy line break inside containment

'a. Step 1, note: This note is actually a conditional step. It is

required within step 1 prior to the actions called for in

substep b.

b. Step 8, caution: This caution is actually an action step. It

is required within step 8b RNO, which also requires a condition

step beginning "IF PZR pressure is greater than 2315 PSIG."

c. Step 15, caution: This caution is an action step related to the

completion of step 15.

d. Step 18c: This step is not a substep required to accomplish

high level step 18. It constitutes an additional high level

step in this procedure.

e. Step 23c: The "CLOSE/ RESET" pushbutton on ISM-1 is a dual

purpose pushbutton used both to close the MSIVs as well as reset

the MSIV bypass valves. If the pushbutton is used while the

MSIVs are open, the MSIVs will close. This system holds consid-

erable risk of inadvertent closure of an MSIV, and this accident

has occurred in the past. Single purpose controls are required

to eliminate this problem.

f. Step 23d, note: This note is a caution identifying a potential

hazard for increased of fsite radiation release when dumping

steam from the S/Gs.

- - _ - - _ _ - _ _. _ - __. __ ._ _ _ _ _ _ - _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - -

._. . ._ - .

.

.. .

Uk ? - e

,

1

'

s o'

  • V ..

B-5

t

.

.

g. Step 23d, RNO c: .The' desired NC pressure referenced .in this

step is indicatedLin Step i23e on the fol1owing page. The

~

. - definition of desired NC pressure is required prior to' Step 23d,-

..

RNO.c.

L'

L

h. Step 26a, RNO 1: This step requires an additional caution to

identify the potential hazard related to de-energizing the.EHM

'

system within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> tfter actuation.

l 1.. Enclosure 1, section B: The information following the section

title "S/I Termination Criteria" is actually a note related to

,

execution of the entire section.

6. EP/1/A/5000/1C1 S/I Termination Following High Energy Line Break

. Inside Containment

a. PSTG DEV Step 5: Phase A containment is reset in step 5'of the

E0P.' The equivalent step is not performed until . step 13 of the

PSTG.

b. PSTG DEV Step 3a RNO: This step does not direct the operator

to the step " aligning charging. flow path" as does step 2 RNO of.

the PSTG.

c.

~

Step 4: There is no guidance on which indication toluse for

subcooling. There are three different -indications given on the

plasma. display,

d. Step 9a: There is no guidance defining " desired charging flow".

Transferring to auto with a large error signal' could cause- the

valve to fail,

e. Step 27: The usage of the 50 deg. F subcooling limit'is incon-

sistent with the ERG and the setpoint document.

7. . EP/1/A/5000/1C2 Post-loca cooldown and depressurization

a. Step.1, caution: This caution statement is actually two notes

providing -supplemental information for the performance:of step

1.

b. Step 4, caution: This caution includes a conditional statement

that is actually the first substep of step 4. It is required

prior to the action described in step 4a. l8

c. Step 9b, RNO: This conditional step is out of sequence. It is

required just prior to step 9d.

d. Step 9d, note: This note is actually a caution related to the

performance of step 9d. It also contains a conditional sequence

required just prior to step 9dl.

.1

!

-

___ _- ~

- _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _. . _ _ _ _ _ .

..

,

L '

.

j <. .

1

(

B-6

i.

e. . Step 12 b, RNO: This conditional step is out of sequence. It

is required just prior to step 12f.

f. Step 12d, caution: This caution statement is actually a note

that provides supplemental information for the performance of

the remainder of step 12.

g. Step 12f, note: This note is actually a caution related to

the performance of step 12f. .It also contains a conditional.

sequer.ce required just prior to step 12fl.

h. Step 12f4: The desired cooldown rate mentioned in this step

is defined quantitatively in step 12d on the previous page.

Quantitative definition of the cooldown rate is required in this

step to reduce operator memory burden and eliminate a transition-

backwards within the procedure.

1. Step 17, note: Both note statements are actually cautions

related to the performance of step 17. Identification of the

potential hazards are required within these cautions.

J. Step 20, caution: This caution contains an action step that is

required prior to the performance of step 20c. Identification

<

of the potential hazard is required within this caution,

k. Step 32, caution: This caution is actually a step related to

the performance of step 32.

1. Step 33, caution: This caution contains an action step related

to the performance of step 33. Identification of the potential

hazard is required within this caution.

8. EP/1/A/5000/1C3 Transfer to cold leg recirculation

a. Step 1: The E0P and the PSTG, prior to this step, do not have a

caution concerning taking manual actlon to restart safeguards

equipment if offsite power is lost as does the ERG and no

deviation is documented.

b. Step 2: The E0P and the PSTG perform this step before S/I is

reset vice after as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

c. PSTG DEV Step 6: The E0P does not contain the caution that if

pressure increases above the NI pump shutoff head the NI pumps

should be stopped.as does the PSTG.

d. PSTG DEV Step 13b, RNO: This step does not refer to FR-Z.1

" Response to high containment pressure", as does step 9c, RNO of

the PSTG.

- - _ _ - - - - _ _ _ - - _

- _ _ _ - _ - - _ _ _

.

. .

... . i

l

B-7 l

l

9. EP/1/A/5000/1C4 Transfer to hot leg recirculation

a. Step 1, caution: This caution is actually an action step 1

required at the beginning of the substeps to step 1.

10. EP/1/A/5000/1C5 Loss of Emergency Coolant Recirculation

a. Step 3c: This step does rot specify which subcooling indication

to use.

l

b. Steps 3c and d: These steps instruct the. operator to start and

stop the NV and NI pumps, but do not provide pump duty cycle

restrictions.

c. Step 5: This step and step 4 of 'the PSTG secure all NC pumps

unlike the ERG which leaves one running. No deviation is

documented. j

d. Enclosure 3 and other comparable enclosures: These enclosures

do not provide the number of the key necessary to unlock the CLA

isolation valve electrical breakers. During the inspection, the

wrong key for operating the breaker was issued to the operator.

e. Step 3d first bullet: This step does not use maintenance of -

subcooling greater than or equal to zero as a criteria.

i

f. Step 18 and 22: There is no direction after these steps to

return to the procedure in effect.

g. Step 19: There is no note warning the operator to monitor

containment sump level nor ND pump current.

11. EP/1/A/5000/1C6 Loca outside containment 1

a. No comments.

12. EP/1/A/5000/10 Steamline break outside containment

a. Step 3: This step and step 3 of the PSTG do not verify S/G l

blowdewn isolation of the faulted S/G(s) as does the ERG and no 1

deviation is documented. 3.

b. PSTG DEV Step 8: This step does not check intermediate range

flux prior to S/I termination as does step 7c of the PSTG.

c. PSTG DEV Step 8b: This step checks " total feed flow" where as

step 7b of the PSTG checks "CA flow". i

i

1

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ - - - _ )

_ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ - ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - . - _ _

_ _ - - -

.

. .

. .

B-8

13. EP/1/A/5000/1D1 S/I . Termination Following Steam Line Break

a. Step 3: The preferential order of depressurization differs from

the similar. step in other EPs.

b. Step 27b: The placement of the note obscures the step.

14. EP/1/A/5000/IE Steam generator tube rupture

a. Step 3b RNO 2d: Since the PORV is known to be.open, " ensure" is

incorrect. The appropriate action verb is close,

b. Step 3d RNO: As implied by the preceding caution, this step

works well unless the CA turbine pump is running as the only

pump; in that case it will shut the pump down. The RNO step

should be expanded to provide an action sequence in the event

the turbine pump is the only running pump.

c. Step 20b RNO la: The step directs that S/I pumps be started "to

restore subcooling and PZR level". The step should be revised

to ensure that' PZR level and subcooling are restored prior to

continuing to the sub step which transfers back to step 1..

d. Step 30a and elsewhere in other S/G TR procedures: The table

compares trends in pressurizer level and S/G level in an attempt

to determine subsequent mitigation strategy. Since pressurizer

level control is in automatic pressurizer level will remain

constant, within broad limits, in spite of water transfer

through the breat. For this reason, the team concluded .that

the table was not a suitable method of determining mitigation

strategy.

e. Step 34: The step does not direct periodic sampling of the

turbine buildina sump.

f. Enclosure 1, step F: The step does not place OAC point ID P0828

on a trend recorder.

g. Enclosure 1, step B: The S/I termination criteria parmits S/I

to be terminated prior to sufficient primary depressurization

following a S/G tube rupture.

15. EP/1/A/5000/IE1 Post-S/G TR cooldown and depressurization

l- a. Step 10, table: As discussed under E0P EP IE comments in this

l report, the table relating PZR and S/G level trends is not valid

if PZR level control is in automatic.

l

l

\ -

.

- . --_ _ .__- __ -- _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - ___ - -

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_., .

  • . . >

1

B-9 l

!

16. EP/1/A/5000/IE2 S/G TR alternate cooldown using backfill

a. The SPD value is 150 ppm for backfill margin, not 170 as shown

in the E0P. The latter is correct. This value is recalculated

for each fuel cycle. Rather than change the SPD each time, a

controlled document calculation. Sheet is issued to provide

updated backfill margin. The team considered this practice

acceptable-

b. Step 1, caution: The second bulleted caution is actually an

action step that is required for performance' of this procedure.

The third bulleted caution is actually a note along with an

action step that is required for the performance of this

procedure.

c. Step _5, caution: This caution is structured as an action and

fails to identify the related potential hazard.

d. Step 12, caution: This caution is actually a note. However it

has no relation to the remaining steps in this procedure. The

actions it addresses are included in the procedure referenced in

step 13, and that procedure contains the necessary information.

17. EP/1/A/5000/IE3- S/G TR with continuous NC leakage: subcooled recovery

a. Step 28b RNO: Typo; the reader should be referred to steps

33-35, not 32-35.

b. Caution before step 34: This discusses rack out of NI or NV

pumps; it should discuss rack out of pump breakers.

c. Step 37. There is no requirement listed for periodic HP

sampling of the Turbine Building sump.

18. EP1/A/5000/IE4 S/G TR with continuous NC system leakage: saturated

recovery

a. Step IES: Typo; change NV to NC.

b. Step 38: The Turbine Building sump should be sampled periodi-

cally.

19. EP/1/A/5000/IE6 S/G TR cooldown using ND

a. When the ERGS place decay heat removal in service with S/G TR,

the process is listed within each ERG. The licensee chose to j

create IE6 as a single procedure which covers all decay heat

removal with S/G TR via a transition to IE6. The team evaluated  !

this as a positive addition to the CNS E0PS.  !

i

i

1

_ _ _ _ _

-

. .

q

1: 43% which the

setpoint document describes as fuel mid plane level with zero

void fraction. The ERG requires this value to be 3.5 ft above

the bottom of active fuel with zero void fraction. The conflict

between the ERG 3.5 ft requirement and the CNS use of mid plane

is not a documented deviation. However, this difference from

the ERG was documented in a Duke letter of August 29, 1984 to

the NRC (Tucker /Denton).

e. CSF 2C: The CNS provides feed flow only to intact generators;

the ERG does not limit flow to only intact generators. No

deviation exists.

f. CSF 2D: When compared to the ERG, the changes made to the CNS

CSF integrity tree were significant enhancements which were

supported by valid deviations. In the opinion of the team, the

CNS treatment of the coolant integrity tree was excellent,

particularly with reference to cold overpressure protection.

g. PSTG DEV CSF 2E: The PSTG and the E0P logic use a containment

sump design flood level of 13 ft. The number in the SPD is

17 ft.

- _ _ - - - - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ . -

-_ _ - _ - . --_

.c

. ,1

AL .

B-11

,

21. EP/1A/5000/2A?. Nuclear Power Generation /ATWS

a. Step 4f RNO: The step directs opening of all PORVs and does not

allow for use of just one PORV.

22. EP/1/A/5000/2A2 Loss of Core Shutdown

a. Nc comment

23. ED/1/ /5000/2B1 Inadequate Core Cooling-

a. Step 24: This . step does not specify the minimum procedural

criteria for sta ting and running an NC pump.

b. Step 27: This step specifies' operator action based on a meter

reading of 195 psig; a value which can not be read. The meter

.has a range of 0 to 3000 psig and is graduated in 50 psig

increments.

c, Step 31: This step ' cannot be reached from any point in the

procedure.

24. EP/1/A/5000/2B2 Degraded Core Cooling

a. Step 17b: Step 17b list the D/P for two conditions (Train A

and Train _B) Steps 17c and 17d only ask for D/P. There is no

guidarre to the operator if, due to operating conditions, the

D/Ps were.different between train A and train B.

b. Step 24: There is no way to enter step 24. Step 23 is a GO T0

statement.

25. EP/1/A/5000/283 Saturated Core Cooling Conditions

a. No comment

l

26. EP/1/A/5000/2C1 Loss of secondary heat sink

a. Step 7: This step establishes CA flow to "at least one" S/G

which means ficw could be restored to all four S/Gs. Since the

S/Gs are " dry", CA flow should be established to the minimum

number of S/Gs required ta restore the heat sink to avoid

unnecessary thermal shock.

b. Step 8 and elsewhere in this and other procedures: The logic is

based upon total CA flow. No total CA flow meter exists. The

operator is required to sum flows from individual S/G sensors.

- _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ - _ . _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ _ . _ _ _ - _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ -

__ __

j

. .

I

e 4

,

B-12

c. Step 12 and elsewhere: The feed regulator bypass valves are

about 37 ft above the floor level. Since the valves have

vertical rising stems, it would be difficult to install chain

operators. Interference limits the potential for use of a

. ladder; no ladder long enough to reach the valves could be

found. No emergency lighting was available in the vicinity.

d. Str7 17 RNO 2: Typo; change "ro" to "no",

e. Steps 23bic & 23b2b: One step uses "C/L", the other "C-Leg" to

designate cold leg.

f. The spare annunciators on the MD panels are either black faced

or blank. A standi i convention has not been followed.

g. Step 37 RNO a, second alternative: The operator should be

required to ensure the head vents are closed prior to the

transfer to EP IC.

h. Encl 2: The procedure does not include a requirement to report

action complete to the Control hoom.

'27. EP/1/A/5000/2C2 S/G overpressure

a. Step 10, caution: This caution fails to identify the potential

nazard as required by the writers guide.

28. EP/1/A/5000/2C3 S/G high level

a. Step 10: The RNO directs action to be taken if the verifica-

tions in either step 10a or step 10b are not met. However, with

the existing step format the RNO only applies to step 10a.

29. EP/1/A/5000/2C4 Loss of normal steam release capabilities

a. Step 1, caution: This caution fails to identify the potential

hazard.

30. EP/1/A/5000/2C5 S/G low level

a. No comments

31. EP/1/A/5000/2D1 Imminent pressurized thermal shock condition

a. Step Id1 RNO: Typo, the step is supposed to read "NC" tempera-

ture, not "NV" temperature.

b. Enclosure 4: The enclosure is illegible.

_ _

_ _ _ _ _

.g'

. .

-t- . .

B-13

32. EP/1/A/5000/2D2 Anticipated pressurized thermal shock,

a. Enclosure 3: The enclosure is illegible.

33. EP/1/A/5000/2D3 High pressurizer pressure

a. Step 3: The if/then step may require initiation of NV aux

spray. The method is not specified. Use of NV aux spray is

infrequent. In the AOPs, when NV aux spray is required, the

method is specified.

b. Step 21: Use of the word maintain is incorrect. Boron addition

establishes a new concentration.

c. PSTG DEV Caution: The PSTG FR-P.3 initial caution concerning

restoration of pressurizer pressure control was not included in

the E0P. Procedore step 5 addresses the same subject but an

action step cannot fully accomplish the intent of a caution.

d. PSTG DEV E0P step 23 requirement to ensure adequate shutdown

margin before returning to the procedure in effect does not

appear in the PSTG. This is a valid addition to the E0Ps which

is not currently in the PSTG.

34. EP/1/A/5000/2E1 High con,ainment pressure

a. Step 2, note: This note is actually a caution. It requires

identification of the related potential hazard. In addition, an

action step is included in the note that is required prior to

performance of step 2a.

b. Step 3, caution: This caution statement is actually a condi-

tional step that applies throughout the procedure. It is

appropriately placed on a foldout page for this procedure,

c. Step 3, note: This note is actually a conditional step that is

required within the procedure prior to the actions included in

step 3.

d. Step 5, caution: This caution fails to identify the related

hazard. In addition, it is incorrectly structured as an action,

rather than as an alert to personnel about potential damage or

injury.

e. Step 7b, RNO: This step is overly complex, with multiple

possible meanings due to the combined use of the logic terms AND

and OR.

i

a------ _ - - . _

_ _ _

.

..

'

.. 3

t . i

B-14

I

E f. Step 11, note: The first bulleted item in this note is unneces-

sary. This concern is a basic training issue, and need not

be included as a note here. The second bulleted item is a

conditional step. It is required within the procedure prior to

the actions included in step 11.

g. Enclosure 4, step 2c: The bulleted items within this step are

actually conditional sequences and are not in accordance with

the format for logic statements found in the writer's guide.

35. EP/1/A/5000/2E2 High containment sump level

a. Step 2a: The sequencing of containment isolation valves within

this step is awkward ' and inconsistent with the placement of

valve switches on the control boards.

36. EP/1/A/5000/2E3 High containment radiation level

a. No comment

37. EP/1/5000/2F1 Pressurizer flooding

a. Step 2: From the definitions in the writer's guide, the use of

-verify followed by ensure is incorrect. Verify does not permit

a status change; ensure requires a status change if not as

listed.

38. EP/1/A/5000/2F2 Low NC system inventory

a. No comments.

39. EP/1/A/5000/2F3 Voids in reactor vessel

a. Step 1: There is no caution prior to this step nor step 1 of

the PSTG warning against use of this procedure if a controlled

cooldown is in progress and a void in the head is expected, a:

does the ERG and no deviation is dacumented.

b. Step 4, RNO b(2): This step does not give guidance defining

" minimum charging".

c. Step 14: This step and step 9 of the PSTG are not preceded by

a caution alerting the operator to evaluate the status of any

reactor coolant pump prior to starting it if seal cooling

had previously been lost as does the ERG and no deviation is

documented.

d. Step 14: This step and step 9 of the PSTG are not preceded by a

note informing the operator of the priority for starting reactor

coolant pumps as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

.

______ -. - _ ____ _ _ ____ - - _ - - - -_ . _ _ _ _

.. - .- _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . .

.

.

. . 4

4. .

B-15

e. PSTG DEV Step 17: This step does not direct the closing of

both valves in a vent line with a failed valve as does step 12

of the PSTG.

f. Step 20d: This step sends an operator inside containment with

up to 6% hydrogen concentration present,

g. PSTG DEV Step 26: This step does not direct the closing of

both valves in a vent line with a failed valve as does step 20

of the PSTG.

40. EP/1/A/5000/03 Loss of all ac power

a. PSTG DEV This procedure does not list entry conditions at the

beginnini of the procedure as does the PSTG. The E0P as written

contains symptoms at the beginning of the procedure. However,

these are not clear enough to prevent inadvertent entry into the

procedure.

b. Step 3, RNO: The valves in this step which are ensured to be

open will not have power available to their control board

indications during a loss of all ac power.

c. Step'3: The E0P and the PSTG, in this and subsequent steps do

not list " Verify NC System isolation" and " Ensure CA flow to

S/G(s)" as immediate actions as required in the ERG. The PSTG

does not specify any immediate actions for any procedures

contrary to the ERG and no deviation is documented.

d. Step 7: The E0P and the PSTG do not contain a caution prior to

this step alerting the operator to reset an S/I signal to permit

manual loading of equipment as does the ERG and no deviation is

documented.

e. Step 7: The E0P and the PSTG do not contain a step prior to

this step to ensure that CST inventory is conserved for makeup

to the steam generators as does the ERG and no deviation is

documented.

f. Step 7: This step and step 12 of the PSTG check steam generator

isolation but do not address feedwater isolation as does the ERG

and no deviation is documented.

g. Step 10: This step and step 15 of the PSTG direct maintaining

steam generator levels at no-load level instead of maintaining

them within the band established in the ERG and no deviation is

documented.

h. Step 11a: This step and step 16a of the PSTG do not contain

adverse containment values for steam generator narrow range

level a* Joes the ERG and no deviation is documented.

- - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ ._. _ _ . _ . . _ - _ _ _ _ _ _

_ . _ _ . - - _ . __

k -

p ..

? .. ~

.

  • . .

f

'

I

( B-16

i

L

i . Step 11b: This step directs an operator to unlock valves.

These valves do not have locks on them and are not designated as

l.- locked valves on the print.

J. Step 12b: This step directs an operator to ensure that ICA-6 is

closed. This valve can not be operated locally with ladders

provided.

k. Step 12d: This step checks hotwell level < 6 inches. The

required meter is graduated in feet.

1. PSTG DEV Step 12e: This step does not isolate the CA pump

suction from condensate grac'e sources as does step 17e of the

PSTG.

m. Step 16e: This step references figure 6.10 of the curve book.

The correct figure is 6.9.

n. PSTG DEV Step 16e: This step maintains S/G pressure at a value

based on NC criticality temperature limic. The PSTG directs

maintaining S/G pressure at 10f psig.

o. Step 18: This step and step 23 of the PSTG do not address

checking source range instrumentation to verify reactor shutdown

as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

p. Step 27: This step and step 32 of the PSTG are not preceded by

a caution against exceeding the capacity of the power source as

does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

41. EP/1/A/5000/3A Loss of all ac power recovery without S/I required

a. PSTG DEV Step Sh: This step ensures only %e 4V pump is

running whereas step 4e of the PSTG directs star + mg all avail-

able NV pumps.

b. Step 7e: This step directs establishing " desired charging flow"

and does not define it as a value comparable to normal NI pump

miniflow as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

c. Step 10: The E0P and PSTG do not contain a note prior to this

step to prevent inadvertent start of the motor drlven auxiliary'

feedwater pumps as does the ERG and no deviatien is dccumented.

d. PSTG DEV Step 15: This step does not start an additional NV

pumn as does step 14a of the PSTG.

e. Step 16: This step and step 15b of the PSTG do not check let-

down in service n,or direct use of auxiliary spray to control NC

system pressure as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

-_ . _ - _ . - _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - - - - _ - _ - - _ - - - - - _ _ - -

-____ _ ___ - - - -

.

.

t- .

'

B-17

42. EP/1/A/5000/3B Loss of all ac power recovery with S/I required

a. Step 8: The E0P and the PSTG do not contain a step prior to

this step which places the containment spray pump switches in

standby as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

b. Step 8: The E0P and PSTG do not contain a note prior to this

step to prevent inadvertent start of the motor driven auxiliary

feedwater pumps as does the ERG and no deviation is documented.

c. Step 11: This step and step 10 of the PSTG direct transition to

E-0, " Reactor trip or safety injection" instead of E-1, " Loss of

reactor or secondary coolant" as does the ERG and no deviation '

is documented.

III. AP portion of the E0P comments:

1. AP/0/A/5500/20 Loss of nuclear service water

a. Paragraph A, purpose: On line two, after " loss of RN train or"

some wording has been omitted. The remainder of the sentence

does not make sense.

2. AP/0/A/5500/22 Loss of instrument air

a. Page 1: The enclosure listing and the actual enclosures are

untitled. This makes selection of the proper enclosure diffi-

cult.

b. Pg. 1, step B: Use of "and/or" is prohibited by the writer's

guide,

c. Pg.5, step 6: Neither the procedure nor enclosure 3 note that

realignment of the turbine aux feed pump to S/G A or C requires

operation of CA38A or CA668,

d. Encl. 1, pg. 15: Contrary to most CNS drawings, drawings j

CN1594-1.2, CN1594-1.3, CN2594-1.2 and CN 2594-1.3 do not the

'

list fail position for air operated valves.

e. Encl. 1, pgs. 20 & 21: The fail positions for IKC-122 and

2KC-122 are open, not closed as shown.

f. Encl. 1, pgs. 24 & 26: Valves 1NV-309 and 2NV-309 are missing

from the list.

g. Encl. 2, step 3: This step requires the IAEs to install port-

able air bottles and open some letdown valves. IAE personnel

are not trained on the A0Ps. No IAE procedure reference is

provided.

-

_- ._ . _ _ .

.

e.- s,

. .

B-18 I

t

i

h. Encl. 2, step 4: The order of the two "or" gated substeps

appears to be reversed since opening the 45 gpm letdown orifice

would allow the control room to control inventory with NV-11A.

i

1. Encl. 3, step 2: It is not clear in this step whether the

" check and "IF" statements apply to at least one, more than

one, all, etc. S/Gs?

3. AP/0/A/5500/34 Secondary chemistry out of specification

a. No comments.

4. AP/1/A/5500/02 Turbine generator trip

a. Step Cla: The step does not give the expected P-9 light status

or panel location.

b. Step Did: Typo, Should be "D.3" not "d.3".

c. Step D1 RNO: Typo, Should be "D.2" not "d.2".

d. Step 05 Note: The note is unclear in that it- does not specify

" Transformer" cooling banks.

e. Step D7 RNO first bullet: There are two switches with the same

name. Currently the operator cannot distinguish the difference

in switches.

f. Step D7 RNO second bullet: There are two switches with the

same name. The operator neads to be able to distinguish the

difference in switches.

g. Step D13: The step does not provide an RNO if the steam dumps

are not available.

h. Step D2e: The procedure does not address the method of rod

control below 15% power.

5. AP/1/A/5500/03 Load Rejection

a. Step D4 note: There is no operator guidance given as to where to

read the 3 deg. delta Tave-Tref,

b. Step D10 Note: See 4.d above,

c. Step D14c RNO third bullet: There are two switches with the

same name. The operator needs to be able to distinguish the

difference in switches.

_ _ _ - - _ __. _

- _. _ _ _

.

4 e

'

' ?. : .

}

d-19

1

d. . Step D14c- RNO second bullet: There are two switches with the

same name. The operator needs to be able to distinguish the

difference in switches.

e. Step D15 the second bullet: The graduation of the meter is such

that an. operator can not determine + or .1 KV .

.f. Steps D16c rnd d: The steps contain six separate actions and

they are written in two steps.

g. Steps D16f and g: The steps contain six separate actions and

they are written in two steps.

h. Step D18: The temperature given for the PRT action point is

inconsistent'with the temperature given in the E0P.

6. AP/1/A/5500/04 Loss of reactor coolant pump

a. No comments

7. AP/1/A/5500/05 ECCS actuation during plant shutdown

a. Step 15c: The list of OAC point identifiers is inconsistent and

not in accordance with the placement of these points on the

computer screens. However, all of the information provided on

these computer points is available on the graphics 25 computer

screen.

b. Step 15d: The information provided by' all of the listed 0AC

computer points is available .on the graphics 25 screen, along

with the information required in step 15c.

c. Step 16, note: This note is actually a caution related to the

performance of step 16. It lacks identification of the poten-

tial hazard of seal failure.  !

d. Step 17: This step fails to identify the operating procedure

required to accomplish the actions listed. An alternative to

referencing the operating procedure is to specify the required i

number of chillers to pumps for these actions.

e. Step 19: This step includes reference to the NR system. This

system is not in service at CNS and is not intended for any

future use.

f. Step 25a, RNO: This step includes an overly complex layering of

logic sequences.

g. Step 32, caution: This caution is actually an action step

required within the procedure prior to performance of step 32.

- _ - _ _ _ _ _ -__ _ . _ - - _ -

_ __- _ _

.

. .

'

. ..

B-20

h. Step 32u: The list of valves included in this step is awkward

and inconsistent with the placement of the ' valve switches on the

. control boards.

1. Step 33, caution: This caution is actually an action step

required within the procedure prior to performance of step 33.

8. AP/1/A/5500/06 Loss of S/G feedwater

a. No comments

9. AP/1/A/5500/07 Loss of normal power

a. No comments

10. AP/1/A/5500/08 Malfunction of reactor coolant pumps

a. Case II, step 6e: This step does not give guidance defining

" normal" for " lwr brg temp".

11. AP/1/A/5500/10 Reactor coolant leak-

a. Step 1, caution: This caution lacks identification of the

potential hazard and incorrectly includes use of the logic term

WHEN.

b. Step 5, note: This note is actually a conditional step required

within the procedure prior to performance of step 5.

c. Step 8: The first bulleted item in the step incorrectly refer-

ences OP/1/A/6200/02 with the title to OP/1/A/6100/02. The

title is correct, however, the correct procedure number is the

latter.

d. Enclosure 2, note 1: This note is actually an- action step

required prior to performance of this enclosure,

e. Enclosure 2, page 13, caution: This caution incorrectly

contains a directive to the operator.

f. Enclosure 2, page 16, step 6a: This step references

OP/2/6250/07A, Enclosure 4.3. A 35 foot extension ladder

necessary to perform the procedural actions is dedicated for NE0

use at E33, TB-568. This ladder may be required for performance

of the procedure enclosure. During the inspection walkthrough,

the wrong type of ladder (12 foot step ladder) was found at the

dedicated ladder location.

g. Enclosure 2, page 16, step 6al: This step fails to identify the

required operating procedure enclosure number.

L__----_-----------_- - - - - -

-

y

..

t' 4,

.

f .

I

1' l

, 8-21 -

l

l

I

h. Enclosure 2, page 16, step 6a2 This step fails to identify the l

required operating procedure enclosure number.

1. Enclosure 2, page 19, step 1: "NC Pmp A (B,C,D) #2 Seal S-Pipe

Hi/Lo Lvl" annunciator lights are removed as temporary modifi-

cations during outages. However, these lights are referenced

in this enclosure with no indication that they may not be

available.

12. AP/1/A/5500/11 Inadvertent NC system depressurization

a. Case I, step C1, caution: This caution is actually a condi-

tional step that applies during the performance of the entire

procedure. Correct placement would be on a foldout page to the I

procedure.

b. Case I, step 4, caution: This caution is actually a step that

is required within the procedure prior to the performance of

step 4.

c. Case I, step 5, caution: This caution is actually a step that

is required within the procedure prior to the performance of

step 5.

d. Case II, step C1, caution: This caution is actually a condi-

tional step that applies during the performance of the entire

procedure. Correct placement would be on a foldout page to the

procedure.

e. Case III, step C1, caution: This caution is actually a condi-

tional step that applies during the performance of the entire

procedure. Correct placement would 'Je on a foldout page to the

procedure.

13. AP/1/A/5500/12 Loss of charging or letdown

a. Case I, step C1, caution: See 11b above.

b. Case I, step C3, caution: This caution fails to identify the

potential hazard. In addition, it.contains a conditional stop

that is required within the procedure prior to step 3.

c. Case I, step 01: See 7e above.

d. Case I, step D2e, RNO: This step also requires a caution to

address the consequences of exceeding 1 degree F per minute

cooldown on any NV pump.

____ __

-_ -- -____ _ - - -

.

. .

j

u..

.

1

B-22

l

e; Case I, step 6, caution: The first bulleted item in this

caution is actually a step that is required within the procedure

prior to performance of step 6. The second bulleted item is a

caution, however, it fails to identify the potential hazard.

f. Case II, step C1, caution: See 11b above.

g. Case II, step D1: See 7e above.

14. AP/1/A/5500/13 Boron dilution

a. No comment

15. AP/1/A/5500/14 Control rod misaligned

a. No comment

16. AP/1/A/5500/15 Rod control malfunction

a. No comment

17. AP/1/A/5500/16 Malfunction of nuclear instrumentation system

a. Case I, step 3c: This step directs , ensuring adequate shutdown

margin but does not reference the procedure which is Lsed to

accomplish this.

b. Case III, step C.1: This step does not provide the setpoints

associated with the parameters to determine if a reactor trip is

required.

c. Case IV, step 2: This step directs monitoring nuclear instru-

mentation but does not provide any actions to be taken if the

listed conditions are not met.

18. AP/1/A/5500/17 Loss of control room

a. Communications between unit ASPS will be lost if PBX battery

depletion renders the station dial phone system inoperative.

Since the string phone circuits are unit unique and no radios

are repositioned at or carried to the ASPS, there are no

alternative communications options.

b. The procedure does not specify which of the two separate string

phone circuit; -tauld be used for communications within a unit

when the ASP or the SSF is activated. The walkthrough operator

was not certain which was correct.

i

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

__-__ ____-____ - _ __ -

s

. .

.* , .

B-23

c. Enclosure 1, step 1: During the walkthrough, the ASP operator

was unable to simulate completion of this step because he lacked

tools: to loosen the front panel bolts. Tools were available in

a locked tool box in the AFWPTCP room but the ASP operator did

not have the combination.

d. Contrary to instructions posted on the unit one ASP A panel

access cover plate, the panel plate was unlocked, the cicsure

bolts were removed and the access was open.

e. Enclosure 1, step 6 RN0: This step neglects the case where one

pump fails to start but the other is available. The problem

probably stems from the prohibited use of "and/or".

f. Enclosure 1, step 10 RNO a5: This double action statement

should be split into two elements.

g. Enclosure 1, step 10 b2c: The intent of this step is to reach

and maintain ~25% PZR level . The RNO side accomplishes this.

Due to the lack of an AER action verb, if level is already ~25%

the operator will continue without instruction to maintain level

~25%

h. Enclosure 1, step 11a: The results of the AER and RNO sides are

different. The RNO side adjusts pressure to ~2235 psig and

maintains it there. The AER side checks for pressure ~2235 psig

and if satisfied continues without instruction to maintain that

pressure.

1. Enclosure 1, step 12: The use of " adequate normal" instead of

just " normal" is confusing and unnecessary.

j. Enclosure 1, step 13 RNO 2: Delete typo ":" on line 5.

k. Enclosure 1, step 14: The team noted that the file of data book

excerpts maintained at the ASP did not include the cooldown

limits curve.

1. Enclosure 1, ste, 29 and elsewhere within the E0Ps: Grammar;

the two EPIP prccedures listed concern classification and

notification, not just notification.

l m. Enclosure 1, step 23 and the preceding caution: The cooling

l tower fans are no longer required beyond this step in the

! procedure. This step and the caution may be replaced by an

action statement shutting down the fans.

l

l

t

I

.. . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ -

.-

. .

4 .

B-24-

n. Enclosure 3, step 3: Operation of the MODS under normal current

load would blow. up the breaker cabinet. Although there are

interlochs to prc<ent this and operators are trained on breaker /

MOD sequence of operation, the.EOP step is written with bullets

indicating that sequence is not important. The step should

provide a mandatory sequence and should be accompanied by an

appropriate caution,

o. Enclosure 3, step 5: The reciprocating charging pump for unit I

has been tagged out of service awaiting repair since July 1988.

Two operators indicated that the positive displacement NV pumps

on both units have.been difficult to maintain. If this service

were typical for these pumps, their unavailability would ad-

veesely impact the E0Ps. Licensee management assured the team

at the exit that the availability of these pumps is improving.

p. Enclosure 7, step 4 RNO 1: Use of "out-of-specification" is

confusing since the specification is not directly identified nor

is it conventional to describe a containment 3 psig ESF signal

as containment "out-of-specification"

19. AP/1/A/5500/18 High activity in reactor coolant

a. No comments

20. AP/1/A/5500/19 Loss of residual heat removal

a. Case I, step C1, note 1: This note is overly detailed. It is

actually an action step that is required prior to step 01.

b. Case I, step D8e, caution: This caution is actually a note, as

well as an action step that is required prior to performance of

step 08e.

c. Case I, step D9, caution: See 20b above.

d. Case I, step D11f: This step fails to identify the necessary

enclosure to the operating procedure referenced. In addition,

only a limited number of the valves listed in the operating

procedure enclosure are applicable in this case,

e. Case II, step C1, note 1: See 20a above.

f. Case II, step D3, caution: This caution is actually a note,

however, it does not apply to performance of step D3.

g. Case III, step C1, note 1: See 20a above,

h. Faclosure 2, step A, caution: This caution contains an action

step that is required within the procedure prior to performance

of step C.

- - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - _ _ - _ _ __. ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ._ _ - _ - _ _

-- _ _ _ _- = _ _ _ - _ _ _ -

l4 '

<

x x

  • + ac

.B-25

'

i '. Enclosure 5,fstep A, note: This note is actually an action step

that.is~ required prior to performance of step A.

' j. Enclosure 5, step A3, caution: .This caution fails to identify

'the potential. hazard. In addition, it contains an action step

~

required within the procedure prior to performance ~ of step. A3.

21. AP/1/A/5500/21 Loss of component cooling

a. Step 3, RNO a.2: The valves required to be shut by this step do

not have locations listed. Due to the fact that these valves

are not located in proximity to the equipment being isolated an

operator would have difficulty closing these -valves' in a timely

manner.

22. AP/1/A/5500/23 Loss of condenser vacuum

a. No comment

. 23. AP/1/A/5500/24 Loss of containment integrity

- a. -Section B,' case II: This section has multiple possible meanings

between the second and third bulleted items due to the combined

use of logic terms AND and OR.

b. Case I,. step D2a: The four hour time frame indicated in .this -

step is in conflict with Tech. Spec. 3.6.1.1 LCO which indicates-

that containment integrity must be restored within one hour. A

justification for the basis of this conflict is required.

24. - AP/1/A/5500/25 Damaged spent fuel

a. Case 1, step'c2-4: This equipment is infrequently operated

and the walkthrough NE0 had difficulty locating it. It's

location is not specified.

b. Case 1, step d3 and elsewhere'in other procedures: This step

requires ensuring containment integrity; the technical specifi-

cation reference applies to all penetrations. The walkthrough

operators were uncertain of which of several alternative methods

of ensuring integrity applied.

25. AP/1/A/5500/26 Loss of refueling canal or spent fuel pool level

a. Incident to the walkthrough, the team inspected alarm response

procedure IAD-13 E2 which listed minimum fuel pool level as 36.6

ft., the alarm setpoint, and referenced technical specification 3.9.10. The tech spet requires a minimum of 23 ft. of water

above the top of the fuel. This equates to a level of 36.923 ft.

.

u-mmm_-_u_m_u.__m-_m _m_._m _ __m__m

- - . .. _ _ - - _ -

,

e

  • .

. . .

. . ...

B-26

T;,e licensee indicated that tha cror had been identified

previously and that procedure and alarm setpoint changes were

being held in abeyance pending results of a study concerning

tech spec applicability and compliance in the event of a

damaged, jammed or cocked assembly in the pool. The daily

surveillance procedure minimum level was 37.6 ft.

-

,

m.,---___--.-__.--- - - . . - - - - - - . - - - - ---

- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -

..

. .

  • -

. ..

APPENDIX C

WRITER'S GUIDE COMMENTS

This appendix contains writer's guide and human factors comments, observations

and suggestions for E0P improvements made by the team. Unless specifically

stated, these comments are not regulatory requirements. However, the licensee

agreed in each case to evaluate the comment and take appropriate ection.

These items will be reviewed during a future ' NRC inspection as notea ir.

paragraph 3.c.

I. Deviations from the Writer's Guide

A sample of the E0Ps and AOPs were evaluated for deviations from the

Catawba writer's guide. Types of deviations noted are characterized in

this section and accompanied by a list of examples of the specific devia-

tions. Note that some steps contain more than one example.

1. The following steps violate writer's guide directions for the

structure of logic statements:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 5 RNO

8 RNO

EP/1/A/5000/1C2 33

EP/1/A/5000/1E2 2

6

6 RNO

EP/1/A/5000/2C2 10

EP/1/A/5000/2E1 5

EP/1/A/5000/2E2 3

AP/1/A/5500/05 D4

07

D7 RNO

D12

013

D22 RNO

D25 RNO

D34

D30

D35 RNO

AP/1/A/5500/10 D4

l D8

l

AP/1/A/5500/12 Case I C3 RNO

02 RNO

D6

Case II D2 RNO

D4 RNO

\

r

:

1

. .

.-

.. <

C-2

AP/1/A/5500/19 Case I D7

D10

D]1 RNO

D14

D14 RNO

Case II D2

D2 RNO 1

l

D6

D8

Case III D15 RNO

AP/1/A/5500/24 Section B Case I

Case II

Case I D1

D2

D3

Case II C1

The team reviewed 10 A0Ps for compliance to the writer's guide.

Generally, in the AOPs reviewed where the conjunctions "and" and

"or" were used, they were f.ormatted as if they were being used as

logic terms.

2. The - following steps violate writer's guide directions for the

structure of transition steps:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 14

26

EP/1/A/5000/1C2 18 RNO

25 RNO

33 RNO

EP/1/A/5000/2E1 13

AP/1/A/5500/05 C1 RNO

D1 i

D2 RNO

D5 RNO

D7 RNO

D13

D20 RNO

D23 RNO I

D25 RNO >

D27

D27 RNO

D28 RNO

DhD

D31

D32

D34

D35

D35 RNO

. _ - _ _ _ _ _ _-

, - - _ - _ - _ . - .. _ _ __ _ _ . . _ _

.

. .

1

4. .

C-3

- AP/1/A/5500/10 01 RNO

D3 RNO

D4

D5 RNO

D6

D6 RNO

D7

D8

AP/1/A/5500/1.1 Case ' D6

Case III D5

.AP/1/A/5500/12 Case I C3 RNO

D5 RNO

07

D8

D9

Case II D2 RNO

D4 RNO

D5 RNO

D7

D9

DIO

D11

AP/1/A/5500/19 Case I D1

D4 RNO

D5

D7

D8

D8 RNO

09

D11

D11 RNO

D12

013

D14 RNO

Case II D2 RNO

D3 RNO

D4

05

Case III D1 RNO -

D2 RNO

D4

D5

D7

D11 RNO

D12

D13

D14

D15

- - _ _ _ . - _ _ _ _. _ _ _

- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ . _ _ - _-__ _ _ _ ._ ._ __ ___ - _ - -

.

, .

.

C-4

i

AP/1/A/5500/24 Section B Case I-

Case I D1

D2

D4 RNO

Case II D1

02

3. The many deviations from the writer's guide in the structure of and

use of cautions and notes is described in appendix B of this report.

4. The writer's guide defines a format for presenting plant expected

responses. The following steps do not use the defined format for

expected responses:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 3

4

8

10

20

20 RNO

21

EP/1/A/5000/1C2 11

12

20

31

EP/1/A/5000/2E1 10

EP/1/A/5000/2F2 1

The team reviewed 10 AOPs for compliance to the writer's guide.

Almost every expected response listed in the .AOPs reviewed was

formatted incorrectly.

5. The writer's guide states that common English grammar should be

applied within the procedures and that the verb is the most important

word in an action step. The following steps lack a verb:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 1

2

4 RNO

5 RNO

7

9

9 RNO

12

15 RNO

23

23 RNO

24

27 RNO

- .. - - - _ _ -

_ _ _ - .. - . _ -

.,

-

3.:

.'e e-

.'., . . .

C-5

EP/1/A/5000/102 4

5

5 RNO

8

9 RNO

12

12.RNO

19

30-

EP/1/A/5000/IE2 5 RNO

9 RNO

10

EP/1/A/5000/2C2 9

EP/1/A/5000/2C4 3

EP/1/A/5000/2E1 1

8 RNO

AP/1/A/5500/05 C2 RNO

D2

03

D5

D6

'D7

DIO

D15

D23 RNO

D24

D25

D28

D34

D35

D35 RNO

AP/1/A/5500/10 D1 RNO

D2 RNO i

D5 RNO

D8'

I

AP/1/A/5500/11 Case I D1 RNO

D3

D6

Case II C1 RNO

D1 RNO

Case III C1 RNO l

D1 RNO l

D3 RNO

__ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ .

_ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ -

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -

.

" ,,- .

. ,

C-6

l' AP/1/A/5500/12 Case I D2

D2 RNO

D3 RNO

Case II C2

D1

D4

l

AP/1/A/5500/19 Case I D6

D8

08 RNO

,

'

Case III D8

D11

D12

AP/1/5500/24 Case I D1

Case II C1

6. The following steps lack a subject:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 2 RNO

EP/1/A/5000/102 34

AP/1/A/5500/05 D15 RNO

D22 RNO

AP/1/A/5500/12 Case II D2 RNO

7. Location information for annunciator lights was missing or incomplete

in a number of procedures. The following examples lack either panel

number or grid location number:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 22

EP/1/A/5000/2C4 3

3 RNO

AP/1/A/5500/02 D1

AP/1/A/5500/02 C1

DS

AP/1/A/5500/11 A

l

]

1

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

. _ _ _ . __ ._ -. __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_- _ _ . _

- _ _

.

  • ~' a

6 . - .$ '

C-7

8. The writer's guide. indicates that procedure nomenclature that exactly.

replicate; plant labels'should be set off by quotation marks. The.

following steps use quotation marks for nomenclature that does not

exactly match that in the control room and plant:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 2

4

-

6

7

10

17

20

22 ,

23

23 RNO

EP/1/A/5000/IC2 1

6

7

30

33

EP/1/A/5000/IC4 2

EP/1/A/5000/2C4 2

3

EP/1/A/5000/2E1 8

9. The following steps contain lists of valves that'are not arranged in

an order consistent with their placement on the control board:

EP/1/A/5000/2E2 2

AP/1/A/5500/05 3

10. Appendix 5 to .the writer's guide states that a colon should be used

to indicate substeps or that a list follows. The following

procedure steps lacked use of a colon in this manner:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 1

4

5 RNO

7'

8

9

14 1

15

l 17

'

20 RNO  ;

l

22

_ - _ - _ _

. . _ _ . - _ _ . - - _ _

.

-

,; .

.

. .

$- ....

', C-8

' '

.

s 24

26

1 27

EP/1/A/5000/ ICE 1-

2

4

'

5

6 RNO

7

9

10

11

12

14

15

17

18

20

21

22

23

2A

25

26

27

28

29

31

33

'

EP/1/A/5000/104 1

2

EP/1/A/5000/1C6 1

'

2

3

4

EP/1/A/5000/IE2 3

4

5

6

9

10

EP/1/A/5000/2C2 3

6

7

8

9

l

l

l

_ - _ _ - _ .

_ _ _ _ _ _ _. ._. . _ _ . . _

_ _ _ _

.

. .

.. ..

C-9

EP/1/A/5000/2C4 2

3

EP/1/A/5000/2E1 3

7

10

11

EP/1/A/5000/2E2 2

EP/1/A/5000/2F2 2

3

4

5

AP/1/A/5500/05 D7

D8

D24

D29

AP/1/A/5500/19 Case I D4

Case II D2

D3

D4

Case III D3

D6

D10

D11

D12

11. The writer's guide states that all steps should be written in active

voice. The following steps are written in passive voice:

EP/1/A/5000/1C 4c RNO

28

II.-Inadequacies in the Writer's Guide

In order to assure consistency within and between procedures and to retain

that consistency over time and through personnel changes, the writer's

guide must thoroughly address each aspect of the procedures and must

define restrictively the methods designated for use.

1

The Catawba writer's guide contains a number of areas where lack of

restrictive or thorough guidance has led to problems and inconsistencies

in the E0Ps and AOPs. These weaknesses are as follows:

1: 1. The writer's guide describes a structure for consequential steps

l that combines a transition forward and a "WHEN condition X, THEN

l

transition backward in the procedure." This system is overly com-

plex. It is difficult to perform and provides no method of reminding

the operator to transition backward to the original step.

- _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ . -_ __ _

__ . _ _ _ _ _ . - - - - - - . _ _ _ - _ . - - _ --_

6

4'

. ..

M  :.

A '

C-10

s" .

'

'2, The guidance on preparation of notes and cautions improperly allows-

.the use,of logic-sequences in these statements.

3. The instructions for use of "and" and "or" asi conjunctions directs -

a use of these terms when unnecessary, thereby contributing to confus- -

ing and overly complex action steps.

.4. The writer's guide allows. the use of the logic term "if" as part of

other sentences (for example, " check if"Jand " determine . if"). These

forms dilute the usefulness of logic' statement structure and could .

lead to confusion.

5.' The~ description of procedure substep numbering, bulleting and inden--

tation described in the writer's guide does not provide adequate

guidance. As -a result, the procedures contain numerous examples of

duplicate step numbering and steps where the relationship between a

step and.its RNO step is not clear.

6. 'The guidance on structure of subs'teps does not adequately define the

difference between substeps as action steps and substeps. as lists.

~ It allows inconsistent use of complete sentences and incomplete

sentences.

7. The peacekeeping space system defined by the writer's guide provides

checkoff' spaces at high level steps and in sequences of'four or more

-

. bulleted substeps. When a step includes several pages of substeps,

this method does not provide ahquate peacekeeping and it requires

operators to turn- backwards in the procedure to find the checkoff

-mark. The ' system also also. lacks sufficient peacekeeping for lists

of controls.

8. The writer's guide states that procedure steps should have one ' main

action and that multiple actions with a step are to be avoided.

However, numerous examples of multiple actions with steps were found.

9. .The writer's guide does not adequately address nor require some

method 'of reminder to operators of steps that may be performed

at some time in the future (e.g. , "WHEN condition, THEN action"

sequences).

10. The writer's guide allows the listing of partial valve numbers in a

horizontal list following one complete valve number. This method is

s unsatisfactory. It circumvents the writer's guide method for place-

keeping and increases the possibility of error or confusion.

11. The writer's guide defines the transition tern REFER T0" as indi-

cating that an operator will leave his place in the procedure to

go elsewhere, and then later return. This is in contrast to the PSTG

definition and the common definition of " REFER T0" as indicating

concurrent execution of steps.

_ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ -

-- _

- -_ - -- _. - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ - . _ _ _ _ _ - _ .

,.

. '.* .

C-11

12. The ' dictionary of acronyms and abbreviations in the writer's ' guide

lists a number of abbreviations for which there are two definitions

and a number of definitions for which there are two acronyms or

abbreviations. Elimination of all dual use or dual definition

entries is necessary.

13. The constrained language list in the writer's guide contains a number

of words that have the same meaning and others that ciffer only

-slightly in meaning. Elimination of multiple approved vocabulary

having the same meaning will increase ease of procedure comprehension

and clarify distinctions between those words that are similar but

different.

14. The writer's guide fails to describe a method for indicating possible

plural status. For example, as in the step " check faulted S/Gs."

15. Enclosures to procedures must be subject to defined structure in the

writer's guide. The Catawba writer's guide dismisses enclosures from

the restrictions used'in procedures.

16. The use of the symbol for "approximately" is allowed by the writer's

guide. Directions that prohibit use of this symbol and require the

use of bounded tnierances whenever possible are not included in the

writer's guide.

1

!  !

l' ___ ______________j

,_. - _ - _ . -

'

.

.- ..

  • s ,

APPENDIX D-

NOMENCLATURE

This appendix contains team observations of cases where E0P and panel

nomenclature differ The licensee agreed in each case to evaluate the

difference and make the appropriate change. These items will be reviewed during

a future.NRC inspection as noted in paragraph 3.c.

Procedure Step /pg. E0P Nomenclature Component Nomenclature

EP/1/A/5000/1A 5.a.7 "S/V BEFORE SEAT "S/V BEFORE SEAT DR"

DRN CLOSE" "C LOS E

EP/1/A/5000/1A 11.2 VCT FWST

EP/1/A/5000/1B 29/25 1-RF457 1-RF457B

EP/1/A/5000/1C 24/15 -1NI-178B (ND Hdr IB To ND HEADER 18 TO NC

Cold Legs A & B) COLD LEG LOOPS C&D

VALVE INI-178B

INI-173 (ND Hdr IA To ND HEADER 1A TO NC

Cold Legs C & D) COLD LEG LOOPS A&B

VALVE INI-173A

4/4 INI-334B (NI Pump Suct SAFETY ING. PUMP

X-0VER From ND) SUCT X0VER FROM

EP/1/A/5000/103 4 1EDE-F01F No label

EP/1/A/5000/2A

Enclosure 1 1 1CA-185 LETTER SIZE IS SMALLER

THAN THE REST OF THE

LABELS

-EP/1/A/5000/2C4 3/3 1CDB-F0IC ICDB (nc breaker

cubicle label)

ICDA-F08H ICDA (no breaker

cubicle label)

EP/1/A/5000/2C5 2 IBB69 No label

EP/1/A/5000/2d3 14/7 multiple "... T/V SS ... T/V Ss RESET ... ,

RESET"

AP/1/A/5500/02 C4a2 RNO STM PRESS PRESS

D2 CF HDR PRESS S/G INLT HDR PRESS

)

- - _ _ _ - _ .. - -

. _ - _ _ _ ____- __ -

.r. ,

yg. .

=

1

D-2

Procedure ' Step /pg. E0P Nomenclature Component Nomenclature

AP/1/A/5500/03 C1,2 RNO CF HDR PRESS S/G INLT HDR PRESS

D17 R-L RAISE-LCYER I

I

D19d SWITCH NOT ON THE CONTROL j

BOARD {

AP/1/A/5500/04 2a Temp defeat Delta temp defeat

AP/1/A/5500/08 II,D.1 1AD-17 1AD-7

II,0.4b Chg Hdr Flow Chg Ln Flow

AP/1/A/5500/13 C2 & RNO CONTROL R00 BANK IS THE WRONG NAME FOR

LO-LO LIMIT FOR COMPUTER POINT

D4409

C2c. BORIC ACID XFR PMP B/A XFER PMP

AP/1/A/5500/17

Encl. 1- b2/11 Chemical letdown ... xNVP5531 LETDN ...

l

'

13/14. Blackout accident B/0 SEQ activated

sequencer activated

Encl. 6 4/2 ISGR-D-1, -3 Does not exist

1

4RN0/2 ISGR-D-2, -4 Does not exist

Encl. 7 4/3 Containment pressure Applicable meters have

inst. ids and noun;

latter do not include

any ref. to containment

pressure.

i AP/1/A/5500/25 3e/1 Refueling bridge Reactor b1dg refueling

3b/1 reactor bldg ... bridge

&

cl/2

d1/3 vp trn a upr cent vlvs ... pushbutton ...

enable switch ...

l 'vp trn b upr cont vlvs ... pushbutton ...

! enable switch

l

l

1

!

L__ _ ___ = - _ - - - - _

.. _. _ _ . . _ _ - - __

_ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -

..

.. .. ,

  • u ..

D-3

Procedure. Step /pg. E0P Nomenclature Component Nomenclature

AP/1/A/5500/26 b/1 IEMF-15 refueling spent fuel bldg

bridge spent fuel bldg refueling bridge ...

AP/1/A/5500/26 d1/3 vp trn a upr ... cont ... P/B ...

vivs enable switch ... block ...

"close"

... lwr cont vivs switch ... key switch ...

"close" . . . b1 k cl sd . . .

.. vp tr a enable ... keyswitch ...

pushbutton "close" ... block ...

vp tr b upr cont vivs ... P/B ...

enable switch "close" ... block ...

vp tr b lwr cont enable ... key switch ...

switch "close" ... bik cisd ...

OP/1/A/6450/10 2/3 -1ELCP0025 IELCP0251

e__________-____--

_ __ .

-

1

a

. . . ,

sl 9

h APPENDIX E

l LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

1

AC Alternating current

AER Actions / expected response

A0 Auxiliary operator

A0P Abnormal operating procedure

AP Administrative procedure

ASP Auxiliary Shutdown Panel

CA Auxiliary Feedwater System

CFR Code of Federal Regulations.

CLA Cold leg accumulator

CMD' Construction and modifications division

CN Catawba Nuclear

CNS Catawba Nuclear Station

CNSD Catawba Nuclear Station Directive

CSF Critical Safety Function

CST Condensate Storage Tank

DPCPDPR Duke Power Company Procedure Discrepancy Process Record

D/G Uiesel generator

DHP Dynamic head pressure

D/P. Differential pressure

DRS Division of Reactor Safety

ECA Emergency contingency action

ECCS Emergency Core Cooling System

E0P Emergency operating procedure

l EPIP Emergency plan implementing procedures

EPRI Electric Power Research Institute

ERG Westinghouse emergency response guidelines

ESF Engineering Safety Features

ETQS Employee training and qualification system

FSAR Final Safety Analysis Report

FWST Fueling Water Storage Tank

GPM Gallons per minute

GTG Generic technical guidelines

HP Health physics

IAE Instrument and electrical

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IEN Inspection and Enforcement Notice

IFI Inspector Follow-up Item

IN Information Notice

INPO Institute for Nuclear Power Operations

KC Component Cooling Water System

KF Spent Fuel Coeling System

LCO Limiting Condition for Operation

LER Licensee Event Aeport

LOCA Loss of Coolant Accident

MOD Motor operated disconnects

MSIV Main steam isolation valve

MWR Maintenance Work Request

!

.

. _ . - . _ _ _ _ _. . _ - _ =- . _ - _ _ - _____ -___--_-_-_._____ _ ___ ___- - - - _

- _ , -

'

.,

a[s A'

'

'e

.

E-2:

,

NE0 Nuclear equipment operator

NI Nuclear Instruments

NRC Nuclear Regulatory Commission

NS . Containment Spray System

NSM_ Nuclear Station Modification

NSMM' Nuclear Station Modification Manual

NUREG Nuclear Regulatory Commission

NV Chemical Volume and Control System

OAC Operator aid computer

OP Operating procedure

< 0STI Operational Safety Team Inspection

PGP Procedure generation package

PIR Problem Identification Report

PM Preventative maintenance

PORV. Power operated relief valve

PPM Parts per millfon

PRT Pressurizer relief tank

PSIG Pounds per square itich gage

PSTG Plant specific technical guidelines

PT Performance test

PWR Pressurized Water Reactor

PZR Pressurizer

QA Quality assurance

RCS Reactor Coolant System

RN Nuclear Service Water System

RNO Response not obtained

R0 Reactor operator

R&R Removal and restoration

SALP Systematic Assessment of Licensee Performance

SER Safety evaluation report

S/G Steam generator

S/G TR Steam generator tube rupture

S/I Safety injection

SME Safe Margin Earthquake

SNSWP Station Nuclear Service Water Pond

SPD .Setpoint document

SRO Senior reactor operator

SS Shift supervisor

SSE Safe Shutdown Earthquake

SSF Safe shutdown facility

SWR Standing work request

TS Technical Specifications

TSM Temporary Station Modification

UST Upper Storage Tank

VAC Volts alternating current

VCT Volume Control Tank

V&V Validation and verification

WR Work request

- _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ - - _ _ _ _ - - ___-_ ___-- _____ ________ _-__ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ .